The URL can be used to link to this page

Specifications OFFICE COPY Ai+ u mo t ipiyplVpl � ll +\ May 21, 2004 1 ' CITY OF TIGARD Rob Reynold OREGON Simplex Grinnell 6305 SW Rosewood Lake Oswego, OR 97035 RE: FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM FOR TYPE 1 HOOD Building Permit: BUP2004 -00200 Construction Type: II- 1HR Tenant Name: Metzger Elementary Occupancy Type: E -1 Address: 10350 SW Lincoln Street The plan review was performed under the State of Oregon Mechanical Specialty Code (OMSC) 2002 edition; and the Tualatin Valley Fire & Rescue Ordinance 99 -01 (TVFR99- 01) 1999 edition. The submitted plans are approved subject to the following. • The automatic fire suppression system shall be interconnected to the fuel or current supply for the cooking equipment and arranged to automatically shut off all equipment under the hood when the suppression system is activated. Shut off valves or switches shall be of a type that requires manual operation to reset. 509.5 OMSC • A readily accessible manual activation device shall be located at or near a means of egress from the cooking area, a minimum of 10 feet and a maximum of 20 feet from the kitchen exhaust system. The manual activation device shall be located a minimum of 4 '/2 feet and a maximum of 5 feet above the finished floor. Instructions for operating the fire suppression system shall be posted adjacent to manual activation device. 509.4 OMSC • An approved K -type portable fire extinguisher shall be installed within 30 feet of the cooking equipment, as measured along an unobstructed path of travel. 1006.2.7 TVFR99 -01 • Extinguishing systems shall be serviced at least every six months. 1006.2.8 TVFR99- 01 Approved Plans: 1 set of approved plans, bearing the City of Tigard approval stamp, shall be maintained on the jobsite. The plans shall be available to the Building Division inspectors throughout all phases of construction. 106.4.2 OSSC CITY OF TIGARD Respec y, Approved..L0.1 ACWP N ( Conditionally Approved ( ): For only the work as described in: PERMIT NO. 511P200/ - 40 2- Bri-• - S lalock, See Letter to: Follow ` -nior Plans Examiner Attach ( ): Job Address: /03S0 f L FA? O N 13125 SW Hall Blvd., Tigard, OR 97223 (503) 639 -4171 TDD (503)684 Date: - '' °� V SMITH 8 GREENE PORTLAND 503 258 0855 it (- zL' ' 'Qf:'C - 6 1 P.04/04 I .. _. CRNRRAI. NOTFR FOR NON WATER WASH VENTILATOIt$ Rsf MEM&L T I d b . "`°"" A locate Odd �' e`0 VENTILATOR NOTES . s N waudn °. iq4 .mm Opel Wow. pra.Y. • woad. Iye dMt FIRE PROTECTION to la -mate a deo a asbbe dm (NON— WATER WASH) INSUL R- 102 —AREFC imummitluatutsaussmzEs a EAImd edam a do- a Owe red% n doadhol by rtdlmaa SYSTEM NOTES y n =d Abp °0°b mC b -.°Emu AIR the lee d VU 0. 4. ba le .h lh A) wary ALL MAKES AND YODELS OF CO T ON pen b add en deb waled plan std tam and MA ME AND LOCATION IN REUDON TD wen and dM Wend adds met a add to Da - able .tau, tr NNtRA10t PRIOR TO FABRICATION. IPA LOGIN OF FIRE PHOIECO T NOZZLES MUST id d uoYq .plat .am preen trop. soot Mel co apeta 36 EXHAUST DUCT 8) FRONT Nm READ MO RINO BRACKETS HAVE EQAPMENT, IN TO VENTILATOR BY GAYLORD. FELD A GAURO BI Y 0.: 1500 CiM •0.625 NOES. BRADcETS TO BE SUPPORTED FABRCATINL S Del •b• had a 1100 1R 0 !pn FASTEN TO WALL BY COVPtETE SYSTEM Kum APPUAN0. DROPS, t4.RQ AC REOIIIREYBN79 91E: 10• a tY L0. 1 187FR! IY OF EACH END OF EACH SECTION, M114 a Mde•w d node a apps - ,demand d d eeald Woad d SP.: t.ar W.G YAOWY SPAN OF 72' BETWEEN 91PPORIS RECESSED DETECOOt BRACKETS. AND A STARLESS t dmo ahwsl .plan Leer art b m pt d Ur we d mdrmare • E XM VFNITL INSTALLER •E INTERIOR MOUNTING BRACKET(S) T(S) TO BE 91PPORTm SIEEI CARNET CN DE 00 OF THE HOOD BY a Ode ca b adze A r W e d mw Mee r abhhuled , ,�/ • ��,, ,,// , ,,� ) IBITIN 76 OF EACH QM OF EA CI SECTION. TIN N Weapon W, den A 9.1.2 5W d More b teal ER NSTAILITO I TA le SIX d In relomeed d .IoM to end. •ddlesd (bated ° IMAM SPIN OF 72 BEIWEDI SUPPORTS MGM FOE SYSIEY FACTORY I/STAL ED DI A odd) at brw4d Na U.S Mae mare - AS Oa rodadeF 20 to 252 .. 1 . 5 STARLESS STEEL CARNET ON THE END OF DIE HOOD. J d- to mr rho Um mew to *Red OWL l 7El.SE 111.0 VENTILATOR WIRING NOTES PIE -PIPED an= EBBS NawNC Incl. F3ERUM • • p 11 _ cup___ _ _ % Ate APPUANGE OM ■IH ALL NOThES INSTAL D %W ad= Ree. e a hoard b msdaaa ab 169A-99 aed d der tom ` (NON— WATER WASH) PER O1010 EQUIPMENT AT ON CARORD coke* ado Cmtrod= eel maim cppOa% meta OM ado II CO ( . 5 ado Wade *why r 5121221122 spa dletln It • to ELECTRIC DAMPER) AFRROYED �� PIPING CIBIOYE a yea to me metes dole to donna, ban eaaaep D E TA IL 1 PLATED CR ORME sumo. NUDES FACTORY en+0w•61• a wrA Red tan amholia (WILL 21112. •!4 FUSE URIC -12 J PRE -PIPED ORCEALED DETECTION LNES BIN LINO odd Vad VenOden merhmnd r Asa* melba m hoary pm. h a dq. INLET ' r - - - - l (4) 1H 1E5 AND DRDUND. FOR 6 'Eno N OETECO31 EKES NTERCOOIECRD TO TAN K(S). ans o.l . at= V. awadad hen dread b b. 54 CHEMICAL INLET, SERVES - — - VEN11UlOR aY GriOm. TNRFD ro F AN/U01T INSTALLATION BY COINED FACTORY NSTAUERS mwmdd by doted mmato. FL N1LA t B DRT, LORD. Doman 6• BEYOND END OF 4 xn0oten madam d h neer notes ma Ina trees Wen REM )01, & VENT. ITT-T, _a_— - -� - _ = _ - SMIEN BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. ELM mcandd fan a o amps auOr gain Vodkas lVodkas m (7N -4FP) r • TAWS) RERELEASE ASSCIBLT(S) awned a Waned h a nennetal by deem eat'ede. fa I I * UCIT RXNRES VAPOR PROOF. U.L UsTED. M Olden bend wm 7 valeta 164-oD to to b podded e I 4' INURING ( 0 • (2 IIOt6 AND IROU ND, FOR U01T�), GAYLORD. ; DET G WOG NTH IMAGE Mead by aOrA b avatle- .m ePTlabb men Wed mm4 sal I I 1 CHEMICAL CABLE be a demmtly Wad OyM t L L J II. Al -tad= n dead ell boned broad. Hegel std b b INSTAL u pped by adbte betake Rowe weight d We wallet°(.) b mad 2 1.375 MTG. BRACKET Fl IT UI 1 O FAN/UCI MOAT. 6' BEYOND END T • P PROTECTED N CAS C LLER) ROCE(S) ((FRONDED BY FIRE with envie BY GAYLORD S1L1 l BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORT PROTECTED 10 INSTALLER) beaten amebae h wager adds e. graded .M babe dos. • (1) REMOTE MANUAL PULL STADCN and d enemy -den e _ - •d Sidle erg en �dl l AvnmL , • ' • • • • • • • t ,. . (T) CF 2 PER FIRE SYSTEM A MAXIMUM trod ba � by bola VERIFY CEILING. 92E 0 2 -1/2 ® T O, ',, 2.0 CONDITIONS • (1) IUMJAL RESET DELAY PER FOE SYSTEM, REILIARED II Vet COMUCIMil lechnd h abet academe dm Cayes apm�mtlaa 24 a 541 I Sri VENTILATOR IA/ FI i EXACT F1001 TO STR STRUCTURAL COLON AND FLOCS TO F FIE PRO ENCLENCLOSURE a<aw•. F114191 OILING HEMS MUST BE VEERED FOR •PUNS AND PERMITS (C41 JOBS NSmE 6 THE IA Vaa.tav castned d II C• Alden deL Ted 30e. NA 4 ad Wm - 111 FASTEN TO WALL BY VENTILATOR OE9T71. INCORRECT REMITS MAY CAUSE PARIS UNITED AND STATES AND NON OF CHEMICAL AND E JOBS) 6 � 10 OVE RHANG • PARIS NSTALLARCI OF CRE deer add a H1NC TO COOLNC VENOLAIOR INSTALLER THE f2 E ARA NC E SP APPLICABLE C00E5 c lre IOf ale dries E e ad DETECTM LDES FRCI TANKS) TO CONNECTION bF I!. athpMYq . p GA LO (NS baled h a®ma wan 14/PA 6 '-0• (Tr) EQUIPMENT DETA 2 AND Is R MAN THE TOP OF DIE VENTILATOR, I r STANDARDS. RasaRasa CECEILING CEILING C • FONTS RHO rANXS AND RELATED mEDNENrs urtQRD (ANM R -1021 12 AT 250 CFM/if ( I& Cade Fire ceadr - del g p q bated a Oa wdvodka at )tb • NSTALLAIIQI OF DETECTOR - r AND FUME a eowd d dfh adea le man dbso aam not amulet. ENCLOSURE PANELS MAY BE REOURE0. AS du -Weld• • gaud /prfara s aped We dJ may aY IL r -0• I ( Y) was tladYmm d eta w1 FLOOR To STRUCTURAL 01LPIG • NSTAUAW PU CN CF REMOTE MANUAL LL STAMM 17. 1PDLTANT NOTE WW-W1 rats Dot d Pa as eta* c b. t FLOOR TO Fwlsi =NO tB-0' (1W'i) • .03 9TE REPORTER/4G OF NOZZLES AS PER • ipoenL Dal b Redd by Auden I{ le prot eat mtomelbdy PLAN VIEW d el off wade fns D. •AM *1 Wee E S1STDI CORI REOIREMENTS la DPDRAU1 NOM Sal halo depdmmb men sewed had a_ le I • VP TEST AND CERTIFICATICF (01 JOBS INSIDE OF dotage web Pa to elaidlers The eel pamem b trimly ablate! es* Ur plat elm apheetl ad Oa O• prelate parr& bn the THE um STATES AND NCR ABS) ea paaua b.oe n le w mapdWNy of V. real, added a NQIE: PRIOR TO FABRICATION EXCLIOXY dam! Ala led twee deehwa a Not realm nob °d b alah EQUIPMENT YODEL. dawn pnr&A MANUFACTURER Ac LOCATION • UNION LABOR Alm PREVAILING WAGE ELECTRICAL \ • AIICN or CAS v*L1E(S) RJSet= MTZ I BE VERIFIED > \ \ \\ • LECTR 19. led Rates h snarl= rd Danes lea lie JD dal caste Al Al 1PIl FOR FIRE PROTECTION Os 54 • • EL DISC01EC15 metro avid a a • deed, t m dada Add a Sale Wen • PARTS AND LABOR FOR ANY ELECTRICAL Winn II Oar• mead a 1pht b aspldl• dW ot lo IsdN ads. • DUCT -t0 6 NhPC PLENUM NOIRE L__„ JOB SIT REPOST) P09TIC LNG OF NOIDES IF =WIG Naz21p 9 1100 1 a p 1 I \ AAPPROVEDT 6 O ALIID PER CAYIOm 1 N 1 I I ;� F OE OAFIPfA •BANS AND PERMITS ON JOBS OUTSItE OF THE } 4 F U � UP STATES NW CI MAINE JOBS • IMP TEST AND OAIIRCADOF CM JOBS OUr9DE CF I � ` TEE WITTED STATES AND OH MAINE .OS OaT • HAND FRE EXIINOR9CR(S) 24 1 �� \ EXTRACTOR • NSPECEXN NO SENACNC IJ TUIG AND COMP) E RE TESTING. S 1 9 s' \ DETAIL 1 DPORAIT NOTE Ceyn Valet= en deleted to awl Y. Nolen cods ` _ T Ibd bean Lad coda may Hwy. Calh d relate Aral a wed h rp 11519 d lad m ma eta Oat y del le wound Ode T' I ` -•-- 24 F.P. DROP I \ NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION 12 1 45 1 \ Ds want wale cart, d Ie4trmlda d _ _ - _ - _e A. alit sage d MFPA -% i liOD • N O 17 - NATIONAL SANITATION FOUNDATION -W II areale te RV had ode 57 n FJf. no. 12 Standard F 2 - led Sad2 Wear Q HT. 12 NN UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES. INC. O (LORE>) - , AND \ 2.524 J SUPPIJED Os shoat shoat waled, Ica bee bed Low Low .maws UL 710 \ 4.fiill A INSTALIRD BY Ideal None a N Cypnad O I Ul Mad L.___, / - sea a near 1411403 a mf1317t — / ELECTRICAL CONYR - INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE 1 le Weal weu•Ie mot. a n.paroaN l \ 7 6 _ I blrmUeM Ndtrtl al P. m Cara Bl�BBBflH MTG. HT. E0. HL • i 1 ® LVYN+ �V II — \ (MAX.) 4.625 0 - 1 APPROVAL NOTICE ITEM 602 O I \ 1 • I Prr a nadq Oo .ogee fa harden. Al dme4 and b d to CO NV . OVEN O I 1 I s L 1I - -•- e Mead read D• enem ate el y adds a wad oar d e + 1414 a m S MEOW ICOSSA . NC. By we pat dne e. m BLODGETT e cow, came e m .,wren' sew to Do Pad rota deb m• pro-200 ITEM pl \ FAN /LIGHT ON —OFF SWITCH eal m oa . sr w -Ida e t Os W sp Tad ad dead: 7. Al dan1ms mei a eel doe std bales drab ad not .de • I IL— — WOLF l2: v 2 01 o� ma d anal,, admen la \ Model C -150 bens end war O �s - ate s 2. lb hales d IN more spipmel b wdtm b Ua ( I�BI t888B8 L - - Oak. a mart n dem a p ram pacaemt a IN .elm. n. psN1r„ wades. ll i J IMPORTANT NOTICE ' my vans b cede need bale. 10Ildro Oa rode d an wee m fd• soda and a esapl a pr 01(04 a d ultra NORM L 12 d B 38125 I T6 6 1 - SECTION VIEW NORM INC twits pat b b, mad toe and ow b R1ddy - �.B pa-da 7 13 Ram and Rea1bmR r -0' APPROVED FOR FABRICATION O Ethel dean gLEVATION VIEW O wen change as down ANSUL R- 102- AREFC- IT- 3N -4FP FP 3312402 MANSON IOERANCE CX2- BDL -54 H -1 3312401 throe• Dab 2 144• (Wm) YODEL / ITEM / WORK ORDER 4 t VENTILAT l ou r [e ornep as em aam ' rte. b nc w 4b as Y von de •rden bae.aM sot mw -nab a• m llysd bends doe a arced d ny dogs .dam a Ile dos b b -car • sae de Idea eta. b made Se a der Ad aebam mean Caen Idea .N not m EP add a de wooer a Weep! e7 ad by 1-d` e a Were r m0e_Od dadazes Wand by MAXI G AYLO R D M CL MEMO! VT/M R RS MANUFACTURED RI MULTIPLE ..e dam Add.. el don °a AN at n ad= ds m-. • a • red s d omNema imw. d can Idol • m - 7 L a 4 a SECTIONS A FROMM 11111 11111 8415. a1P5. Arm - _ - _ demo .wary be lad nun pro •y dl a+.r o + d den• le r d. Tbb eta r to Pasty d D ME'IZG ER ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ?' - H ALL NECESSARY H FOR CI STALL E CONTROL A NC BY s b . a ••••••••• need b Nos • b l e It 11 m a (01. waled. a r Caked told , pm s d l - on ea.r t es add ae. d d e. de R b ~ e a e• dm sae Caked Waldo INDUSTRIES INC. \ TOTAL ESTIMATED HAWN RIGHT: THE YENiNAT02 ARE P INSTALLER CONTROL AND latma m r dad eel sped m and M soh maw am.dda. treat' s ,Iona w my D b and b =MI y 6110- Los SS 0E O CTEO FOR S ARE PIE - EED AND admen bades ad earn nse awed da mm yplm. ebeaa a a el Adobe a adds • pied ad Tig a rd. OR GAYLORD ) 0600CTEO SMUT. WING MUST BE mom ebema Meer dam h d dada add den • omed by Orden halm dlt wad• and ad Dana 2 REC0QECIED BY APPLCABLE TRADES De°1 al Doe pee ad a mmbema d a day anon law dam ...Mad lbw made a India ma P b e 10900 S6 AVERY ST. 1ElEPHWC 507 891 -2010 hale db naI ad vdm be= ere Ye An ar. ( ) Aar record do loam) m pea ad U aem eta a P.O. BOX 1149 TOLL FREE: (BOO) 547 - 9696 berm ban dos. Oa Oa Pam et re bo 51914 et m TUALATIN. 0E 97062 NO.: a 49 FAX N Whams ad b ra.omry odd s to dada d spa (503) 692 - 8048 teem b deo Ae Id car ma Lasbesc, m b mead E-MAIL: 9eAddlbenfdawe.COM wawa Ma ..e. wawa. 119110 : DA ' V. o '_.r CHEERED IF 03 - 3124 13 - 14 - I of_ - . a • . a • 1 . U • ■ WIRING NOTES • E -I) AU. EXTERNAL CONTROL WING SHALL BE 12 GAUGE MINIMUM OR AS PER APPLICABLE CODES E -2) THE HOLDING COOS %MN THE MAGNETIC STARTERS "' • OR LIGHTS EU CIRICAL SERVICE F r MUST MATCH THE SUPPLY VOLTAGE MAGNETIC " 15 AMP MAIL MUST F FUSED l LS1 - — — STARTERS ARE SUPPLIED BY OTHERS - TYPICAL ANSUL WIRING DIAGRAM SEPARATELY FROM FAN CIRCUIT l52 1 I E -3) VENTILATOR FAN CIRCUIT: IRIS IS A SERIES Man ELL= 1. FOG GAS YAM l r CONNECT HOT FROM FAN MIDI TO FIRST HOOD '1 N'. Aim RESET MAY PROVIDED ANSUL R -102 SYSTEM NCI° WITACfpI SYIOF ILI) ANSUL 1TUAL IvAO srTa • TO VENTILATOR CONTINUE CONNECTING EACH H000 our TO THE NEXT LOCATED it /LRAM MUER 940•4 • Br CA0010. WSU TED ua4TS HOOD 1N'. UNTIL LAST HOOD IS REACHED. CONNECT m COO® POSLOQI (s'SIDI REAP) I BY aE mai COwTRAC16t 1p' OFT COl T TO ROWOTE I SUPPLY 1RTAIE Rio b lab ARE PULL STADIA BY ERE FLEJOBLE CONDUIT VAIN 4 WIRES LAST HOOD -our TO FAN MAGNETIC STARIER(S1 • wLrAa FREE w/o— — ; „A x =II w NU It 6 PROTECTION CO CONTRACTED DE To AND GROUND, PROVIDED I1IH ANN 'IA Ras _ — - 0E `P1OTECTER Y FOE nal GAYLORD N?ITILATOR m emFIC_ _ T„� T- -0 — � E PROTECTION =DRUM {/ 111/0111 RESET RELAY DOUBLE FOIE ° — i „p I F — — L t- 1 -1 r rocs TO SUPPLY SINGLE RRON 91T19CH r �-I —� u — + ' 0 • ri ,o .. ■ t: . 1 1 DOME SE/DICE BY Qy L PN /BRY4902 -I, PROVIDED I r -- — — � r r w/e I I — 0 T "e r ” + 1 • � 1 ��TAO O I ES TO CAS Y L 7 BY GAYIDRD. INSTALLED BY ( r - -- RID J I ` I S° 1 1 I � m TACicRYe YAM FIELD J-BOX BY 1 I ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR I : N G=Colo 1 J I r J rAlPl p 1 I - r to mr-AL =MALI • ELECTRICAL I r �¢ — „ I I I I, ,� L.4L _ J _ 1. CONTRACTOR (TYP) I J I T r I cAS ` �SO1 L N/C. ROOM ( ID rx)I j I rf aEEToc ca1RAcT _ 110 ORES TO MUM Ell T� IRO TO _ ma 0 r r TO CORM I I VISTA= BY PU IO CONTRACTOR 1110 TO SONNY FAw(s). - -) I E 01 A 7 pB I ro IAQ06 r ©I I I I I I� FAN/UCHT SWITCH U J I EawNT 1' STARLESS STEEL MKT AVM SYSTEM MLECm�1L BY CAM= I L I I 4- - INSTALLED IN FIELD J-BOX �_— I L — — — ._1, ��1 fro Imp- 3o(GtaBOROIO+mEroO�] L BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR J 9 REA KLUGE L — — _ _II'i BY 1 — — - - I i I aR P P�A.9�Lr TTT I•.,. EXHAUST FAN(S), MOTOR, MAGNETIC I I L2 Ll J `fir ROIL DUG BY I I _ = .\ ELECiFGCAL SERVCE Y OTHERS I L — — J r SUIT TRIP eaEAral ■ x OOL ( I EJECTRrx mTlRUla, CLEAR= CORACTS =AU II CENTAC10R 01. R/0 =REACTS. TO SLIT =MCA LOAD — L°O OJ SEE NOTE E -2 L J r— _1 Eaut OE TORALAL i L Eta� INSTALLED NY ELECTRICAL m11�1R L j SUPPLY VOLTAGE [X 120V • []� I- FIELD TURING 8Y OTHERS I. [X] 50HI — WRING BY GAYLORD • .T • .1 a ANSUL R- 102- ARlFC- IT- 3N -4FP FP 3312402 dmDISON THANE GX2- BILL -54 H -1 3312401 • . * 1/4 (Bmm) UCOEL / ITEM t mat( ORDER I -• INSTALLATION INFORMATION Ibb da • am bat seta. bit NCI AN aaaamb s b Wad boa*. ..d b DAWN d .a1do aka b t a PIA b NA {° I De= bb 1 > ' rJS' - baby 1 u' ____ a - M. oaoslal Midas a Oka b masm am I* a d• 4 wow= 0000. I. d 0000 r 04 a EP m bar blab sopa a �sabdO b ma s. by mambo b aP kebob a emon boom Ma.. I b GAYLORD — d ad �.Ia.l. , ob r aa..a r 0,aaa.aM.lr.r.b..u d METZGER ELEMENTARY SCHOOL. r .d M.sbl odd arasA o O Ot/ad d drgr b y Plea o de b d Pro d a„ s Ba a i.A..d br pc. g.. Ia. a.asaadbasb Is le t el to l a sU IONWa4 b D4.0. oo .d OW po eA bP . ..a Pans Ian .r , b pal R b le b o arm t m O.Aad adaAds INDUSTRIES INC. mamba a. b..1.1.1 ells alpeo 0 ad a dal. as .yaaoAa�.m aaa.r m aq A r d b eaadla. wa..d I o r b am adao war ors m coal by G b a Moan sal a AIWA d pe dad .ae T Tigard. OR ado GAYLORD._) . t... d Manna I a Oa dad s d s o d oP ard r0blb NBA yob* boob de Piy • 0 /a• s maser. by AN bI bmm dtb sN Pa .d a bob. naa•.7PI al AN ba.aA'. 10800 W. AVERY ST. 1ELFPHONE: (303) 891 - 2010 ma •ma�dd.d0 mamma. w ad ea•ma add 0 P.O. BOX 1149 TOLL FREE: (800) 547 - 9698 bias Am dad ma reed .al.a AN ad bed, eta a TUALAIN, CR 97062 -1149 FAX NO.: (503) 692 -8048 .ram sat be 1®R.1y edd b as Cab, d sari 0 _ 1.1 ROY .44 a ba of AN b..84!ds. s a nodal E-10•11: 9ollad0 O)taedafnebm .0. 7 ' REV DRYN9Y O ATS BENSONS DaE DIED Bt 03 -3124 18 -14 -03 I 1 >adt I 2 01 2 I Mk SUL DESIGN R -102 RESTAURANT . , V. INSTALLATION FIRE SUPPRESSION RECHARGE AND SYSTEM MAINTENANCE (Standard UL 300 Listed) r MANUAL • 101 wo g 11 i J Ew e 1 ip _ I. s air t = sow t ows I II II) (_'—' stL) C I I 10 I i j m„Oa • • This manual is intended for use with Ansul R -102 Restaurant • Fire Suppression Systems. • • Those who install, operate, recharge, or maintain these fire sup- • pression systems should read this entire manual :Specific sec - tions will be of particular interest depending upon one's responsibilities. • Design, installation, recharge, and maintenance of the system must conform to the limitations detailed in this manual and per- formed by an individual who attended an Ansul training program and became trained to install, recharge, design, and maintain the Ansul system. Fire suppression systems are mechanical devices. They need periodic care. Maintenance is a vital step in the performance of your fire suppression system. As such it must be performed in accordance with NFPA 96 (Standard for the Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease -Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment) and NFPA 17A (Standard on Wet Chethical Extinguishing Systems) by an authorized Ansul distributor. To provide maximum assurance that the fire suppres- sion system will operate effectively and safely, maintenance must" be conducted at six -month intervals, or earlier if the situation dic- tates. Twelve -year maintenance must include agent tank hydro- static testing. • ANSUL PART NO. 418087-07 ANSUL, ANSUL AUTOMAN and ANSULEX are trademarks ot Ansel Incorporated or its affiliates. • • • • • • L REVISION INDEX NOTE: Latest manual revision includes all pages dated 7 -1 -98 except as noted below. UL EX 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 1 10 -1 -02 REV.8 DATE PAGE REV. NO. DATE PAGE REV. NO. A I 8 -1 -01 2 -1 ; 2 10 -1-02 4-6 4 J 8 -1 -01 2 -2 3 10 -1 -02 4 -7 3 8 -1 -01 5 -1 4 10-1 -02 4 -8 5 8 -1 -01 5-14 2 10 -1 -02 4 -9 6 8 -1 -01 5 -15 2 10 -1 -02 4 -10 . 5 8 -1 -01 5 -20 2 10 -1 -02 4 -11 6 8 -1 -01 5 -21 2 10 -1 -02 4 -12 5 8 -1 -01 5 -22 2 10 -1 -02 4-13 4 8 -1 -01 5 -23 3 10 -1 -02 4 -14 5 8 -1 -01 5 -27 Deleted 10 -1 -02 4 -15 . 4 10 -1 -02 1 -1 3 10 -1 -02 4 -16 5 10 -1 -02 1 -2 3 10 -1 -02 4 -17 5 10 -1 -02 3 -1 3 10 -1 -02 4 -18 5 10 -1 -02 3-2 3 10 -1 -02 4 -19 3 X10 -1 -02 3 -3 6 10 -1 -02 4 -20 4 10 -1 -02 3 -4 5 10 -1 -02 , 4 -21 3 10 -1 -02 3-5 4 10-1-02 4 -22 3 10-1 -02 3-6 4 10 -1 -02 4 -23 5 10-1 -02 3-7 4 10 -1 -02 4 -24 5 10 -1 -02 3-8 5 10-1-02 4 -25 6 10 -1 -02 3 -9 2 10 -1 -02 4 -26 5 10 -1 -02 3-10 1 10 -1 -02 4 -27 4 10 -1 -02 4 -1 5 10-1-02 4 -28 3 10 -1 -02 4-2 3 10 -1 -02 4-29 3 1- 0-1 -02 4 -3 4 10-1-02 4-30 3 10 -1 -02 4-4 4 10-1-02 4-31 5 10-1 -02 4-5 3 10 -1 -02 4 -32 4 1 • Indicates revised information. REVISION INDEX r ` UL EX 3470 . ULC CEx747 Page 2 ) REV. 2 10 -1 -02 DATE PAGE REV. NO. DATE PAGE . ... REV. NO. 10 -1 -02 4 -33 5 10 -1 -02 5 -5 4 I 10 -1 -02 4 -34 5 10 -1 -02 5-6 2 10 -1 -02 4 -35 3 10 -1 -02 5 -7 3 10 -1 -02 4 -36 2 10 -1 -02 5 -18 4 10 -1 -02 4 -37 3 10 -1 -02 5 -19 4 10 -1 -02 4 -38 4 10 -1 -02 5 -24 3 k 10 -1 -02 4 -39 3 10 -1 -02 5 -25 3 10 -1 -02 4 -40 2 10 -1 -02 5 -26 3 10 -1 -02 4 -41 2 10 -1 -02 6-3 2 10 -1 -02 4 -42 3 10 -1 -02 6 -4 2 10 -1 -02 4 -43 . 3 10 -1 -02 7 4 10 -1 -02 4-44 3 10 -1 -02 7 -3 3 - 10-1-02 4 -45 1 10 -1 -02 8- 6 10 -1 -02 4 -46 3 10 -1 -02 8 - 2 2 10 -1 -02 4 -47 2 10 -1 -02 8 -3 3 10 -1 -02 4 -48 2 10 -1 -02 8 -4 4 10 -1 -02 4 -49 2 10 -1 -02 8 -5 3 10 -1 -02 4 -50 2 10 -1 -02 8 - 6 4 / 10 -1 -02 4 -51 2 10 -1 -02 • 8 -7 3 10 -1 -02 4 -52 1 10 -1 -02 8 -8 1 10 -1 -02 4 -53 1 10 -1 -02 9 -1 5 . 10 -1 -02 4 -54 1 10 -1 -02 9 -2 5 10 -1 -02 4 -55 1 10 -1 -02 9 -3 1 5 10 -1 -02 4 -56 1 10 -1 -02 9 7 10 -1 -02 5 -2 3 10 -1 -02 9 5 10 -1 -02 5 -2.1 4 10 -1 -02 9-6 . 4 - 10-1 -02 5-4 4 10 -1 -02 9 -6.1 3 . Indicates revised information. • -� REVISION INDEX UL EX 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3 Q r 10-102 DATE PAGE REV. NO. DATE PAGE REV. NO. 4 10 -1-02 9 -6.2 . 2 10 -1 -02 9-7 3 10 -1 -02 9 -8 3 10 -1 -02 9-9 3 10 71 -02 9 -10 3 10 -1 -02 9 -10.1 1 10 -1 -02 9 -10.2 1 10-1 -02 9 -11 5 10 -1 -02 9 -12 3 10-1 -02 9 -13 Deleted 10-1 -02 9 -14 Deleted 10 -1 -02 9 -15 Deleted 10 -1-02 9 -16 Deleted • P ■ Indicates revised information. O. I • TABLE OF CONTENTS • UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 10 - - REV. 6 .1 SECTION PAGES SECTION PAGES I. GENERAL INFORMATION 1 -1 -1 -2 III. SYSTEM COMPONENTS 3-1 - 3 -10 ', DESIGN AND APPLICATION 1 -1 (Continued) ELECTRICAL SWITCHES 3-9 UL LISTING 1 "1 ALARM INITIATING SWITCH 3 -9 DEFINITION OF TERMS 1 -1 - 1-2 REGULATOR TEST KIT 3 -10 II. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 2-1 - 2-2 FUSIBLE LINK 3 -10 TOTAL SYSTEM 2-1 MAXIMUM REGISTERING 3 -10 • Single -Tank 2-1 THERMOMETER Double -Tank 2-1 BURSTING DISC 3-10 Multiple -Tank 2 2 • NOZZLE AIMING DEVICE 3 -10 III. SYSTEM COMPONENTS 3-1 - 3-10 STAINLESS STEEL ACTUATOR HOSE 3 -10 EXTINGUISHING AGENT 3 - 1 IV. SYSTEM DESIGN 4 - - 4 - "ANSUL AUTOMAN" REGULATED 3 -1 RELEASE ASSEMBLY NOZZLE PLACEMENT 4 -1 - 4-31 (MECHANICAL) REQUIREMENTS " ANSUL AUTOMAN" REGULATED 3 -1 Duct Protection 4 -1 - 4-4 Precipitator 4 -4 RELEASE ASSEMBLY Protection (ELECTRICAL) Ple Protection 4 -5 - 4 6 SINGLE TANK ENCLOSURE 3-2 Appliance Protection ASSEMBLY • Fryer - Single Nozzle Protection 4 -7 - 4 -9 RED PAINTED BRACKET ASSEMBLY 3 -2 Multiple Nozzle Fryer Protection - 4 -1 0 - 4 -12 Tilt Skillet/Braising Pan REGULATED ACTUATOR 3 2 Range Protection 4 -13 - 4 -16 A Griddle Protection 4 -17 - 4 -21 AGS SEMBLY ENT TANK ASSEMBLY 3 2 Chain Broiler Protection 4-22 OEM RELEASE/BRACKET 3 Overhead Chain Broiler Protection 4-22 - 4-23 ASSEMBLY (FOR OEM Upright/Salamander Broiler 4 -23 IN- CABINET USE ONLY) Protection OEM REGULATED ACTUATOR 3 -3 Electric Char - Broiler Protection 4 -24 ASSEMBLY Gas- Radiant Char - Broiler 4 -24 TWO TANK ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY 3-3 Protection Lava -Rock (Ceramic) Char - Broiler 4 -25 24 VDC REGULATED RELEASE 3 -3 Protection ASSEMBLY Natural Charcoal Broiler Protection 4 -25 ADDITIONAL SHIPPING ASSEMBLY 3 -4 Alternate Ceramic//Natural 4 -26 Charcoal Char - Broiler Protection GAS CARTRIDGES 3-4 Wood Fueled Char - Broiler Protection 4 -26 NOZZLES 3 -5 . Wok Protection 4-27 SWIVEL ADAPTOR 3 -5 Nozzle Application Chart 4 -28 - 4-31 Specific Application by Model 4 -32 - 4 -39 RUBBER BLOW -OFF CAP 3 -5 TANK AND CARTRIDGE 4 -40 METAL BLOW -OFF CAP 3 -5 REQUIREMENTS CONDUIT OFFSET ASSEMBLY 3 -6 ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT 4 -40 - 4 -42 "QUIK - SEAL " ADAPTOR 3 -6 GAS LINE REQUIREMENTS "COMPRESSION- SEAL" ADAPTOR 3 -6 DISTRIBUTION PIPING 4 -42 - 4 -49 REQUIREMENTS "HOOD SEAL" ADAPTOR 3-6 General Piping Requirements 4 -42 ASSEMBLY Supply and Branch Line 4 -43 - 4 -44 DETECTORS 3 -7 Identification PULLEY ELBOWS 3 -7 1.5 Gallon System 4 -45 3.0 Gallon System 4 -46 PULLEY TEE 3-8 6.0 Gallon Manifolded System 4 -47 - 4 -48 STAINLESS STEEL CABLE 3 -8 9.0 Gallon System 4 -49 REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION 3-8 MECHANICAL GAS VALVES 3-8 ELECTRICAL GAS VALVES 3 MANUAL RESET RELAY 3 -9 TABLE OF CONTENTS UI.X. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 2 REV. 5 10 -1 -02 SECTION PAGES SECTION PAM A IV. SYSTEM DESIGN (Continued) VII. RECHARGE AND RESETTING 7 -1 —7-4 DETECTION SYSTEM 4 -50 — 4 -51 PROCEDURES REQUIREMENTS CLEANUP PROCEDURES 7-1 Detector Identification 4 -50 RECHARGE 7 -1 — 7 3 Detector/Pulley Elbow Quantity 4-50 RESETTING • 7 -3 — 7 -4 Detector Placement Requirements 4 -50 — 4 -51 Detection Line Requirements 4-51 REPLACEMENT CARTRIDGE 7-4 Fusible Link Selection 4 -51 MANUAL PULL STATION 4 -52 VIII. MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION 8 -1 —8-8 REQUIREMENTS SEMI- ANNUAL MAINTENANCE • 8 -1 — 8-3 MECHANICAL GAS VALVE 4 -52 — 4 -53 EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS 12 -YEAR MAINTENANCE 8 -4 — 8 -8 ELECTRICAL GAS VAE 4 -53 EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS LV Approvals 4 -53 IX. APPENDIX 9-1 —9-12 ALARM INITIATING SWITCH 4 -53 SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDE 9 -1 — 9 -4 REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM COMPONENT INDEX 9 -5 — 9 -6.2 ELECTRICAL SWITCH 4 -53 — 4 -56 PARTS LISTS . 9 -7 — 9 -10.2 REQUIREMENTS MULTIPLE NOZZLE FRYER 9 -11 V. INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 5-1 — 5-26 PROTECTION CALCULATION EXAMPLES MOUNTING THE COMPONENTS 5 -1 — 5 -2.2 INSTALLING THE ACTUATION 5 -3 — 5 -6 AND EXPELLANT GAS LINES INSTALLING THE DISTRIBUTION 5 -7 PIPING INSTALLING THE DETECTION 5 -8 — 5 -17 SYSTEM Installing "Clip -on" Style Linkage 5 -8 — 5 -12 "Scissors" Style Linkage Installation 5 -12 — 5 -15 Installing "Hinged" Style Linkage 5 -15 — 5 -17 INSTALLING REMOTE MANUAL 5 -18 — 5-19 PULL STATION INSTALLING MECHANICAL 5 -19 — 5 -22 GAS VALVE INSTALLING ELECTRICAL 5 -23 GAS VALVE INSTALLING ELECTRICAL 5 -24 SWITCHES WIRING 24 VDC REGULATED 5 -25 RELEASE ASSEMBLY VI. TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE 6-1 — 6-4 TESTING MANUAL PULL STATION 6-1 TESTING MECHANICAL GAS 6-1 VALVES TESTING ELECTRICAL GAS 6-2 VALVES TESTING ELECTRIC SWITCH 6-2 TESTING DETECTION SYSTEM 6 -3 • , SECTION I — GENERAL INFORMATION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 1 ' 10 -1 -02 REV. 3 DESIGN AND APPLICATION DEFINITION OF TERMS The Ansul R -102 Restaurant Fire Suppression System is Actuation Gas Line: Piping from the ANSUL AUTOMAN designed to provide fire protection for restaurant cooking appli- Regulated Release Assembly which supplies nitrogen or carbon ances, hoods, and ducts. It is a pre - engineered group of mechan- dioxide to the Regulated Actuator Assembly for multiple -tank sys- ical and electrical components for installation by an authorized tern actuation. Ansul distributor. The basic system consists of an ANSUL Agent Tank: A pressure vessel containing the liquid agent. AUTOMAN regulated release assembly which includes a regulat- ed release mechanism and a liquid agent storage tank housed ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly (Electrical): within a single enclosure. Nozzles, detectors, cartridges, liquid An assembly which contains the regulated release mechanism, agent, fusible links, pulley tees, and pulley elbows are supplied in agent tank (ordered separately), expellant gas hose, solenoid, and separate packages in the quantities needed for each fire suppres- electric switch within a metal enclosure. The enclosure contains Sion system arrangement. knockouts to facilitate component hookups. The system provides automatic actuation; or it can be actuated ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly (Mechani- manually through a remote manual pull station. The system is also cal): An assembly which contains the regulated release mecha- capable of shutting down appliances at system actuation. For nism, agent tank (ordered separately), and expellant gas hose appliance shutdown requirements, refer to the current version of within a metal enclosure. The enclosure contains knockouts to NFPA 17A, "Standard For Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems; facilitate component hookups. and NFPA 96, 'Standard For Ventilation Control and Fire Authority Having Jurisdiction: The "authority having jurisdiction" Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations" is the organization, office, or individual responsible for "approving" Additional equipment includes: remote manual pull station, equipment, an installation, or a procedure. The phrase "Authority mechanical and electrical gas valves, pressure switches, and elec- Having Jurisdiction" is used in a broad manner since jurisdictions trical switches for automatic equipment and gas line shut -off. and "approval" agencies vary as do their responsibilities. Where Accessories can be added, such as alarms, warning lights, etc., to public safety is primary, the °authority having jurisdiction" may be installations where required. a federal, state, local, or other regional department or individual such as a fire chief, fire marshal, chief of a fire prevention bureau, The R -102 system suppresses fire by spraying the plenum area, labor department, health department, building official, electrical the filters, cooking surfaces, and the exhaust duct system with a inspector, or others having statutory authority. For insurance pur- predetermined flow rate of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire poses, an insurance company representative may be the "author - Suppressant. When the liquid agent is discharged onto a cooking ity having jurisdiction." In many circumstances the property owner appliance fire, it cools the grease surface, and reacts with the hot or his designated agent assumes the role of the "authority havinc... ,: . grease (saponification) forming a layer of soap -like foam on the jurisdiction;" at government installations, the commanding officer::_-" surface of the fat. This layer acts as insulation between the hot or departmental official may be the "authority having jurisdiction." grease and the atmosphere, thus helping to prevent the escape of combustible vapors. Blow -Off Cap: A cap which covers the end of the nozzle tip and prevents grease from plugging the nozzle orifice. Exhaust fans in the ventilating system should be left on. The forced draft of these fans assists the movement of the liquid agent Branch Line: The agent distribution piping which extends from the through the ventilating system, thus aiding in the fire suppression supply line to the nozzle(s). pfocess. These fans also provide a cooling effect in the plenum Bursting Disc: A disc installed in the tank adaptor which elimi- and duct after the fire suppression system has been discharged. nates the siphoning of the agent up the pipe during extreme tern - The system is UL listed with or without fan operation. perature variations. It is also recommended that make up or supply air fans, integral to Cartridge: A sealed, steel pressure vessel containing nitrogen or the exhaust hood(s) being protected, should be shut down upon carbon dioxide gas used to pressurize the agent tank. system actuation. Cooking Appliance: Includes fryers, griddles, ranges, upright ►Along with the fire suppression system, the total system design broilers, chain broilers, natural charcoal broilers, or char - broilers must include hand portable fire extinguisher(s) located within the (electric, lava rock, gas- radiant, or mesquite). cooking/restaurant area that can be used to manually suppress a Cooking Area: Cooking area is defined as the maximum surface fire that may be burning in an unprotected area. Refer to NFPA 10, that requires protection. Each type of appliance has a defined "Standard For Portable Fire Extinguisher," for additional cooking area. For example, the maximum cooking area is the fry- r ► information. pot for a fryer without a dripboard and the maximum cooking area UL LISTING is the combined frypot and dripboard for a fryer with a dripboard. The R -102 Restaurant Fire Suppression System has been tested Conduit Offset Assembly: A pro-formed piece of conduit which - Ansul and is listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as a pre-engi- can be installed between the regulated release and the con- • needed system. The system is in compliance with UL Test duit to allow the wire rope for the detection, gas valve and remote • Standard 300. These tests require extinguishment of fires which manual pull station to be installed in a more convenient manner. are initiated in deep fat fryers, ranges, griddles, char - broilers, woks, upright broilers, chain - broilers, filters, plenum chambers, hoods, and ducts after pre - loading each appliance with a pre- scribed amount of cooking grease. Each fire is allowed to progress to maximum intensity before the fire suppression system is actuated. SECTION I — GENERAL INFORMATION til, EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 1 -2 ; REV. 3 10 -1 -02 DEFINITION OF TERMS (Continued) Plenum: The space enclosed by the filters and the portion of the Depth: When referring to depth as a linear dimension, it is the hood above the filters. horizontal dimension measured from front to back of the appliance Pr - engineered System: NF PA 17A defines a pre- engineered or plenum. , • system as one which has "...predetermined flow rates, nozzle Detector: A device which includes the detector bracket, detector pressures, and quantities of liquid agent: The R -102 system, as linkage, and fusible link used for automatic operation of the fire prescribed by UL (Underwriter's Laboratories), has specific pipe sizes, maximum and minimum pipe lengths and numbers of fit - suppression system. tings, and number and types of nozzles. The hazards protected by Detector Linkage: A device used to support the fusible link. this system are also specifically limited as to type and size by UL Distribution Piping: Piping which delivers the extinguishing agent based upon actual fire tests. All limitations on hazards that can be from the tank to each discharge nozzle. See also Supply or Branch protected and piping and nozzle configurations are contained in lines. the R -102 installation and maintenance manual which is part of • the UL listing. Ducts (or Duct System): A continuous passageway for the trans Pulley Elbow: A device used to change the direction of the wire mission of air and vapors which, in addition to the containment Y components themselves, may include duct fittings, plenums, rope which runs between: the regulated release mechanism and and /or other Items or air handling equipment. the detectors, the regulated release mechanism and the mechan- ical gas valve, and/or the regulated release mechanism and the Electrostatic Precipitator: A device used to aid in the cleaning of remote manual pull station. the exhaust air. This device is normally installed at or near the Pulley Tee: A device used to change the direction of two wire base of the ventilation duct. ropes which run from a regulated release or a regulated actuator Expellant Gas Line: Piping and/or hose which supplies the nitro- to two remote manual pull stations, or from two regulated releases gen or carbon dioxide gas from the regulated release assembly! or regulated actuators to a single mechanical gas valve or from regulated actuator assembly to each agent tank. one regulated release or regulated actuator to two gas valves. Flow Number: Term used in system design to describe the flow Regulated Actuator Assembly: An assembly which contains the capacity of each nozzle used to determine the quantity of tanks regulator, pneumatic actuator, agent tank (ordered separately), needed to cover a certain group of hazards. and expellant gas hose within a metal enclosure. This assembly is Fusible Links: A form of fixed temperature heat detecting device used to pressurize additional agent tanks in a multiple tank sys- employed to restrain the operation of a mechanical control until its tern. designed temperature is reached. Regulated Release Mechanism: An enclosed device within the Gas Valve: A device used to shut off the gas supply to the cook- ANSUL AUTOMAN regulated release assembly which releases ing equipment when the system is actuated. the expellant gas, activates alarms, and/or shuts off other devices when signaled automatically by a detector or manually with a Gas Valve Air Cylinder: An air cylinder, located in the release remote pull station. mechanism, which operates pneumatically to mechanically unlatch a mechanical gas valve actuator, causing the gas valve to Regulator: A device used to regulate the pressure from the nitro - close upon system actuation. gen cartridge into the agent tank(s) when the system is actuated. High Proximity: Indicates a distance (vertically) between the noz- Remote Manual Pull Station: A device which provides manual zle tip and the surface of the appliance being protected. actuation of the system from a remote location. Hood: A device provided for cooking appliances to direct and cap- Salamander Broiler: A broiler very similar in design to the upright ture grease -laden vapors and exhaust gases. It shall be construct- broiler. A salamander broiler is used for general broiling of meats ed in a manner which meets the requirements of NFPA 96. and fish, toasting, and holding/warming foods. Most contain a removable grease drip tray. Liquid Agent: A potassium -based solution used for the knock- Supply Llne: The agent distribution piping which extends from the down and suppression of fire. agent tank outlet and serves as a manifold for the branch lines. Low Proximity: Indicates a distance (vertically) between the noz- zle tip and the surface of the appliance being protected. Series Detector: Any detector located in -line between the regu- lated release assembly and the terminal detector. Maximum Length of Cooking Appliance: The maximum dimen- .l sion, on any side, which may be protected by one nozzle. Terminal Detector: The last in a series of detectors, or the only detector used in a single - detector system. This detector is thus Maximum Piping: Specified length of piping and number of fit named because it is at the point at which the wire rope ends, tings which must not be exceeded for each system. or "terminates." There is only one terminal detector per detection Medium Proximity: Indicates a distance (vertically) between the system. nozzle tip and the surface of the appliance being protected. Transition: An extension of the hood or canopy which allows for Minimum Piping: Minimum length of distribution piping required the smooth transmission of gases, air, and vapors between the between the agent tank outlet and any nozzle protecting a griddle, hood opening and the base of the ventilation duct. range, or fryer. Vent Plug: A device used to prevent pressure build -up within the Nozzle: A device designed to deliver the liquid agent with a spe- agent tank or agent distribution lines due to temperature cific flow rate and stream pattern. fluctuations. I i 3 r, SECTION II - SYSTEM DESCRIPTIOr UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 2 -1 8 -1 -01 REV.2 TOTAL SYSTEM There are three types of R -102 Restaurant Fire Suppression Double -Tank System Systems: . The R -102 double -tank system is available with a stainless steel 1. Single -tank System r enclosure and consists of: r • - 2. Double -tank System 1. ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly (Electrical 3. Multiple -tank System or Mechanical) The type of system required for the particular installation will be 2. Nitrogen Cartridge and/or Carbon Dioxide Cartridge determined through the guidelines covered in 'System Design" 3. ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant Additional equipment which may be required to complete the sys- • 4. Enclosure or Bracket Assembly tern design is explained in the °System Component? section. 5. Discharge Nozzles Additional devices covered are: remote manual pull stations, mechanical and electrical gas shut -off valves, electrical switches, 6. Detection Components and pressure switches. 7. Additional Devices (As Required) Single -Tank System The regulated release assembly contains the regulated release The R -102 single -tank system is available with a stainless steel • mechanism, agent tank (ordered separately), expellant gas hose enclosure and consists of: for agent tank hookup, and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing expellant 'piping, detection system, and additional equip - 1. ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly (Electrical ment. or Mechanical) • The enclosure or bracket assembly is mounted separately but 2. Nitrogen Cartridge and/or Carbon Dioxide Cartridge within the guidelines of the regulated release assembly. expellant 3. ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant gas piping requirements to ensure simultaneous actuation of the 4. Discharge Nozzles system. Refer to "System Components" section for individual cam- ponent descriptions. 5. Detection Components 6. Additional Devices (As Required) The regulated release assembly contains the regulated release 111- .: '`= am- • mechanism, agent tank (ordered separately), expeflant gas hose ' ose . '; . for agent tank hookup, and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing detection system and additional equipment. Refer to �; "System Components" section for individual component descrip- tions. 111111 GO Koil j 10 • CZ) CD CD III 0 FIGURE 2 \ 03013° e N :?6.°""°° . . FIGURE 1 stn • SECTION II - SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Ili, EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 2 -2 'FiEV. 8-1 -01 TOTAL SYSTEM (Continued) Multiple -Tank System The R -102 multiple -tank system is avajiable with a stainless steel enclosure and consists of: 1. ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly • (Electrical or Mechanical) 2. Nitrogen Cartridge(s) and/or Carbon Dioxide Cartridge(s) 3. Regulated Actuator Assembly(ies) 4. ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant ► 5. Enclosure or Bracket Assembly(ies) 6. Discharge Nozzles 7. Detection Components 8. Additional Devices (As Required) The regulated release assembly contains the regulated release • mechanism, agent tank (ordered separately), expellant gas hose for agent tank hookup, and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing actuation piping, expellant piping, detection system, and additional equipment. Each regulated actuator assembly is mounted separately but with- in the guidelines of the regulated release assembly actuation! expellant gas piping requirements to ensure simultaneous actua- tion of the system. The assembly contains the pneumatic actuator, ►regulator, agent tank (ordered separately), expellant gas hose for agent tank hookup, and enclosure plugs to facilitate installing expellant piping. • Each enclosure or bracket assembly is mounted separately but within the guidelines of the regulated release assembly or regulat- ed actuator assembly expellant gas piping requirements to ensure simultaneous actuation of the system. Refer to "System Components" section for individual component descriptions. • o rik ilb : 0-1111 , .11411111Vir 4;5:C .,00110). <2-'441 111 . 0 • FIGURE 3 aim ' 1 SECTION III - SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 . Page 3 - ' 10 -1 -02 REV.3 EXTINGUISHING AGENT - ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant (1.5 gallon - Part No. "ANSUL AUTOMAN" REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY 79694 or 3.0 gallon - Part No. 79372) is a potassium -based solu- (MECHANICAL) tion designed for fast knock -down and suppression of grease- . • related fires. The agent is shipped in plastic containers which pro NOTE: AGENT TANK MUST BE on o * vide one complete tank charge. Agent storage life expectancy is OR sEE SEE ARATELY cm o 3-4 l-3 twelve years. The distributor must record the batch numbers and date of shipment receipt to be filed with each installation record. REL EAS E 111411 - ANSULEr LOW pH UGUID FIRE SUPPRESSANT MECHANISM li in i i 1 I 1...1°.". .. / I 11 . 1 I W ° gi 4 I I I I 1111%110 I I l N �I 3.0 GALLON 1.5 GALLON ■ WT. 35 LB. (16 kg) SHIPPING WT. 19 LB. (9 kg) [:11 1 0001311 M.,» • SHIPPING WT. 25 LB. (11 kg) FIGURE 1 FIGURE 2 REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY (MECHANICAL) 00D14 The ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Mechanical Release Assembly REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY (ELECTRICAL) (Part No. 429853) contains the regulated release mechanism, expellant gas hose for agent tank hookup, and enclosure knock - The ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Electrical Release Assembly outs to facilitate installing actuation piping; expellant piping; detec- (Part No. 429856) is identical to the mechanical version except i. :: tion system; and additional equipment. This regulated release ► also contains a factory installed 120 VAC solenoid and electrical � ' assembly is used in single, double, and multiple -tank systems and switch. must be mounted to a rigid surface. The release mechanism can The solenoid is used to provide electrical actuation of the release be used to interconnect both the actuation and expellant gas lines mechanism. The electric switch is used to protect the solenoid by as required per system design. The regulator is designed to allow opening the circuit to the solenoid once the system is fired. a constant flow of gas into the tank at 110 psi (759 kPa) when the Additional electrical switches can be added as required for auto- system is actuated. The agent tank must be ordered separately. matic equipment and gas shut -off accessories, as well as initiating In single, double, and multiple -tank systems, the provided expel- audible and visual alarms. !ant gas hose connects the agent tank to the bottom outlet of the regulator. In double and multiple -tank system configurations, the "ANSUL AUTOMAN" REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY back outlet of the regulator is used as an expellant gas feed for (ELECTRICAL) one additional tank- enclosure or tank - bracket hookup. The enclo- sure contains the required knockouts to facilitate this connection. • If a pressure switch is to be attached to the regulator, additional fit- NOTE: AGENT RED TANK MUST BE ORDE tings are required. SEPARATELY 'The tank (ordered separately) is mounted within the enclosure. OR SEE PAGE 3-4 l i = t II The tank contains an adaptor/tube assembly with a burst disc II4 `'3l SWITCH union. The burst disc helps prevent siphoning of the agent up the REGULATOR r, • pipe due to significant temperature fluctuations in the area where f ir e 1 yiiii the tank is located. The tank is mild steel and, under normal con- • • t a i- ditions, requires hydrostatic testing every twelve years. ' SOLENOID " The detection and additional equipment required per system design are connected to the release mechanism. The enclosure tit i `o contains knockouts to facilitate detection and additional hookups. The system can be actuated automatically or manually. Automatic actuation occurs when a fusible link within the detection system separates in a fire condition. Manual actuation of the system o occurs when personnel pull on the remote manual pull station SHIPPING WT. 34 La (15 kg) • pull ring. --.....\.............t! . FIGURE 3 cools ■ SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS . Uf'EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3 -2 . 9EV. 3 10 -1 -02 • SINGLE TANK ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY • The Single Tank Enclosure Assembly (Part No. 429870) is used in The Regulated Actuator Assembly (Part No. 429850) contains the double and multiple -tank systems and must be mounted to a rigid regulator, pneumatic actuator, expellant gas hose for agent tank surface near the regulated release or regulated actuator assembly hookup (agent tank must be ordered separately), and enclosure its expellent gas line will be connected to. knodmuts to facilitate installing expellant piping. This assembly is used • The enclosure is designed for mounting either a 1.5 gallon (Part in multi ple-tank systems and must be mounted to a rigid surface. • . • No. 429864) or a 3.0 gallon tank (Part No. 429862) in a minimum The regulator contains two outlets 135° apart. One outlet is used amount of space. to interconnect the expellant gas hose to the enclosed agent tank. The other outlet connects an expellant gas line to an additional ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY enclosure or bracket assembly. The regulator is designed to allow a constant flow of nitrogen into each agent tank connected (two /� tanks maximum) at 110 psi (759 kPa). NOT AGENT TANK MUST The pneumatic actuator is, designed to puncture the expellant gas BE SEPARATELY ORDERED OR cartridge seal upon receiving pressure from the regulated release ► OR SEE PAGE 3.4 assembly actuation piping. The enclosure contains a knockout to facilitate distribution piping hookup. REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY MOUNTING NOTE: AGENT TANK ENCLOSURE MUST BE PNEUMATIC ORDERED rpop. ACTUATOR SEPARATELY ASSEMBLY CI 14 OR SEE PAGE 3.4 , 11.4 I ► S LB (6 kg) REGULATOR 13 LB (6 kg) • • FIGURE 4 - O rn � SHIPPING WT. • RED PAINTED BRACKET ASSEMBLY ► HI LB.(9kg) The Bracket Assembly (Part No. 429878) is used in double and i 19 multiple -tank systems and must be mounted to a rigid surface near the - • ulated release assembly or regulated actuato - ssembly FIGURE 6 0001 that its •ellant gas line will be connected to. ►The tank b : cket is constructed of mild steel an. .ainted red. It is AGENT TANK ASSEMBLY designed for •ounting the tank in a minimu amount of space. I The Bracket As The agent tank shipping assembly (3 Gallon, Part No. 429862, embly can only be utilized Ith 3.0 gallon tanks ► and 1.5 Gallon, Part No. 429864) consists of a stainless steel tank • (Part No. 429862 and an adaptor /tube assembly. The adaptor/tube assembly con- tains a burst disc. The burst disc prevents agent leakage due to BRACKET ASSEMBL • UNTING significant temperature fluctuations in the area where the tank is / ACKET located. Under normal conditions, the tank requires hydrostatic l . testing every twelve years. The date of manufacture is stamped on N ,� / the tank nameplate. . ip 4 The tank is shipped uncharged and must be filled with only . � .i, ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant during installation. ■ , /' , U TANK ADAPTOR/ TUBE ASSEMBLY I ► 3 GALLON t A SHIPPING Wt kg) pp 1 LB. (3 HI GALLON S HIPPING WT. ■ 5LEL (2kg) SHIPPING WT. 7 LB. (3 k0) AGENT TANK FIGURE 5 11 �141 FIGURE 7 c031w ■ SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3 -3r 10 -1 -02 REV.6 • - OEM RELEASE/BRACKET ASSEMBLY TWO TANK ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY • (FOR OEM IN- CABINET USE ONLY) The Two Tank Enclosure Assembly, Part No. "429872, consists of The OEM Regulated Mechanical Release/Bracket Assembly, Part two expellant gas hoses, two grommets, and the mounting enclo- No..79493, contains the same regulated release mechanism. as sure. The assembly is used in 9 gallon systems. It can be coupled the standard ANSUL AUTOMAN.' Regulated Release Assembly: with a 3- gallon regulated release assembly or a 3- gallon regulated The OEM Regulated Electrical Release/Bracket Assembly, .Part actuator assembly to give a total of 9 gallons of agent. Agent tanks { No. 418054, is identical to the mechanical version except it con- must be ordered separately. . tains a factory installed 120 VAC solenoid and electrical switch. The tank enclosure is designed to mount in a minimum amount of ►These release/bracket assemblies must be installed in a suitable space. - equipment enclosure either horizontally or. vertically. They contain all the necessary mounting and conduit holes needed to fully NOTE: AGENT TANK MUST BE install the assembly. The agent tank is installed separately and ORDERED SEPARATELY • need not be bracketed once it is piped and filled. NOTE: OEM I Release/Bracket Assembly must be installed high enough in cabi- ( ► net so that there is sufficient room to install and remove cartridge. 0. SHIPPING WT. 26 LBS. (12 kg) e .- MOUNTING RELEASE / BRACKET MECHANISM -... sr 0 r ..... 1 `It 0 FIGURE 10 REGULATOR Ir. m2277 24 VDC REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY (ULC AP' - OVED `. SHIPPING WT. ONLY) 0 10 LB (5 kg) A. The 4 VDC Regulated Release Assembly, Part .. 429859, is used i ere electric, thermostat detection is requir • • via the use of :::::',4 FIGURE a a rele. ' g control unit. This assembly consi• of a 24 VDC '•:- .0,.. ANSUL A►TOMAN II -C regulated release m= hanism, expellant gas hose, a • enclosure knockouts to facilita • installing actuation OEM REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY piping, expel'. 't piping, detection system - nd additional equip- ► The OEM Regulated Actuator Assembly, Part No. 418691, ment. Agent tan• ust be ordered sepa - ely. includes the regulator, pneumatic actuator, expellant gas hose and The system can be : tuated automati .I ly or manually. Automatic OEM bracket. Also available is an OEM Regulated Actuator actuation occurs when e control pa - I receives a signal from the Assembly with all the above mentioned components except for the detection circuit. The pa . then s - ds an electrical signal to the bracket. This assembly is Part No. 418522. 24 VDC regulated release, •- usi • it to actuate. When actuation occurs, the gas cartridge is pu red, pressurizing the agent tank and discharging the agent th • . the distribution piping. Manual actuation of the system occ whe • ersonnel pull on the remote manual pull station pull rin•. III NOTE: ENT TANK MUST BE • ' OERED SEPARATELY � A. , $1 1 0 $HIPPIN (15 kg) � � r l'(fd 0 SHIPPING WT. 4 LB. (2 kg) ► FIGURE 9 CI12225 FIGURE 11 ,p2279 • SECTION III - SYSTEM COMPONENTS UIEX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3 -4 R 5 10 -1 -02 • ADDITIONAL SHIPPING ASSEMBLIES GAS CARTRIDGES i Several complete shipping assemblies are available containing The R -102 system uses gas cartridges to store nitrogen or carbon both the release or actuator mechanism and the agent tank. When dioxide expellant gases under pressure until the system is actuat- ordering a complete shipping assembly, order the following part ed, at which time the cartridge seal is punctured and the released numbers: gas expels liquid agent from one or more tanks through the dis- Shipping Wt. charge piping and out the discharge nozzles. Part No. Description lb. (kg) Four nitrogen gas cartridges and three carbon dioxide gas car- 430299 3.0 Gallon Mechanical Release 33 (15) tridges are available as shown in Figure 12. Shipping Assembly including: • Cartridges noted as TC /DOT are both Transport Canada (TC) and 429853 Mechanical Regulated I Department of Transportation (DOT) approved. Cartridges noted Release, Assembly • as DOT are Department of Transportation approved only. 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly Cartridge.selection options are provided in Section. IV under Tank 430300 1.5 Gallon Mechanical Release 30 (14) and Cartridge Requirements. Shipping Assembly including: . NITROGEN GAS CARTRIDGES • 429853 Mechanical Regulated Release Assembly 429864 1.5 Gallon Tank Assembly 7 7/8IN. 430309 3.0 Gallon Regulated Actuator 36 (16) ,. (20cm) 11 3/8 IN. 101rzI ". Shipping Assembly including: ► (26 9 "") (27 cm) 14 5/8 IN. 429850 Regulated Actuator Assembly (37.1 cm) 429862 • 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly 2 1rz IN 430316 1.5 Gallon Stainless Steel Enclosure 18 (8) (8.4 cm) 2 1/2 IN. 4 3/181N. (5.4 cm) (10.e cm) Shipping Assembly including: 429870 Single Tank Mounting Box 39/16 IN. Assembly (9 cm) 429864 1.5 Gallon Tank Assembly LT -20 -R LT -30- DOUBLE•TANK . LT- A- 10130 CARTRIDGE CARTRIDGE CARTRIDGE CARTRIDGE PART NO. 423429 PART NO 423435 PART NO 423493 PART NO. 423491 430317 3.0 Gallon Stainless Steel Enclosure 20 (9) • (TC/DOT) (TC/DOT) (TC/DOT) (TC /DOT) Shipping Assembly including: 000143 0001i9 000147 000105 429870 Single Tank Mounting Box Assembly CARBON DIOXIDE CARTRIDGES 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly 430324 6.0 Gallon Stainless Steel Enclosure 40 (18) - Shipping Assembly including: 7 Ire IN. . 429872 Two Tank Mounting Box 91N. (208 m) (22.9 cm) 11 5/8 IN. . Assembly (29.50m) 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly (2) 430332 Gallon Mounting Bracket Shipping 20 (9) y w Assembly including: 2IN. 2 1/2 IN. / 429878 3.0 Gallon Mounting Bracket (5. cm) (8.4 cm) Assembly 21/21N. 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly (64 cm) • 101-10 CARTRIDGE 101-20 CARTRIDGE 101 -30 CARTRIDGE • PART NO.423439 (TC/DOT) PART NO. 423441 PART NO. 423443 • PART NO. 15850 (DOT) (TC/DOT) (TC/OOT) 000140 000150 000171 FIGURE 12 a • 1 , i • SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3•m 1 10 -1 -02 REV.4 NOZZLES • SWIVEL ADAPTOR . ► There are twelve types of discharge nozzles each designed to dis- The Swivel Adaptor Assembly, Part No. 418569, consists of a swiv- tribute the liquid agent in a uniform pattern throughout the hazard el nut, swivel body and swivel ball. All are chrome - plated. The swiv- area: el adaptor allows any nozzle to be rotated approximately 30° in all , directions. Swivel Adaptors must be ordered as a Swivel Adaptor • 1. 1W Nozzle 7. 245 Nozzle Shipping Assembly, Part No. 423572, which contains 25 Swivel '' 2. 1N Nozzle 8.. 260 Nozzle Adaptors. 3. 1/2N Nozzle 9. 290 Nozzle 4. 3N Nozzle 10. 2120 Nozzle FEMALE 18 "PT FEMALE THREAD 5.. 2W Nozzle 11. 1F Nozzle . • 6. 230 Nozzle • 12. 1100 Nozzle �` . . Although these nozzles are similar in appearance and have r,�� certain common parts, the tip of each nozzle is designed for ∎4` 4.4, specific application and must only be used in those areas. See 9l8- 19 NPT Nozzle Application Chart in Section IV -- System Design, for MALE THREAD individual nozzle usage. 30 DEGREE ROTATION 3/8 -18NPr FIGURE 14 FEMALE THREAD o°°ma RUBBER BLOW -OFF CAPS . INTERNAL CUP The Rubber Blow -Off Cap, Part No. 77676, help keep the orifice of IRE STRAINER the nozzle free of grease or other substances that could interfere INSIDE with agent distribution. A retaining strap attaches the blow -oft cap RECESS FOR 11.1111111■ to the nozzle. Rubber Blow -Off Caps must be ordered as a BLOW OFF V V V V_�( VENDOR Shipping Assembly, Part No. 77695, which contains 50 blow -off CAP LOOP /�/►/�A ^ CODE _ (IF PRESENT) caps, or Part No. 77411, which contains 12 blow -o caps. NOZZLE �� STAMPING - c. . ' FIGURE 13 -G �� . ' • Nozzle Identification Chart ► Nozzle Nozzle Nozzle Nozzle' Flow Iyge part No. Stamping No. Nozzle Identification IN 1i/Nozzle 419336 1W 1 Chrome - Plated Body FIGURE 15 1N Nozzle 419335 1N 1 Chrome - Plated COX09 1/2N Nozzle 419334 1/2N 1/2 Chrome - Plated Body Metal blow -oft caps are not allowed w the 1/2N nozzle METAL BLOW -OFF CAP 3N Nozzle 419338 3N 3 Chrome - Plated Body Two types of metal blow -off caps are available as options to the 2W Nozzle 419337 2W 2 Chrome - Plated Body standard rubber caps. The metal cap can be used in unusually 230 Nozzle 419339 230 2 Chrome - Plated Body high heat conditions, generally over 400 °F (204 °C). The metal 245 Nozzle 419340 245 2 Chrome Plated Body blow -off cap is attached to the nozzle by means of a stainless steel wire which prevents it from falling into the appliance during dis- 260 Nozzle 419341 260 2 Chrome - Plated Body charge. Shipping Assembly Part No. 79745 contains 10 metal 290 Nozzle 419342 290 2 Chrome - Plated Body blow -off caps for use on standard, non - swivel nozzles and 2120 Nozzle 419343 2120 2 Chrome - Plated Body Shipping Assembly Part No. 415568 contains 10 metal blow -off ,, 1F Nozzle 419333 1F 1 Chrome - Plated Body caps for use on swivel nozzles. 1100 Nozzle 430912 1100 1 Chrome - Plated Body NOTICE If metal blow-off caps are required for upright broil- ►' Nozzle stamping may contain an additional letter indicating a vendor's code. 1. er or salamander protection, use (2) two 1N noz- zles (Part No. 56930) instead of 1/2N nozzles. ,1 .. STAINLESS I ts STEEL WIRE 1, � I METAL CAP FIGURE 16 000 ,u SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS , U pEX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3 -6 'REV. 4 10-1 -02 o CONDUIT OFFSET ASSEMBLY "COMPRESSION SEAL' ADAPTOR . The conduit offset assembly, Part No. 79825, is used to change This adaptor is a mechanical . bulkhead fitting that produces a ' direction of the wire rope on detection, mechanical gas valve, and liquid -tight seal around pipe-and conduit when installing distribu- remote pull station lines. The conduit ofiset assembly can only be tion . piping and detection conduit through restaurant hoods and used in the area where- the conduit attaches to the regulated ducts. The °Compression -Seal" adaptor is a 'straight- through r release assembly. When using the conduit offset assembly, the design requiring no cutting or threading of conduit or pipe. The maximum number of pulley elbows is still allowed. The Conduit adaptor is available for pipe sizes of 1/4 in. (Part No. 79148), 3/8 Offset Shipping Assembly, Part No. 79825, consists of 6 conduit in. (Part No. 79150),1/2 in. (Part No. 79146), and EMT conduit siie offsets. of 1/2 in. (Part No. 79152). Each "Compression -Seal" Adaptor Shipping Assembly must be ordered as stated below: CONDUIT • COUPUNG Shipping • ;� Assembly • Hole Size • Size . Part No. Qty. Required 1/4 in. Pipe / 1/2 in. tube 79149 24 . 3/4 in. CONDUIT 3/8 in. Pipe / 5/8 in. tube 79151 24 1 1 /8 in. OFFSET 1/2 in. Pipe 79147 24 1 1/8 in. 1/2 in. EMT Conduit 79153 24 1 1 /Bin. I s- 24 CO MPRESSION NUT CONDUIT • CONNECTOR , ,� . -. ADAPTOR BODY GASKET -' - LOCKWASHER FIGURE 17 NUT _ 000153 FIGURE 19 "OUIK- SEAL" ADAPTOR «>o The °Quik -Seal" adaptor is a listed mechanical bulkhead fitting that . -- produces a liquid -tight seal around both distribution piping and "HOOD SEAL" ADAPTOR ASSEMBLY • ' detection conduit which runs through restaurant hoods and ducts. This adaptor is a mechanical bulkhead fitting that produces a liq- The "Quik -Seal" adaptor accepts threaded pipe or conduit. The uid -tight seal around 1/2 in. EMT conduit when installing the detec- adaptor is available for 1/4 in. (Part No. 78195), 3/8 in. (Part No. tion line through restaurant hoods and duct. The adaptor accepts 77284), 1/2 in. (Part No. 77286), or 3/4 in. (Part No. 77288) pipe or a high temperature pulley elbow and, when used, correctly posi- conduit sizes. When using with EMT conduit, a conduit connector tions the elbow or conduit in line with the conduit adaptor hole in must be installed in each end of the adaptor. The "Quik -Sear the detector bracket. The "Hood Seal" eliminates the need for mul- Adaptor Shipping Assembly must be ordered as stated below: tiple elbows when penetrating the top of a hood when installing the c Shipping detection tine. "Hood Sear Adaptors are available in quantities of Assembly Hole Size 6 as Shipping Assembly Part No. 423253. Size Part No Qty- Required 1/4 in. 78196 24 3/4 in. II SEAL NUT 3/8 in. 77285 24 1 1/8 in. 1/2 in. 77287 24 1 1/8 in. SEAL iiih f WASHER 24 1 3/8 in. ADAPTOR 3/4 in. 77289 BODY SIMIMOMS r GASKET ADAPTOR BOOM O ELBOW ��. PULLEY Q II GASKET LOCKWASHER (NOT PART - A�i_IIc MLA I I . OF ASSEMBLY) USE ONLY PULLEY ELBOW. •� NUT PART NO. 423250 FIGURE 20 poolse FIGURE 18 0001s' SECTION III - SYSTEM COMPONENTS ' UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3 -? 10 -1 -02 REV. 4 DETECTORS CUP-ON STYLE - P •, NO. 56837 AND 56838 The detector consists of three basic components: the bracket, link- Nr-� ,I .. age, and fusible link. (Fusible links are not included and must be ' ` / ordered separately.) The bracket holds the entire assembly to the LINKAGE 1 mounting surface. The linkage_ is used to support the fusible link. Blum The fusible link is designed to separate at a specific temperature ' and release the wire rope, thereby actuating the regulated release ..94. J - — 000157 mechanism. There are three styles of detectors available: the clip on style, the - HINGED STYLE - PA ' NO 15373 AND 15375 hinged style, and the scissor style. The clip -on style allows the wire rope to be strung completely O — I' through the detection system conduit and brackets first and the detector linkage assemblies are then clipped on later. LINKAGE ru BRACKET The hinged style detector requires the wire rope to be strung to the detector bracket, and then "threaded" through the linkage assem- -J — ` bly before continuing to the next detector bracket 1�"' r The scissor style allows the wire rope to be strung completely 000158 through the detection system conduit and brackets first and the SCISSOR LE -PART NO 117388 AND 117369 detector linkage assemblies are then clipped on later. s . Each style of detector consists of two types of assemblies: O The Terminal Detector (Part No. 56838, 15375, or 417368) LINKAGE / includes a test link and is placed last in a series of detectors. This detector is sometimes referred to as the end-of -line detector and ` is thus named because it is at the point at which the wire rope "ter- ,,LE v minates,7 or is anchored at the detector bracket. Only one terminal LINK • detector is required per detection system. 000159 The Series Detector (Part No. 56837, 15373, or 417369) is any 21 ;::: detector located in -line between the regulated release assembly ' •j and the terminal detector. PULLEY ELBOWS • When using Part No. 56837 and 56838 style detectors, a total of There are two types of pulley elbows used to change the direction 12 detectors can be in one detection system: 11 series detectors, of the wire rope by 90 °. Ansul recommends for temperatures not in Part No. 56837 and 1 terminal detector, Part No. 56838. excess of 700 °F (371 °C). Part No. 415670 has socket ends with When using Part No. 15373 and 15375 style detectors, a total of 5 set screws for 1/2 in. conduit, and Part No. 423250 has compres- dgtectors can be in one detection system: 4 series detectors, Part sion ring ends also for 1/2 in. conduit. Pulley elbows must be No: 15373 and 1 terminal detector, Part No. 15375. ordered in quantities of 50 as Shipping Assembly Part No. 415671 When using Part No. 417368 and 417369 style detectors, a total (socket end type) and Part No. 423251 (co type)" of 15 detectors can be in one detection system: 14 series detec- PART NO. 415870 RT NO 423250 • tors, Part No. 417369 and 1 terminal detector, Part No. 417368. ` ,m ,., 4 1 11 Pi IN - 1 . ,.. *.J. . ,%.,...„: 41111 030180 000181 FIGURE 2 I' SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS ' UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3 -8 • ;REV. 5 10 -1 -02 • PULLEY TEE MECHANICAL GAS VALVES The Pulley Tee (Part No. 427929) is used to change the direction The mechanical gas valves are designed to shut off the flow of gas s of two wire ropes by 90 °. It must be used in areas where the tern- to the appliances upon actuation of the regulated release assem- peratures are within the range of 32 °F to 130 °F (0 °C to 54 °C). bly. The valves are available in sizes of 3/4 in., 1 in., 1 1/4 in.,1 1/2 Pulley tees can be used in mechanical gas valve actuation lines in., and 2 in. Ansul style; and 2 1/2 in. and 3 In. Asco style. The and remote manual pull station lines. Pulley lees cannot be used valves are rated for natural and LP gas. Both styles are UL Listed. within a detection line. ' Maximum l Part Operating Ng, Description Pressure ellr ® � 55598 3/4 in. Gas Valve ( ANSUL) 10 psi (69 kPa) 55601 1 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 10 psi (69 kPa) ...-- 55604 1 1/4 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) ' 10 psi (69 kPa) III 55607 1 1/2 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 10 psi (69 kPa) 55610 2 in Gas Valve (ANSUL) 10 psi (69 kPa) FIGURE 23 25937 21/2 in. Gas Valve (ASCO) • 5 psi (34.5 kPa) 00°x" 25938 3 in. Gas Valve (ASCO) 5 psi (34.5 kPa) STAINLESS STEEL CABLE The 1/16 in. stainless steel cable is run from the terminal detector, irtfr through conduit, all series detectors and pulley elbows, and into the regulated release mechanism trip lever. When any fusible link separates, the tension on the cable is relaxed, and the trip lever actuates the regulated release mechanism. The cable can also be used for mechanical gas valves and remote manual pull stations. \ �� The cable is available in 50 ft. (15 m) (Part No. 15821) and 500 ft. , 1 (152.4 m) (Part No. 79653) lengths. `\ \ . REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION STYLE STYLE ASCO S ST UL ST The remote manual pull station (Part No. 4835 or Part No. 54011) A NS UL S T S is required for manual actuation of the regulated release assembly. FIGURE 25 The remote manual pull station should be mounted at a point of egress and positioned at a height determined by the authority hav- • ing jurisdiction. Trim rings, Part No. 427074 (pack of 10), are avail- • able. PART NO 4835 (WITHOUT CABLE) • PART NO. 54011 (WITH 50 FT OF CABLE) U P ,1/ u \j( 'Oa It METAL STAMPED o°01°i FIGURE 24 SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS - UL EX. 3470 . ULC CEx747 Page 3 -9 •. ' 10 -1 -02 REV.2 • ELECTRICAL GAS VALVES ELECTRICAL SWITCHES . The electrical gas valves are designed to shut off the flow of either The electrical switches are intended. for , use with electric gas . natural or LP gas to the appliances upon actuation of the regulat- valves, alarms,: contactors, . lights, contractor supplied . electric ed release assembly. The valves' are available in sizes of 3/4 in., power shut -off devices and .other. electrical devices that are 1 in., 1 1/2 in., 2 in., and 3 in. The valve is held open by an ever- designed to shut off or turn on when the system is actuated. gized solenoid and upon system actuation, the switch contacts in Switches are available in kits: One Switch 'Kit, Part No..423878, • the regulated release assembly open, thus de- energizing the cir- Two Switch Kit, Part No. 423879, Three Switch Kit, Part No. cuit to the gas valve solenoid, causing the valve to close. Valves 423880, and Four Switch Kit, Part No. 423881. Each switch has a are available in 120 VAC and are UL Listed. set of single -pole, double -throw contacts rated at 21 amp, 1 HP, Maximum 125, 250, 277 VAC or 2 HP, 250, 277 VAC. Mounting hardware and COMMON ., Part . Operating 12 in. (305 mm) long wire leads are provided with each kit. Ns. Descriotion Pressure , N.O. 13707 3/4 in. Solenoid Gas Valve (ASCO) 25 psi (172 kPa) COMM IN I ,.....„...... �� 13708 1 in. Solenoid Gas Valve (ASCO) 25 psi (172 kPa) 13709' .1 1/2 in. Solenoid Gas Valve . 25 psi (172 kPa) ri 0 (ASCO) 13710 2 in. Solenoid Gas Valve (ASCO) • 25 psi (172 kPa) N.C. 17643 3 in. Solenoid Gas Valve (ASCO) 5 psi (34.5 kPa) FIGURE 28 �1612 ALARM INITIATING SWITCH _, J' The Alarm Initiating Switch Kit, Part No. .428311, can be field ®' • mounted within the ANSUL AUTOMAN release. This switch must • be used to close a supervised circuit to the building main fire alarm panel when the ANSUL AUTOMAN release actuates. This' action •.. FIGURE 26 . will signal the fire alarm panel that there was a system actuation.._' MIB! in the kitchen area. The switch kit contains all necessary mounting": MANUAL RESET RELAY components along with a mounting instruction sheet. The switch is rated 50 mA, 28 VDC. The manual reset relay, Part No. 14702 or Part No. 426151, is • required when using an electrical gas valve shut-off system. After SPACER TOWARD I WHEN SPACER AND the electric gas valve has closed, either due to system actuation or AUTOMAN SWITCH ARE PROPERLY power failure, the valve cannot be re- opened, allowing gas to flow, MOUNTED, THIS DIVIDER until the reset relay button is manually pressed, re energizing the ` NO. AND MC. T circuit. The reset relay is available 120 VAC. The manual reset relay '\ is also recommended for electrical shut down. -, coM 0 . N.o. a lonrip'■• ✓/ ■ 01 `�N.0 YID J \ --... \- . ALARM INITIATING r SWITCH FIGURE 29 FIGURE 27 Colo!? • SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3-10 .REV. 1 10 -1 -02 , ' tb • • REGULATOR TEST KIT BURSTING DISC The Test Kit Assembly (Shipping Part No. 56972) is required to test The R -102 Bursting Disc is installed in the tank adaptor assembly. the regulator setting and nitrogen flow during 12 -year maintenance The bursting disc eliminates the siphoning of the agent up the pipe ✓ examinations. This will ensure that the regulator is functioning during extreme temperature variations. The bursting discs are properly. available in packs of 10, Part No. 417911. o ( lei 1 �� V ut FIGURE 32 � 000172 ,1n\ ')/ \Il NOZZLE AIMING DEV FIGURE 30 The Nozzle Aiming Device, Part No. 551265, is required to prop - 00019 erly aim each nozzle to the correct aiming point. The device FUSIBLE LINK clamps to the nozzle and emits a small laser light that reflects on the surface that it is aiming at. The nozzle can then be rotated to Select correct UL Listed fusible link(s) for installation in detector(s) point at a predetermined aiming point and then tightened to hold according to the temperature condition chart below: that angle. The aiming device requires an adaptor, Part No. Fusible Link To Be Used 431186, to attach it to the nozzle. The adaptor must be ordered Fusible Shipping Where separately. Link Assembly Temperature Temperature - .' Part No, Part No, Rating Does Not Exceed '1 415739 1 415739 (1) 165 °F (74 °C) 100 °F (38 °C) 415740 (1) 415740 (1) 212 °F (100 °C) 150 °F (66 °C) c ‘ _ 415741 (1) 415744 (25) 280 °F (138 °C) 225 °F (107 °C) . '415742 (1) 415745 (25) 360 °F (182 °C) 290 °F (143 °C) ADAPTOR (ORDER SEPARATELY 415743 (1) 415746 (25) 450 °F (232 °C) 360 °F (182 °C) 56816 (1) 73867 (25) 500 °F (260 °C) 400 °F (204 °C) NOZZLE • O GAIMING �.0i 0 DEVICE FIGURE 33 coma • .r.au1.• I I STAINLESS STEEL ACTUATION HOSE • � :� � TEMPERATURE The Stainless Steel Actuation Hose is used to connect the actua- l - 1 RATING STAMPED ON `-; a .ttL. FUSIBLE UNK BODY 1. tion line compression tees between each pneumatic actuator and . can also be connected end to end. The hose has the same thread, • 7/16 -20, as the fittings. The actuation hose allows flexibility between the AUTOMA• and each regulated actuator. K STYLE ML STYLE • Hose 500 •F (260 'C) ONLY Pert No. Length 000170 OW 17 FIGURE 31 31809 16 in. (41 cm) 32335 20 in. (51 cm) MAXIMUM REGISTERING THERMOMETER 32336 24 in. (61 cm) • 430815 42 in. (107 cm) The Maximum Registering Thermometer, Part No. 15240, is used Fitting '" to indicate the highest normal temperature for the protected area. Part No. Description Once this is established, the correct rated fusible link can be 31810 Male Elbow (7/16 -20 x 1/4 in. NPT) chosen. 31811 Male Tee (7/16 -20 x 7/16 -20 x 1/4 in. NPT) • ■ 32338 Male Straight Connector (7/16 -20 x 1/4 in. NPT) • a 11111:::...:. . , .. ,� 7116 -20 7/16 -20 FIGURE 34 WOW . SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -1 10 -1 -02 REV.5 SYSTEM DESIGN • GENERAL INFORMATION The Ansul R -102 Restaurant Fire Suppression System may be 1. Nozzles must be located 2 -8 in. (5 -20 cm) into the center of the. used on a number of different types of restaurant cooking appli- duct opening, discharging up. See Figure 1. ances and hood and duct configurations. The design information listed in this section deals with the limitations and parameters of s this pre- engineered system. Those individuals responsible for the design of the R -102 system must be trained and hold a current Ansul certificate in an R -102 training program. The R -102 and the PIRANHA systems use compatible agents and components, therefore, they may be used together for cooking appliance, hood, and duct protection. The primary ANSUL AUTOMAN Release can be either an R -102 or a PIRANHA �� ANSUL AUTOMAN Release and can actuate up to two additional �) R -102 or PIRANHA Regulated Actuators. In systems utilizing a 101 remote release, any combination of the maximum number of z -BIN. I regulated actuators can be used. (5-20 cm) • Both systems must actuate simultaneously. • Each system must be designed and installed per its appropri- FIGURE 1 mono ate manual. • Adjacent appliances requiring protection must be protected 2. In installations where a UL listed damper assembly is with the same type of system, either R -102 or' PIRANHA, employed, the duct nozzle can be installed beyond the 8 in. unless the center -to- center spacing between the adjacent (20 cm) maximum, to a point just beyond the damper assem- R-102 and PIRANHA nozzles is no less than 36 inches. bly that will not interfere with the damper. Exceeding the maxi- mum of 8 in. (20 cm) in this way will not void the UL listing of • When appliances are protected with R -102 nozzles, the hood the system. and connecting duct above those appliances cannot be pro- tected with PIRANHA nozzles. 3. Previously listed 3 flow number and 5 flow number duct pro- • Mixing systems in a common plenum is not allowed. tection detailed in earlier published manual, Part No. 418087- 06, can also still by utilized. One of the key elements for restaurant fire protection is a correct , system design. This section is divided into ten sub - sections: Noz- I DUCT SIZES UP TO 50 IN. (127 cm) .: zle Placement Requirements, Tank Quantity Requirements, Actu- PERIMETER/ 16 IN. (41 cm) DIAMETER ation and Expellant Gas Line Requirements, Distribution Piping Requirements, Detection System Requirements, Manual Pull Ste- • One 1100 nozzle (Part No. 430912) = one flow number tion Requirements, Mechanical Gas Valve Requirements, Electri- • 50 in. (127 cm) perimeter maximum cal Gas Valve Requirements, Electrical Switch Requirements, and 16 in. (41 cm) diameter maximum Pressure Switch Requirements. Each of these sections must be • completed before attempting any p installation. System design DUCT SIZES UP TO 100 IN. (254 cm) sketches should be made of all aspects of design for reference D UCT SIZES UP TO (81.3 N. ( DIAMETER during installation. • NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS • One 2W Nozzle (Part No. 419337) = two flow numbers This section gives guidelines for nozzle type, positioning, and • 100 in. (254 cm) perimeter maximum quantity duct, plenum, and individual appliance protection. This • 32 in. (81.3 cm) diameter maximum section must be completed before determining tank quantity and • A 2WH nozzle (Part No. 78078) must be substituted for a 2W piping requirements. nozzle for any installation using Option 2 of the 1.5 gallon sys- Duct Protection — Single Noule tern coverage (duct and plenum protection only). A 2WH nozzle is limited to a maximum of 75 in. (190 cm) perimeter or a maxi - All duct protection is UL listed without limitation of maximum duct mum diameter of 24 in. (61 cm) of coverage. length (unlimited length). This includes all varieties of ductworks chart below shows the maximum protection available from r The both horizontal and vertical including ducts that run at angles to each duct nozzle. the horizontal and ducts with directional bends. Gallon _ a G Gallon G 1.5 l rt 3.0 The R -102 system uses different duct nozzles depending on the Description P P aa . 3.0 G m 1.5 G l . size of duct being protected. 2W Nozzle 419337 Maximum Maximum 100 in. (254 cm) 100 in. (254 cm) Perimeter Perimeter 1100 Nozzle 430912 Maximum Maximum 50 in. (127 cm) 50 in. (127 cm) Perimeter Perimeter SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN • UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -2 r FV.3 10 -1 -02 • • Duct Protection - Multiple Nozzle DUCT SIZES UP TO 135 IN. (343 cm) PERIMETER - 3 • r. FLOW OPTION . • One 1100 Nozzle (Part No. 430912) and one 2W Nozzle ' (Part No. 419337) = three flow numbers . • 135 in. (343 cm) perimeter maximum • No round duct option available • Follow design table in Figure 2 to determine maximum module size for each nozzle 1100 Module 2W Module Side A Side B Side B Side B . Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm) 4 (10) 60.0 (152) 23.0 (58) 37.0 (94) 5 (13) 60.0 (152) 23.0 (58) 37.0 (94) 6 (15) 59.5 (151) 22.5 (57) 37.0 (94) 7 (18) 59.0 (150) 22.0 (56) 37.0 (94) 8 (20) 58.5 (149) 22.0 (56) 36.5 (93) 9 (23) 58.0 (147) 21.5 (55) 36.5 (93) 10 (25) 57.0 (145) 21.0 (53) 36.0 (91) 11 (28) 56.0 (142) 20.5 (52) 35.5 (90) • 12 (31) 55.5 (141) 20.0 (51) 35.5 (90) 13 (33) 54.5 (138) 19.5 (50) 35.0 (89) 14 (36) 53.5 (136) 18.5 (47) 35.0 (89) 15 (38) 52.0 (132) 18.0 (46) 34.0 (86) . 16 (41) 51.0 (130) 17.0 (43) 34.0 (86) 17 (43) 49.5 (126) 16.0 (41) 33.5 (85) 18 (46) 47.5 (121) 14.5 (37) 33.0 (84) 19 (48) 46.0 (117) 13.5 (34) 32.5 (83) 20 (51) 43.5 (111) 12.0 (31) 31.7 (81) 21 (53) 41.0 (104) 10.0 (25) 31.0 (79) 22 (56) 38.0 (97) 7.5 (19) 30.5 (78) 23 (58) 33.5 (85) 4.0 (10) 29.5 (75) ---- -( Side B I - O . ( Side A 1 11100 1 1 2W I 4 • FIGURE 2 tom Example: Protection is required for a duct that has an °A' dimen- sion of 8.0 in. (20 cm) wide and a "B° dimension of 55 in. (140 cm) long. Referring to the table in Figure 2, it the "A° dimension is 8.0 in. (20 • cm), the °B" dimension must not exceed 58.5 in. (149 cm). In this example, the "B" dimension is 55 in. (140 cm), therefore, this duct can be protected with a three flow application. Read over from the 8.0 in. (20 cm) line on the table to the 1100 Module column. At that point, the chart shows that the 'B' module length for the 1100 nozzle can be 22.0 in. (56 cm). Center the 1100 nozzle in that module. The 2W module can now be centered with- ; in the remaining module. SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN ' UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -3t 1 • 10 -1 -02 REV. 4 •Duct Protection - Multiple Nozzle (Continued) When working with Chart 2, one half of the quantity of nozzles determined must be equally positioned in the top halt of the area _ !DUCT SIZES GREATER THAN 135 IN. (343 cm) PERIMETER 1 of the duct and the remaining half of the nozzles must be posi- tioned in the bottom half of the duct area. • Ducts over 135 in. perimeter Must be modularized using 2W Example: The duct to be protected has a Side 'A' of 40 in. and a nozzles (Part No. 419337) Side "B" of 60 in. Referring to the design chart, this duct requires - • No round duct option available 4 nozzles. One half of 4 = 2. Therefore, 2 nozzles must be equally • Follow the design chart to determine maximum module size for Positioned in each of the two duct areas. See Figure 3. SIDE "B" each 2W nozzle 30 IN. (76 mm) 30 IN. (76 mm) • When determining number of nozzles required, it is sometimes I an advantage to check the chart using the shortest side as Side 'A" and then recheck it using the longest side as Side A. This ( 50 , IN. ) • I • 1 comparison may reveal a need for a lesser quantity of nozzles 40 IN SIDE one way versus the other way. ID - -. - - - _ _ - (102 mm) When working with Chart 1, the quantity of nozzles determined I 20 IN • • must be equally divided within the duct area. 151 mm) 1.______ 601N. - I (152 mm) CHART NO.1 . FIGURE 3 !A•49 B A f • • • 1 SIDE "B" 25126 27128 29130 31132 3313 35136 37138 3140 4114243144 451 47148 49150 51152 53154 55158 57158 59160 611626316 65166 57166 69170 71172 5 . r . i f 7 r - 9 . r tO I2 ;3 _ r 10 J r 15 , 16 2 t 17 r 18 f SIDE 19 _. r - "A" 25 21 r . . . . 22 r r 24 J iF r - -- 3 27 . 29 r— r 30 r r'---4-1 J 31 f 1 r- -J 4 32 r 33 34 5 6 Ts 36 „ 1-7--._-_- 1 5 - I _ ` 6 - - 7 CHART NO. 2 B " • • • A • • • ' NOTE: NOZZLE QUANTITIES USTED IN CHART 2 MUST BE EQUALLY DIVIDED INTO EACH OF THE TWO DUCT MODULES. 36 - - - - - - J 37 39 39 41 1 2 r.. 4 42 -- 6 43 - , S. - . ' 1 43 I. 48 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -4 , .REV. 4 10 -1 -02 • ►Transition Protection Transitions are protected at a point in the transition where the • perimeter or the diameter equals, or is less than, the size of the The 1/2N nozzle (Part No. 419334) must be centered 10 to 26 in. duct being protected. The nozzle must'be located in the center of (2510.66 cm) below the'precipitator and aimed to discharge at the the transition opening where the maximum perimeter or diameter center of each precipitator cell. However, if it is' physically impossi- begins. See Figure 4. ble to mount the nozzle at 10 to 26 in. (25 to 66 cm) due to pre- cipitator placement, the nozzle may be mounted closer than 10 in. • • (25 cm ). See Figure 5. �� .. DUCT � � TFIANSrnO N 1.-. tti ".. . . . .. I . . . . . R• SEE U FOR DUCT I TRA NS D IT CT ION NOZZLE PROTECTION 001 1114'� III —1 % . PRECIPITATOR r_44.1_ 10.26 IN.' I (2566 Cm) FIGURE 4 I NOZZLE FOR 000 17° PRECIPITATOR Electrostatic Precipitator Protection PROTECTION ..: , Some restaurant ventilating ducts have an electrostatic precipita- tor installed at or near the base. These precipitators are used to aid • IF PHYSICALLY IMPOSSIBLE AT 10 TO 26 IN. (25T0 66 cm). NOZZLE MAY BE MOUNT - in the cleaning of exhaust air. . ED CLOSER THAN 10 IN. (25 cm) FIGURE 5 Normally electrostatic precipitators do not require protection but °0°f9° should the °authority having jurisdiction' require protection, use the following guidelines. Ducts with precipitators located at or near the base can be pro- tected using duct nozzle(s) above the precipitator and 1 /2N noz- zle(s) (Part No. 419334) for the precipitator. One 1/2N nozzle must be used for each cell being protected. This nozzle tip is stamped with 1 /2N, indicating that it is a 1/2 -flow nozzle and must be count- ed as 112 flow number. When protecting ducts equipped with precipitators, the duct noz- zle(s) must be installed above the precipitator and aimed to dis- charge downstream. If the area above the precipitator is a duct, the nozzle(s) must be positioned according to duct protection guide- lines. If the area above the precipitator is a transition, the transition . guidelines must be followed. SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 1 10 -1 -02 REV. - Plenum Protection - The R -102 system uses the 1W Nozzle (Part No. 419336) or the • 1100 Nozzle (Part No. 430192) or the 1N Nozzle (Part No. 419335) i I 20 IN. 51 cm) for plenum protection. The 1W nozzle tip is stamped with 1W and MAXIMUM • the 1N nozzle tip is stamped with 1 N, indicating they are one -flow I nozzles and must be counted as one flow number each. When pro- tecting a plenum chamber, the entire chamber must be protected I i'' 1 IN. (2.6 cm) . regardless of filter length. MINIMUM i • VERTICAL PROTECTION — GENERAL . i ► One 1W nozzle or 1100 nozzle will protect 4 linear feet (1.2 m) of l The maximum distance from the end of the hood to the i 201N (s1 cm) plenum. MAXIMUM first and last nozzle must be no more than 2 ft. (.6 m). After the first nozzle, any additional nozzles must be positioned at a maximum i of 4 ft. (1.2 m) apart down the entire length of the plenum. The i "4::' t . plenum width must not exceed 4 ft. (1.2 m). (The 1W or 1100 noz- 1 IN. (2.5 cm) zfe can be used on single or V -bank filter arrangements.) See MINIMUM . Figure 6. *' • 2 FT. (.6 m) MAXIMUM ► FIGURE 7 4 FT. (1.2 o0o1e9 I. MAXIMUM 4 FT (12 m) • Option 2: The 1W or 1100 nozzle must be placed perpendicular, 2F MAXIM MAXIMUM 8 -12 in. (20 -30 cm) from the face of the filter and angled MAXIMUM to the center of the filter. The nozzle tip must be within . /� 2 in. (5 cm) from the perpendicular center line of the fil- �� N. ter. See Figure 8. �� 12 IN G� ` ......1:.:. �� , 41N. // / NI( MUM MINIMUM NOZZLE TIP ■ C MUST BE WITHIN .11, •• FIGURE 6 THIS ANEA :;,': . WtSen protecting plenums with the 1W or 1100 nozzle, two options , of coverage are available: FIGURE 8 • Option 1: The 1100 or 1W nozzle must be on the center line of the 000200 single or "V" bank filter and positioned within 1.20 in. (2.5 -51 cm) above the top edge of the filter. See . HORIZONTAL PROTECTION — OPTION 1 . Figure 7. 1N NOZZLE — PART NO. 419335 — SINGLE BANK PROTECTION One 1N nozzle will protect 10 linear feet (3.1 m) of single filter bank • plenum. The nozzle(s) must be mounted in the plenum, 2 to 4 in. (5 to 10 cm) from the face of the filter, centered between the filter height dimension, and aimed down the length. See Figure 9. r ..'':;,:::,:, , 2 — 4 1 N. 10 FT. (3.1 m) (5 — 10 cm) MAXIMUM mmci 10, I \I `\ mo202 . FIGURE 9 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN _ UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -6 , REV. 4 10 -1 -02 ■ ■ fr Plenum Protection (Continued) • • HORIZONTAL PROTECTION — OPTION 2 For a plenum, either single or "V" bank, with a.linear extension 1100 NOZZLE — PART NO.430912 — "V" BANK PROTECTION longer than 10 feet (3.1 m), each bank may be protected using one 1 W NOZZLE — PART N0.419336 1N nozzle every 10 ft. (3.1 m) or less depending on the overall length of the plenum. See Figure 12.The nozzles may point in the One 1100 or 1W nozzle will protect 6 linear feet (1.8 m) of "V" bank opposite directions as long as the entire plenum.area is protected, plenum. The nozzle must be mounted horizontally, positioned 1/3 the and the 10 tt. (3.1 m) limitation is not exceeded., See Figure 13. The filter height down from the top of the filter. Nozzles can be located at nozzle positioning shown in Figure 14 is not an acceptable method 6 ft. (1.8 m) spacings on longer plenums. See Figure 10. of protection because the plenum area directly under the tee is not within the discharge pattern of either nozzle. 1100 NOZZLE OR 1W NOZZLE 10 Fr.. (3.1 m) MAXIMUM 10 FT. (3.1m) / �\ ,( F : t' MAXIMUM fop. I:' 1 1/3 (H EIGHT OF !; I FILTER (H B FT. (1.B m) ;.. r... MAXIMUM 10 FT. (3.1m) � I MAXIMUM / �(, I ,� . �� / MAXIMUM /�� • � 30 Ft (9.1 m) • FIGURE 12 10 FT. (3.Im),. FIGURE 10 MAXIMUM 004,2. • 1N NOZZLE — PART NO. 419335 — "V" BANK PROTECTION 10 FT. (3.t m) MAXIMUM Two IN nozzles will protect 10 linear feet (3.1 m) by 4 ft. (1.2 m) wide of "V" bank plenum. The nozzles must be mounted in the 10 FT. (3.1 m) ��\_�� plenum; 2 to 4 in. (5 to 10 cm) from the face of the filter, centered MAXIMUM � between the filter height dimension, and aimed down the length. See Figure 11. l (5 - 2 -41N. cm) 30 FT. (9.1 m) I t 0 � 2 - (5 - 10 cm) \ . °0°®' FIGURE 13 Ali oawo, I.. - 4 FTm)_id `� M A XIM (t2 UM 10 Fr. (3.1 m) �,N MAXI / <yA\/ %* INCORRECT 1000.0•0., 000204 FIGURE 14 coccas I FIGURE 11 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4•7 10 -1 -02 REV.3 Appliance Protection The following pages detail types of appliance protection. Each design requires several factors: correct nozzle choice, correct noz- zle height above hazard, correct nozzle location and correct aim- ing point. Fryer - Single Nozzle Protection 1. Design requirements for fryers are broken down into two types. • A. FRYERS WITHOUT DRIPBOARDS . if the fryer does not include a dripboard, measure the internal depth (horizontal dimension from front to back) and length of the frypot. B. FRYERS WITH DRIPBOARDS • If the fryer includes any dripboard areas, measure both the internal depth (horizontal dimension from front to back) and length of the frypot portion, and then measure the internal depth and length of the overall hazard area including any dripboard areas. 2. Using Table, "Maximum Cooking Area Dimension - Single Nozzle Fryer Protection" determine which nozzle is needed to protect the fryer based on the maximum dimensions listed. A. If the fryer does not include a dripboard, use the maxi- mum dimensions listed in the first column of the table to select the correct nozzle. B. If the fryer includes any dripboard areas, use both the maximum frypot dimensions in the first column of the table, and the maximum overall dimensions in the second )\-1 - column of the table to select the correct nozzle. None of the maximum dimensions in either column may be exceeded. 3. If either the maximum frypot or the overall sizes are exceed- ed, an additional nozzle(s) will be required. Refer to the mul- tiple nozzle requirements. * \ ( u ' Example: A fryer with a dripboard. The inside of the frypot without � the dripboard measures 18 in. in depth x 18 in. in length (46 cm x 46 cm) and the inside of the overall area including the dripboard 18 in. in depth x 24 in. in length (46 cm x 61 cm). From U the Table "Maximum Cooking Area Dimension - Single Nozzle �+ Fryer Protection," either the 3N or the 290 nozzle should be select- ed to protect the fryer, depending on the maximum nozzle height above the fryer and the positioning requirements allowed. Refer to appropriate Figures. SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN _ UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -8 •,REV. 5 10 -1 -02 • ■ f IM Fryer - Single Nozzle Protection (Continued) Maximum Area Dimensions - Single Nozzle Fryer Protection ' Max. Size Nozzle Max. Size Overall , Type of Nozzle Height Frypot Only With Dripboard Nozzle Above Top of Fryer Location Full or Split Vat Full or Split Vat 230 27 in. to 47 in. See Figure •14 in. x15in. 14 in. x21in. (69 cmto119cm) 15 and 16 (36 cm x 38 cm) (36 cm x 53 cm) Full or Split Vat Full or Split Vat 245 20 in. to 27 in. See Figure ►14 in. x 15 in. 14 in. x 21 in. (51 cm to 69 cm) 15 and 16 (36 cm x 38 cm) (36 cm x 38 cm) �T �- ��'I'� . - ,r, T� II I I I I I II i II h I I II I I I d I 11 I I I I ii I I iI I I f 1 II TOP OF FRYER I I TOP OF FRYER I Ij I I II I I 11 I I . ...- 40 NIP' 00"r, 1 1114111% 1 IIIIIIIIIIIOIIIAII 111114i s FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD SPLIT VAT NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN PERIMETER OF COOKING NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN PERIMETER OF COOKING SURFACE AND AIMED TO THE CENTER OF THE COOKING AREA. SURFACE AND AIMED TO THE CENTER OF THE COOKING AREA • FIGURE 15 . FIGURE 16 • 002Z10 00228.1 • • • • , 1 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN - UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -$, , 10 -1 -02 REV.6 Fryer — Single Nozzle Protection (Continued) Maximum Area Dimensions— Single Nozzle Fryer Protection (Continued) Max. Size Max. Size Overall Type of Nozzle Height Nozzle Frypot Only With Oripboard Nozzle Above Top of Fryer Location . ► 19.5 in. x 19 in. 19.5 in. x 25 3/8 in. • 290 13 in. to 16 in. See Figure 17 (50cmx48cm) (50cmx65cm) (33to41 cm) • 19.5 in. x 19 in. 19.5 in. x 25 3/8 in. 3N See Figure See Figure 18 (50 cm x 48 cm) (50 cm x 65 cm) 34 ►18 in. x 18 in. 18 in. x 27 5/8 in. 3N 25 in. to 35 in. See Figure 19 (46 cm x 46 cm) (46 cm x 70 cm) (64 cm to 89 cm) — � I I ' � , i i 1 I `` I 1 I I ` ` r I I I I ii Ii I I I I I I � 1 1 TOP OF FRYER 1 I 1 1111 111111 I 1 ;r "1 47/01.. 44 FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD Pjy`�Y .,_ T F � O. 290 NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED OVER THE MIDPOINT OF THE HAZARD AREA : 3 IN ' RIGHT-TO-LEFT COMM (7 8 cm) FROM THE MIDPOINT ALONG THE LONGEST SIDE OF THE HAZARD AND t I mom CENTERLINE • IN. (2 5 cm) FROM THE MIDPOINT ALONG THE SHORTEST SIDE OF THE HAZARD AND FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD `•� AIMED AT THE MIDPOINT OF THE COOKING AREA • FIGURE 17 NOTE: 3N NOZZLE TIP MUST BE LOCATED WITHIN THE PERIMETER OF THE SURFACE . come • AREA WITHIN THE FRONT HALF OF THE FRY POT AND AIMED AT THE CENTER. ► FIGURE 19 34 IN. (88 cm) MAXIMUM DIAGONAL DISTANCE BETWEEN NOZZLE AND CENTER OF HAZARD AREA F T "� - ' ` i ; - = I ` � ,,1. ' I 21 in. (53 cm) -. - �I k' '' T �- - i MINIMUM lc, 1 "" 1 1 �� -, ...I.- I VERTICAL ` I I NOZZLE HEIGHT I� • 11 FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD 3N NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN PERIMETER OF COOK- - ING SURFACE AND AIMED TO THE CENTER OF THE COOKING AREA. • FIGURE 18 • SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -10 . R{EV. 5 10 -1 -02 Fryer — Multiple Nozzle Protection Design Requirements: Example: A fryer with a dripboard. The inside vat without the drip- board measures 18 in. in, depth x 30 in. in length (46 cm. x 76 pm) Fryem modules. exceeding the module m ust n must n ot h t axle ce a nozzle d the the can maximum mvi area a and the inside of the overall vat including the dripboard measures into d 24 in. in depth x 30 in. in length (61 cm x 76 cm). Because the fryer allowed for for or a a si nglle e noozzzz e.e m le. However, wheen utilizing multiple nozzle is 30 in (76 cm) in length, it exceeds the coverage of a single protection, the longest side allowed for a fryer with dripboard can nozzle. - be used, regardless of whether the fryer has a dripboard or not. The maximum size fryer that can be modularized is 864 sq. in. Dividing the length in half, each module now has an overall vat (5574 sq. cm) or in terms of ft., 6 sq. ft. (1.8 m). dimension of 24 in. in depth x 15 in. in length (61 x 38 cm). From the Table, "Maximum Cooking Area Dimension — Multiple Nozzle 1. Design requirements for multiple nozzle fryers are broken Fryer Protection," either the 3N or the 290 nozzle should be select - down into two types: ed to protect each fryer module, depending on the maximum noz- A. FRYERS WITHOUT DRIPBOARD(S) zle height above the fryer and the positioning requirements If the fryer does not include a dripboard, measure the inter- • allowed. Refer to appropriate Figures, 15 through 19. nal depth (horizontal dimension from front to back) and See additional examples in Appendix Section. length of the frypot. Then, multiply the depth and length to . obtain the area of the frypot in square inches. B. FRYERS WITH DRIPBOARD(S) If the fryer Includes any dripboard areas, measure both the internal depth and length of the frypot portion, and then measure the internal depth and length of the overall hazard area including any dripboard areas. Determine the area of both the frypot and the area of the overall vat by multiplying corresponding depth and length dimensions. 2. Divide the frypot or overall vat into modules, each of which can be protected by a single nozzle, based on the maximum dimension and area coverage of the nozzle as specified in Table, "Maximum Cooking Area Dimension — Multiple Nozzle Protection." A. If the module considered does not include any portion of the dripboard, use only the maximum frypot area and max- imum dimension listed in the first column of the table to select the correct nozzle. B. H the module considered includes any dripboard areas, use both the maximum frypot area and dimension listed in the first column of the table, and the maximum overall area and • dimensions listed in the second column of the table to select the correct nozzle. 3. None of the maximum dimensions in either column may be exceeded. If either the maximum frypot or the overall sizes are exceeded, the area divided into modules will need to be rede- fined with the possibility of an additional nozzle. • Options For Modularizing Fryers MODULE • PO OF EACH FRY Y T The following Figure 20 shows approved methods of dividing (mod- AREA CANNOT EXCEED Y P POT MODULE sq. cm.) ularizing) fryers so that each section can be properly protected. EACH MODULAR AREA. INCLUDING DRIPBOARD. I MUST NOT EXCEED 497 SO. IN. (3207 sq. cm) AREA OF EACH FRY PDT MODULE i 1 4 CANNOT EXCEED 4 / I 1 324 SO. IN. i = (2090 sq. em _ MIDPOINT I MIDPOINT — —.� — - -- I I AREA OF THIS I I MODULE (FRY I I + P OT PLU DRIP BOARD) CANNOT I I EXCEED I I °�B° 497 SO. IN. EXAMPLE ONLY DRIP BOARD I DRIP BOARD DRIP BOARD FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD 1 mu aom +4 EXAMPLE ONLY EXAMPLE ONLY FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD FIGURE 20 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4.11. , 10 -1 -02 REV. 6 Fryer — Multiple Nozzle Protection (Continued) • Maximum Area Dimension — Multiple Nozzle Fryer Protection Max. Size Module Max. Size Module Overall Type of Nozzle Height Nozzle • Frypot Only With Dripboard' . Nozzle Above Top of Fryer Location • 21 in. x 210 in. 21 in. x 294 in. 230 27 in. to 47 in. See Figure 21 (53 cm x .14 m (53 cm x .19 m (69 cm to 119 cm) • • 21 in. x 210 in. 21 in. x 294 in. 245 20 in. to 27 in. See Figure 21 (53cmx.14m (53cmx.19m2) (51 to69cm) ' 25 3/8 x 370.5 in 25 3/8 x 495 in 290 13 in. to 16 in. See Figure 22 (65 cm x .24 m (65 cm x .32 m (33 to 41 cm) ' 25 3/8 x 370.5 in • 25 3/8 x 495 in 3N See Figure 23 See Figure 23 (65 cm x .24 m (65 cm x 0.32 m ' 27 5/8 x 324 in. 27 5/8 x 497 in 3N 25 in. to 35 in. See Figure 24 (70 cm x .21 m (70 cm x .32 m (64 cm to 89 cm) • • These limitations also apply to tilt skillet/braising pans. 34 IN. (66 cm) MAXIMUM DIAGONAL - I �� ?•� DISTANCE BETWEEN NOZZLE Ic, -' AND CENTER OF c'�.; _ '.? 1 'F - -r 1 i -- - ` � j - - • HAZARD AREA f,s 1 1 1 I I r� I � l I 21 in. (53 cm) � 1 " , 1 I I I I � � � l MINIMUM 1 � I I I I ifir VERTICAL I �^ I I I 1 i� NOZZLE y I I I 111 I I I 11 ill 1 I I HEIGHT t�� ,yam FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD 3N NOZZLE TIP MUST BE POSITIONED ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN THE PERI- m 2 U menu METER OF THE MODULAR IT IS PROTECTING AND AIMED AT THE MIDPOINT OF THAT POSITION NOZZLE TIP ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN THE PERIMETER OF THE MOD- RESPECTIVE MODULE AREA. ULE IT IS PROTECTING AND AIM AT THE MIDPOINT OF THAT MODULAR AREA. ' FIGURE 23 mZ191 FIGURE 21 -r- -y `'-- -- I. .'1---.. AIM POINT _ '+ I - 1 (DIAGONAL - .- - i 1 `T- AIM POINT (DIAGONAL I -iY', CENTER OF I I CENTER OF MODULE I 1 MODULE • I ` .i. � � - ` ^ I `' i I COOKING AREA) I i COOKING - I I I 1 I I I 1 1 I 1 I I I RIGHT- TO-LEFT I I I RIGHT -TO- 1 1 A>♦ , I CENTERLINE l 1 7 i CEN TER 411111110 1114 111114111).<4111011°P 1,(l�llia,,. /00 t� i r llll / i. FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD 250 NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED OVER THE MIDPOINT OF THE RESPECTIVE MODULAR THE 3N NOZZLE TIP MUST BE POSITIONED ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN THE PER AREA s 3 IN ( (2 5 FROM THE MIDPOINT ALONG THE LONGEST SIDE OF THE MOD. METER AND FORWARD OF THE RIGHT•TO -LEFT CENTERLINE OF THE COOKING AREA. IN. (2.5 ULE AND s 1 IN. cm) FROM THE MIDPOINT ALONG THE SHORTEST SIDE OF THE THE AIMING POINT OF THE NOZZLE MUST BE AT THE DIAGONAL CENTER OF THE MODULE AND AIMED AT THE MIDPOINT OF THE MODULE. MODULAR COOKING AREA FIGURE 24 F IGURE 22 . „ 0322133 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -12 REC'. 5 10 -1 -02 Multiple Noule Fryer Protection -Tilt Skillet I Braising Pan Protection for tilt skillets or braising pans is to be based upon the coverage limitations provided for deep fat fryer protection. Refer to • Section IV, DESIGN, starting on Page 4 -10, for maximum fryer nozzle coverages and maximum fryer nozzle height limitations. Although the maximum 6 sq. ft. total surface cooking area require- - ment applies to fryer protection, it does not apply to tilt skillets or braising pans. Each tilt skillet/braising pan protected module must not exceed the fryer limitations for °MAXIMUM SIZE MODULE OVERALL WITH DRIPBOARD" coverage per nozzle as described in Table on Page • 4 -11. Tilt skillets and braising pans generally utilize a hinged cover. Fryer protection nozzles are to be placed toward the front of the appli- ance to minimize the potential for the tilt skillet or braising pan • cover to interfere with the nozzle discharge. See Figure 25. COVER MUST NOT INTERFERE WITH NOZZLE DISCHARGE O i • i % �/ , ., __ . 11 • -.°: THE NOZZLE IS TO BE PLACED TOWARD THE FRONT OF THE APPLIANCE TO MINIMIZE THE POTENTIAL FOR THE SKILLET OR BRAISING PAN COVER TO INTERFERE WITH THE NOZZLE DISCHARGE. COVER MUST NOT INTERFERE WITH EDGE OF DISCHARGE PATTERN i� /. i i i �� / FOR MINIMUM i AND MAXIMUM �i / NOZZLE HEIGHTS. REFER / i TO FRYER i / NOZZLE PARAMETERS / i i I illif 00007, il FRYER NOZZLE USED FOR TILT SKILLET OR BRAISING PAN PROTECTION MUST BE POSITIONED NEAR THE FRONT EDGE OF THE PAN AND AIMED AT THE FRONT TO BACK CENTERUNE OF THE PAN. THE DISCHARGE FROM THE NOZZLE(S) MUST COMPLETELY CLEAR THE PAN COVER WITH AN UNOBSTRUCTED VIEW TO THE BACK OF THE PAN. ► FIGURE 25 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -13 10 -1 -02 REV.4 Range Protection 1-Flow Nozzle • When this type of hazard is equipped with a back shelf located - • The R -102 system uses five different nozzles for the protection of above the range top, two protection options are available: One ranges. One of the design options requires a one -flow nozzle and requires a 1 F nozzle, Part No. 419333, and the other option three of the design options require, two -flow nozzles. requires a 260 nozzle, Part No. 419341. • NOTICE Option 1: 1F Nozzle: When using the 1F nozzle for range protec- _ tion with back shelf, the maximum length of the burner A 13 in. (33 cm) diameter wok pan is the largest grates being protected must not exceed 28. in. (71 cm) wok size that can be protected on ranges. and the maximum area of the burner grates must not D. When protecting hot top ranges, the entire exceed 336 sq. in. (2168 sq. cm). See Figure 27 for noz- • cooking surface must be protected. zle location details. Range Protection (1 -Flow Nozzle) IF NOZZLE • SHELF CAN OVERHANG BURNER(S) • Single and multiple burner ranges can be protected using a IN /. BY A MAXIMUM OF 11 IN. (28 cm) • nozzle, Part No. 419335. The nozzle tip is stamped with IN, indi- cating that this is a one -flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow number. • When using this nozzle for range protection, the maximum length N'441111111111 M 20 IN. • of the burner grates being protected with a single nozzle must not 40.48IN. I POINT MINIM cm M exceed 32 in. (81 cm) and the maximum area of the burner grates (102.122 cm) must not exceed 384 sq. in. (2477 sq. cm) per nozzle. ',� When protecting a range, the 1N nozzle must be located a maxi- ''1! mum of 10 in. (25.4 cm) from each burner grate centerline and "i� must be aimed at the center of the cooking surface. See Figure 26. 11W1111111 41•. 4 ___Tilii_ � . (35.6 cm) A .14 1N MAXIMUM 12 IN. (35.6 cm) - 12 IN. FRONT TO REAR MAXIMUM IF NOZZLE LOCATED OVER FRONT EDGE OF BURNER GRATE AND ORIENTED I SO NOZZLE TIP FLATS ARE PARALLEL WITH BURNER GRATE FRONT TO REAR !: CENTERLINE AND SHALL BE AIMED AT THE CENTER OF THE COOKING SURFACE. FIGURE 2s....-..1:' aolN. I A, (102 cm) . , Option 2: 260 Nozzle: When using the 260 nozzle for range pro- tection with back shelf, the maximum length of burner 30 IN. I grates being protected must not exceed 32 in. (81 cm) (76 cm) 1 /� and the maximum area of the burner grates must not ` r exceed 384 sq. in. (2477 sq. cm). Nozzle must be locat- ed on the front edge of the burner grates and aimed at a point 10 in. (25 cm) from the back edge of the burn- er grates. Nozzle must be mounted 30 to 40 in. (76 to 102 cm) above the hazard surface. See Figure 28. X374 260 NOZZLE SHELF CAN OVERHANG BURNER(S) /; BY A MAXIMUM OF 11 IN. (28 cm) 10 IN. (25 cm MAXIM UM rrl \ 20 IN. 1 c IN. I (51 cm) ( Bt Cm) 30 - 40 IN. MINIMUM 1N MAXIMUM (76 - 102 cm) i NOZZLE 8 �� AIMING / �� POINT �� IN 10 . 10 IN. BACK cm) FROM (25 URN MAXIMUM R BURNER GRATES Mil .11111 mesao • FIGURE 28 . 002233a • FIGURE 26 • _ SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -14 aE'V. 5 10 -1 -02 Range Protection 2 -Flow Nozzle cooKING _„ High Proximity AppllcsUon. (2 -Flow Nozzle): 40 in. to 50 in. AREA • (102 cm to 127 cm) above the cooking surface. • • This high proximity application uses the 245 nozzle, Part No. - '6, el gi 419340. �, The nozzle tip is stamped with 245 indicating this is a two -flow COOKING nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers. 245 NOZZLE TIP AREA LOCATION CENTER OF I `r 1 M C OOKING SURFACE ` One 245 nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 672 sq. in. OR O M 0 (4335 sq. cm) with a maximum longest dimension of 28 in. (71 cm). 11 yB IN. (29 cm) When using this nozzle for range protection, the nozzle must CEPtT ERUNE OF NOZZLE \ be pointed vertically down and positioned as shown in Figures TOURNERGROF ANY • '29 and 30. 245 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION COOKING • CENTERLINE OF / COOKING SURFACE A REA i i 1 1 COOKING (I) t 50 IN. 245 NOZZLE TIP AREA MA IMU M LOCATION CENTER OF MAXIMUM COOKING SURFACE HEIGHT OR OF 245 11 318 IN. (29 cm) 1 NOZZLE MAXIMUM FROM t C2. TIP MINIMUM CENTERLINE OF NOZ 030 TO CENTER OF ANY 40 IN. • BURNER GRATE (102 Cm) I . FIGURE 30 I HEIGHT OF 245 1 NOZZLE I TIP i ' O 010 • 4 • FIGURE 29 NOTICE • Four burner grates shown in Figure 30. For sin- ► gle or double burner grates, locate nozzle at • center of cooking surface or 11 3/8 in. (29 cm) maximum from nozzle centerline to center of • any burner grate. SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-15' 10 -1 -02 REV, 4 Range Protection 2-Flow Nozzle Medium Proximity Application (2 -Flow Nozzle): 30 in. to 40 in. coOaNG L__, AR EA (76 cm to 102 cm) above the cooking surface. The medium proximity application {uses the 260 nozzle, Part No. • 419341. 102115 The nozzle tip is stamped with 260 indicating this is a two -flow / i nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers. _ COOKING AREA • One 260 nozzle will protect a cooking area of 768 sq. in. + \ % ' / f (4955 sq. cm) with a maximum dimension of 32 in. (81 cm). 260 NOZZLE TIP I & , • LOCATION CENTER When using this nozzle for range protection, the nozzle must OFR COOKING be pointed vertically down and positioned as shown in Figures p. OR --s...• • 31 and 32. 1D IN. (25.4 cm) MAXIMUM FROM CENTERLINE OF NOZZLE TO 260 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION CENTER OF ANY COOKING CENTERUNE OF COOKING SURFACE s. BURNER GRATE AREA 1 NOZZLE TIP iit LOCATION CENTER COOKING ' 4itic.:0 OF COOKING AREA MAXI SURFACE M OR ( MAXIMUM 10 IN. (25,4 cm) F HEIGHT ■ MAXIMUM RO OF 260 CENTERUNE OF 0 ' (1) 1 NOZZLE NOZZLE TO FIGURE 32 TIP CENTER OF ANY BURNER GRATE C00768 30 IN (76 Cm) NOTICE . MINIMUM HEIGHT ■ Four burner grates shown in Figure 32. For sin - OF 260 ■ gle or double burner grates, locate nozzle at NOZZLE TIP center of cooking surface. i I t 1 1 0 ,0 l I 0 0 ck FIGURE 31 • - SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL ,EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -16 • 9EV. 5 10-1-02 Range Protection 2 -Flow Nozzle - Low Proximity Appllcation (2 -Flow Nozzle): 15 in. to 20 in. COOKING LONGITUDINAL AREA CENTERLINE (38 cm to 51 cm) above the cooking surface. The low proximity application requires two (2) 290 nozzles, Part No. 419342. I MI a % ,P - The nozzle tip is stamped with 290 indicating this is a two flow noz- I �� \I zle and must be counted as two flow numbers. _ _ - AREA Two (2) 290 nozzles will protect a cooking area of 1008 sq. in. l► \/ Fit / (6503 sq. cm) with a maximum dimension of 36 in. (91 cm). [I%► oc. //t1 When using two of these nozzles for low proximity range protec- NOZZLE TIP lion, the nozzles must be positioned along the cooking surface 290 29O NOZZLE CENTER OF perimeter to 1.5 in. (3.8 cm) inside the perimeter, and aimed at a LOCATION SURFACE CENTER 45 angle along the longitudinal centerline of the range. See s 2 IN (5 cm) • Figures 33 and 34. 290 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION �, 0 — 1.51N. (3.8 cm) IN FROM EDGE OF COOKING SURFACE • 290 NOZZLE TIP — LOCATION 0 — 1.5IN. -4' (0 - 3.8 cm) COOKING IN FROM EDGE OF AREA 45° COOKING SURFACE 45° I � x ( ! 2 01N. COOKING �a 201N. ' I ( cm) M (51 cm) AXIM I MAXIMUM AREA MIMUM I I � 1 15 IN. (38 cm) MIN MUMcm) I I 1 I MINIMUM i II L. 1 ill, 0 41;4 k , L 290 NOZZLE TIP O Q Q Q 0 Q \ - LOCATION CENTER OF COOKING SURFACE t 2 IN. (5 cm) 290 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION • FIGURE 33 0 — 1 5 IN. (3.8 cm) IN FROM EDGE cows OF COOKING SURFACE FIGURE 34 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN - UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -17, , 10 -1 -02 REVS - Griddle Protection 1-Flow Nozzle • The R -102 system uses four different nozzles for the protection of • griddles. One of the applications requires a 1 -flow nozzle and I I NOZZLE LOCATION i three of the applications require a 2 -flow nozzle. • .I I 0 - 2 IN. (0 - 5 m) I INSIDE PERIMETER . I 40 IN. • High Proximity Application: 35 in: to 40 in. (89 to 102 cm) above —► OF COOKING SURFACE l l (102 cm) I % i I . MAXIMUM - the cooking surface: HEIGHT 1 • OF IN . This high proximity application uses the • 1 N nozzle, Part No. I I } NOZZLE TIP I 419335. i 1 as IN. (89 cm) • The nozzle tip is stamped with 1N indicating / icating this is a one -flow noz- 1 / / • 1 I MEUMi r . M zle and must be counted as one flow number. ES 1 E I 1 I I NOZZLE TIP HEIG 1 One 1N nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 1080 sq. --P.! I I i I i • in. (6968 sq. cm) with the maximum longest side of 36 in. (91 cm). • COOKING I I When using this nozzle for griddle protection, the nozzle must be - positioned along the cooking surface perimeter to a maximum of 2 in. (5 cm) inside the perimeter, and aimed to the midpoint of the • cooking surface. See Figure 35 and 36. NOTICE FIGURE 36 hen using this type of griddle protection, only 5 flow numbers are allowed on a 1.5 gallon sys- tem and only 11 flow numbers are allowed on a 3 gallon system. L__1 I- • . 1--- 1 - — MIDPOINT OF COOKING SURFACE r..._ "1 I I I ---- -—L i — -- I I r IN NOZZLE LOCATED ALONG COOKING SURFACE EDGE ANY SIDE OF GRIDDLE SURFACE WITHIN 0 - 2 IN. (0 - 5 cm) OF COOKING SURFACE EDGE. NOZZLE MUST BE AIMED AT MIDPOINT OF COOKING SURFACE FIGURE 35 • 0007. • SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN - UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -18 1EV. 5 10 -1 -02 r. Griddle Protection 2-Flow Nozzle COOKING Option 1 — Nozzle Center Located COO 1,N. c2 cm) LOCATION High Proximity Application: 30 in. to 50 in. (76 cm to 127 cm) NOZZLE MAXIMUM above the cooking surface. � ea This high proximity application uses the 290 nozzle, Part No. _ 419342. The nozzle tip is stamped with 290 indicating this is a 2 -flow noz- zle and must be counted as two flow numbers. COOKING 290 nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 720 sq. in. I hhI t li : • AREA (9290 sq. cm with a maximum dimension of 30 in. (76 cm). When using this nozzle for high proximity applications, the nozzle 1 IN. (2 cm) must be positioned within 1 in. (2.5 cm) of the center of the cook- • MAXIMUM • ing surface and pointed vertically down. See Figure 38 and 37. CENTER UNE OF GRIDDLE CENTER OF GRIDDLE SURFACE OR A SURFACE t 1 IN. (2 cm) IN MAXIMUM DIMENSION OF 20.6 IN. t ANY DIRECTION (52 cm) FROM NOZZLE CENTERUNE TO ( I I • FURTHEST CORNER OF GRIDDLE FIGURE 38 000173 I I 501N. il I (127 cm) MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF 290 E TIP . NOZZLE 30 IN I I (78 cm) 1 MINIMUM T OF HEIGH 290 I NOZZLE • I TIP i 1 _ ■ FIGURE 37 OO M • SECTION IV – SYSTEM DESIGN - UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -19 , , 10-1-02 REV.3 2 -Flow Griddle Protection (Continued) . Option 2 – Nozzle Perimeter Located COOKING AREA I .A Application: 30 in. to 50 in. (76 cm to High Proximity pp 127 cm) 1.4--- above the cooking surface. – _ - _ This high proximity application uses the 260 nozzle, Part No. r MIDPOINT OF 419341. COOKING SURFACE The nozzle tip is stamped with 260 indicating this is a two-flow I +, ' c ooKING AREA nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers. I AIM Polar One 260 nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 1440 sq. -. Im- l I I in. (9290 sq. cm) with a maximum dimension of 48 in. (122 cm). L_ __ _ _ _— _ _ J When using this nozzle for griddle protection, the nozzle must be positioned along the cooking surface perimeter to 2 in. (5.1 cm) inside perimeter, and aimed at the center of the cooking 260 NOZZLE LOCATED ALONG COOKING SURFACE EDGE • surface. See Figure 39 and 40. ANY SIDE OF GRIDDLE SURFACE WITHIN O - 2 IN. (0 - 5 cm) OF COOKING SURFACE EDGE. NOZZLE MUST 6E AIMED AT MIDPOINT OF ( I NOZZLE LOCATION COOKING SURFACE. I 0- 2IN.(0 -5 cm) I 501N ■ FIGURE 40 I I INSIDE PERIMETER � -- Lam- OF COOKING SURFACE I I (127 cm) i I I MAXIMUM I / I HEIGHT /r OF26D /f NOZZLE TIP � I 30 IN (76 cm) I I HEIGHT OF 260 OF E II —.- I i � NOZZLE 1 TIP SUURFACE I I 0002u ► FIGURE 39 mc+u SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL E,X. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -20 %`'1EV. 4 10 -1 -02 2 -Flow Griddle Protection (Continued) Option 2 — Nozzle Perimeter Located (Continued) Medium Proximity Application: 20 in. to 30 in. (51 cm to 76 cm) above the cooking surface. The medium proximity application uses the 290 nozzle, Part No. - 419342. The nozzle tip is stamped with 290 indicating this is a two -flow nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers. One 290 nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 1440 sq. in. (9290 sq. cm) with a maximum dimension of 48 in. (122 cm). When using this nozzle for griddle protection, the nozzle must be positioned along the perimeter to 2 in. (5.1 cm) inside perimeter, and aimed at the center of the cooking surface. See • Figure 41 and 42. r--- COOKING AREA CENTER OF I I COOKING SURFACE / COOKING AREA ► I f I I I �- AIM POINT l 1 L- -� 290 NOZZLE LOCATED ALONG COOKING SURFACE EDGE ANY SIDE OF GRIDDLE SURFACE WITHIN 0 -2 IN. (0- 5 cm) OF COOKING SURFACE EDGE. NOZZLE MUST BE AIMED AT CENTER OF FIGURE 41 COOKING SURFACE. • 0002.1 • t I NOZZLE LOCATION 1 1 0- 2 IN. (0 - 5 cm) N. 90 I I INSIDE PERIMETER 30 N. -, I ( +.- OF COOKING SURFACE I MAXIMUM I / I HEIGHT I / OF 290 4IN.( 5 cn» NOZZLE TIP I 1 I MINIMU 1 I ( HEIGHT NOZZLE I ' \ r EDGE OF COOKING SURFACE 1 FIGURE 42 ► 00020 ' • SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -21 . . • 10 -1 -02 REV.3 2 -Flow Griddle Protection (Continued) Option 2 — Nozzle Perimeter Located (Continued) Low Proximity Application: 10 in. to 20 in. (25 cm to 51 cm) above the cooking surface. The low proximity application uses the 2120 nozzle, Part No. 419343. The nozzle tip is stamped with 2120 indicating this is a two -flow nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers. . One 2120 nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 1440 sq. in. (9290 sq. cm) with a maximum dimension of 48 in. (122 cm). When using this nozzle for griddle protection, the nozzle must be positioned along the perimeter to 2 in. (5.1 cm) inside perime- ter, and aimed at the center of the cooking surface. See Figure • 43 and 44. I NOZZLE LOCATION I I 0- 2 IN. (0 -5 cm) I 20 IN ■ I INSIDE PERIMETER —A- Le— OF COOKING SURFACE I I (51 MAXIMUM I / I I HEIGHT I / , 1 OF 2120 / I } NOZZLE TIP I � 1 10 IN. (25 cm) I / / I MINIMUM HEIGHT OF 2120 I , I N OZZLE TIP l l I 0002U EDGE OF COOKING SURFACE FIGURE 43 00020 r --- - COOKING AREA CENTER OF COOKING SURFACE I ( I C I -� I AREA I f I / I _ I � _ AIM POINT I---- - -___! J / - t . 2120 NOZZLE LOCATED ALONG COOKING SURFACE EDGE ANY SIDE OF GRIDDLE SURFACE WITHIN 0 - 2 IN. (0 - 5 cm) OF COOKING SURFACE EDGE. NOZZLE MUST BE AIMED AT CENTER OF COOKING SURFACE. FIGURE 44 00020 • SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -22 ' .)EI?. 3 10 -1-02 • Chain Broiler Protection • The R -102 system uses two 1N Nozzles (Part No. 419335) for Overhead Chain Broiler Protection chain broiler protection. The nozzle tip is stamped 1N, indicating The R -102 system uses two 1W Nozzles _(Part No. 419336) for that this is a one -flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow overhead chain broiler protection. The nozzle tip is stamped with number (total of two flow numbers for each chain broiler being pro- 1W, indicating that this is a one -flow nozzle and must be counted tected). . , as one flow number. Two 1N nozzles are always needed for chain broiler. protection Overhead protection is onl • av ailable for chain broilers with when the hazard area to be protected does not meet the - exhaust opening dimensions that are not less than 60% of the °Overhead Broiler Protection" requirements. The maximum inter- internal broiler length and not less than 60% of the internal broiler nal size of the broiler is 43 x 31 in. (109 cm x 79 cm). The nozzles width, to a minimum size of 12 in. x 12 in. (30.5 x 30.5 cm). Internal must be positioned at each end of the enclosed cooking chamber broiler size can not be larger. than 32 in. x 34 in. (81 x 86 cm). 1 to 3 in. (2.5 to 7.5 cm) above the surface of the chain and a max- When overhead protection IS used, the nozzles must be centered imum distance of 4 in. (10 cm) away from the broiler opening. The above the exhaust opening. within 4 to 8 in. (10 to 20 cm) of each nozzles may be mounted at either corner as long as they are at other and they must be located 10 to 26 in. (25 to 0 cm) above opposite ends of the chain broiler and positioned to discharge .the top of the broiler surface. See Figure 47. • diagonally across the top of the chain. See Figures 45 and 46. . 4-8 IN. (10-20 cm) 41140000. -1 6 �" -2 cM) 1 (25.68 Cm) 4,4 12 IN. (90.5 Cm) 1 ��'�- / MINIMUM 12 IN. ��, /� MINIM 7 0.Sem) II \► . �_.� / MINIMUM / II Ii Oil ilr 1i-1- I II MAXIMUM INTERNAL II BROILER SIZE 32X34 IN. (81 x86 cm) FIGURE 47 °°o2.) The nozzles may vary in po sition as long as they are evenly spaced from the exhaust center and are always 180° opposite of each other. If the opening is not square, the nozzles must be posi- t - 3 IN. tioned along the centerline, parallel to the longest side of the open- (2.5 - 7.5 cm) • ing. See Figure 4 8. • FIGURE 45 41t Al t 4.L _� 1111""- I TOP VIEW TOPYIEW " • FIGURE 48 I j/ 7 II 1 MAXIMUM INTERNAL . ` li BROILER SIZE 43 X 31 IN. 0 (109 X 79 cm) F IGURE 46 oo°zn SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN ' UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -23, . 10 -1 -02 REV.5 Overhead Chain Broiler Protection (Continued) Example No. 1 - Internal broiler size is 24 in. long x 20 in. wide UprlghtlSalamander Broiler Protection (61 x 51 cm), with an opening of 16 in. x 16 in. The R -102 system uses two 1/2N Nozzles (Part No. 419334) for all (40.6 x 40.6 cm). upright/salamander broiler protection. The nozzle tip is stamped To determine minimum opening size, multiply the 1/2N, indicating that this is a half -flow nozzle. A pair of these noz- - internal length and the internal width by 0.6: zles will equal one flow number. Length of opening - 24 in. x 0.6 = 14.4 in. Two 1/2N nozzles will protect a maximum hazard area (internal (61 cm x 0.6 = 36.6 cm) broiler chamber) of 30 in. x 32.5 in. (76 cm x 82.5 cm). These noz- zles must always be used in pairs on an upright/salamander broil - Width of opening - 20 in. x 0.6 = 12.0 in. er. One nozzle must be positioned above the grate and pointed at (51 cm x 0.6 = 30.5 cm) the back opposite corner of the broiler chamber. The second noz- The minimum allowable opening for overhead protec- zie must be pointed down into the center of the drip pan through tion would be 14.4 in. x 12.0 in. (36.6 x 30.5 cm). • the open slot. See Figure 49. This example would be acceptable for overhead pro- NOTE: If metal blow -off caps are required for upright broiler or tection. salamander broiler protection, use (2) two IN nozzles, Part No. Example No. 2 - Internal broiler size is 30 in. long x 24 in. wide ► 56930, instead of 1/2N nozzles. (76 x 61 cm) with an opening of 22 in. x 12 in. SALAMANDER BROILER (56 x 30 cm). To determine minimum opening size, multiply internal length and internal width by 0.6: Length of opening - 30 in. x 0.6 = 18.0 in. \ (76 cm x 0.6 = 45.7 cm) Width of opening - 24 in. x 0.6 = 14.4 in. , (61 cm x 0.6 = 36.6 cm) Minimum allowable opening for overhead protection II � �� I � �� would be 18 in. x 14.4 in. (45.7 x 36.6 cm). t- Because this broiler has an opening of 22 in. x 12 in., II' . a the 12 in. width is below the minimum allowable cal- • culated dimension of 14.4 in. (36.6 cm) and therefore would not be acceptable tar overhead protection. 030251 UPRIGHT BROILER BROILER CHAMBER .- A 1 / . ( I DRIP N . �' � `i PAN ' L___1 FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW U Ii 0=52 FIGURE 49 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL V. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-24 IEV. 5 10-1-02 + Electric Char-Broller Protection Gas - Radiant Char - Broiler Protection • The R -102 system uses the 1N nozzle for the protection of electric The R -102 system uses the 1N nozzle, (Part No. 419335) for gas - char- broilers. The maximum length of the hazard can be no longer radiant char - broiler protection. than 34 in. (86 cm) and the total cooking area must not exceed 680 The nozzle tip on the 1N nozzle Is stamped with a 1N, indicating sq. in. (4388 sq. cm). that this is a one -flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow 1. Nozzle Location: 20 to 50 in. (51 to 127 cm) above the grate number. . surface. d a total cooking area which IN nozzle will protect a hazard with a maximum length of Is used for electric char - 36 in. (91 cm) and does not exceed The 1N Nozzle ns. The No. he nozzle t nozzle tip is is stamp ed with 1N,'indi- 864 Sq. In. (5574 sq. cm). The nozzle tip must be located 15 to broiler that t his i a T 40 in. (38 to 102 cm) above the hazard surface. When using this o one flow nozzle and must be counted as nozzle for gas - radiant char - broiler protection, the nozzle must be onne e fl low w this r number. a number. positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter of the maximum When using this nozzle for electric char- broiler protection, the cooking area and shall be aimed at the center of the cooking sur- nozzle must be positioned anywhere along or within the • face. See Figure 51. perimeter of the maximum cooking area and shall be aimed at COOKING • the center of the cooking surface. See Figure 50. AREA j / / //. COOKING COOKING ! �� AREA AREA ��` I COO F, ,� 1 AREA mvlx .., 10 '-. .- I g 1 1 I I 1 40 IN I (102 cm) I I / I MAXIMUM 1 AP-4- \ 1 \ s / 15IN. cm) l ooi . I MINIMUM 4002„ FIGURE 51 000257 . I' 411 1\ ' / r----I f 50 IN. ' I ‘ I I (127 cm) • i MAXIMUM I 0 1 I 63 \ % 1 / A ' 20 IN. / 1 (51 cm) I I I MINIMUM =6;.;, I�, 000254 IIIIIIIIIIII FIGURE 50 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-25' 10 -1 -02 REV.6 Lava Rock (Ceramic) Char - Broiler Protection . The R -102 system uses the 1N Nozzle (Part No. 419335) for all Natural Charcoal Broiler Protectiort . lava rock char - broiler protection. The nozzle tip is stamped with The R -102 system uses the 1N Nozzle (Part No. 419335) for all 1N, indicating that this is a one -flow nozzle and must be counted natural charcoal broiler protection. The nozzle tip is Stamped with as one flow number. 1N indicating that this is a one -flow nozzle and must be counted One 1N nozzle will protect a hazard which has a maximum length as one flow number. . of 24 in. (61 cm) and a total cooking area which does not exceed One 1N nozzle will protect a hazard area which has a maximum 312 sq. in. (2013 sq. cm). The nozzle tip must be located 18 to 35 length of 24 in. (61 cm) and a total cooking area which does not in. (46 to 89 cm) above the hazard surface. When using this noz- exceed 488 sq. in. (1858 sq. cm). The nozzle tip must be located zle for lava rock (ceramic) char - broiler protection, the nozzle must 18 to 40 in. (46 to 102 cm) above the hazard surface. When using be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter of the max- this nozzle for natural charcoal broiler protection, the nozzle must • imum cooking area and angled to the center. See Figure 52. , be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter of the max- imum cooking area and aimed at the center of the cooking surface. COOKING • See Figure 53. AREA I COCKIN G I AREA The coverage of such appliances only applies when the depth of � the charcoal does not exceed 4 in. (10 cm). -.T- - I ---- COOKING COOKING I I I r:._ I - � � AREA AREA .... �� . I ``\ Y� I I ► ) l I %\ l I illiiii =:I %s\ C00250 111-1k:":_..,t;...(.....0000 I i C00250 I , / 351N. ( (89 cm) 1 I MAXIMUM l r I • I 1 I ` ' l I / (102 cm) MAXIMUM I I I I 181N. 1 \ / / I (48 cm) I I I I MINIMUM 1 I I t I I , 1 8 IN. - �— X59 MAXIMUM I I I (46 cm) DEPTH I 1 i MINIMUM 'la` t 000258 • . FIGURE 52 1 • FIGURE 53 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN ' UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -26 k 1E1i 10.1 -02 Alternate Ceramic/Natural Charcoal Char - broiler Protection • Wood Fueled Char - Broiler Protection The R-102 is (em may) and u atu al ch rrc char bro err protec- mesquite char-br oiler a protection. The nozzle (Part p is stamped wi 3N for all ceramic nozzle tip roc stamped a p a lion. The nozzl tip is sped with 3N, indicating that this is a indicating that this is a three -flow nozzle and must be counted as three -flow nozzle and must be counted es three flow numbers. three flow numbers. One 3N zzle c m ) and a will prot too t skin area which does not xceed of 30 in. (76 will protect total cook g area has iiich does s no length of 30 exceed in6 cm) and total 9 The nozzle tip must be located 14 to 720 sq. in. (4645 sq. cm). The nozzle tip must be located 14 to 720 sq. in. (4645 sq. cm). P 40 in. (36 to 102 cm) above the hazard surface. The nozzle must 40 in. (36 to 102 cm) abo long or h az a rd the acee. The r nozzle of the must be positio anywhere along or within the perimeter of the max- be positioned • imum cooking area and angled to the center. See Figure 54. imum cooking area and aimed at the center of the cooking surface. • See Figure 55. For natural charcoal char- boiler protection, this coverage only Mesquite logs and pieces, no larger than 4 in (10 cm) in diameter, applies when the depth of the charcoal does not exceed 4 in. may be protected with a maximum allowable wood depth of 6 in. (10 cm). (15 cm). COOKING COOKING COOKING ......t...... COOKING AREA AREA 1 AREA AflEA r--- ;>1 -::1 I Y I i Y I I I I I I I I 1 I % • !Z - /.- - . . . . . . . . , ,_. .,.....,• 11111114 .0- I I 50 0 • r 1 I 4 01N. I ` 401N 11\ 1 , 1 MAXIMUM I / (102 cm) I ` / MAIMU I MAXIMUM I I I 1 I I 0 I 1\ ) 41N. 1 I 4 IN. M cm) 1 , / (36 cm) BIN. (15 cm) 1 / I 14 N. DEPTH MAXIMUM 1 I ' / I MINIMUM MAXIMUM I , I / 1 MINIMUM DEPTH I I I I 1 ; I / V � I t I !R!era��! I� 000x59 1 �......! ...•• I 007x59 •. 1 I. I 1.1.11 11111111 .1 11111 II 1111111.11111111111 • FIGURE 54 FIGURE 55 ,7GV I I% I• I• UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -27 • 10-1 -02 REV.4 2. A 1N Nozzle, Part No.419335, will protect a wok 11 in. (28 cm) Wok Protection minimum diameter up to 24 in. (61 cm) maximum diameter. The R -102 system uses two different nozzles for the protection of The wok depth must be no less than 3 in. (8 cm) and no woks greater than 6 in. (15 cm). The Houle tip is stamped with 1N be counted as 1. ( 260 Houle, Part m t 419341, will protect a wok 14 in. r up to 30 in. (76 cm) maximum one flow number. When using this zzle e, the nozz nozzle must be dia ete positioned minimum diameter p here along or within the perimeter of the wok, diameter. The wok depth must be no less than 3.75 in. aimed he� ter, 30 in. to 40 in. (76 to 102 cm) above the _ (9.5 cm) and no greater than 8 in. (20 cm). • hazard surface, as shown in Figure 57. The nozzle tip is stamped with 260 indicating that this is a two NOTICE flow nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers. When using this type of wok protection, only When using this nozzle, the nozzle must be positioned as 5 flow numbers are allowed on a 1 1/2 gallon • shown in Figure 56. system, and only 11 flout numbers are allowed NOZZLE MUST BE POSITIONED WITHIN 1 IN. (2 cm) RADIUS on a 3 gallon system. OF THE CENTER OF THE WOK POINTED VERTICALLY DOWN . 410 1 1 1 4 1 i 40 IN j \ I � 1 (102 cm) I ` Ca I I 1 I / 1301N. 260 NOZZLE 1 ' 1 (76 cm) 1*-- I I MINIMUM DEPTH 3.0 IN. (7 6 cm) - 1 MAXIMUM DEPTH 1 6.01N. (15 cm) 11 IN. (28 cm) MINIMUM DIAMETER (8 _ (89 — 1 — 24 IN, (61 cm) MAXIMUM DIAMETER t t 4 cm1 4 MINIMUM DEPTH 3.15 IN. (9.8 cm) FIGURE 57 MAXIMUM DEPTH 8 IN. (20 cm) 1 ■ ox.' 14 IN. (35.6 cm) MINIMUM DIAMETER • 30 IN. (76 2 cm) MAXIMUM DIAMETER FIGURE 56 . 0m261 • SECTION !V — SYSTEM DESIGN . UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -28 REV. 3 10 -1 -02 • • Nozzle Application Chart The following chart has been developed to assist in calculating the • quantity and type of nozzle required to protect each duct, plenum, or appliance. . . NOTICE This chart is for general reference only. See complete details for each type of hazard. • Minimum Nozzle Tip ► Maximum Hazard Nozzle Nozzle Nozzle Stamping — Dimensions Quantity Heights Part No. Flow No. Hazard 430912 1100 Duct or Transition Length — Unlimited 1 (Single Nozzle) Perimeter — 50 in. (127 cm) Diameter —16 in. (40.6 cm) • Duct or Transition Length — Unlimited 1 — 419337 2W (Single Nozzle) Perimeter — 100 in. (254 cm) Diameter — 31 7/8 in. (81 cm) 9 ► Duct or Transition Length — Unlimited 2 — 419337 2W (Dual Nozzle) Perimeter — 150 in. (381 cm) Diameter — 48 in. (122 cm) Electrostatic Precipitator Individual Cell 1 — 419334 1 /2N (At Base of Duct) • Plenum Length — 10 ft. (3.1 m) 1 — 419335 1N (Horizontal Protection) 1100 Length — 6 ft. (1.8 m) 1 — 430192 ►Plenum 1 _ 419336 (Horizontal Protection) Plenum Width — 4 h. (1.2 m) 1W Length — 4 ft. (1.2 m) 1 — 419336 1W ; • (Vertical Protection) Width — 4 ft. (1.2 m) Fryer /Split Vat Fryer" Maximum Size (without drip board) 15 in. (38 cm) x s 14 in. (36 cm) 230 High Proximity 1 27 — 47 in. 419339 9 245 Medium Proximity 1 20 — 27 in. Maximum Size (without drip board) 19 1/2 in. (49.5 cm) x 19 in. (48.2 cm) High Proximity 1 21 — 34 in. 419342 419338 3N 290 Low Proximity 1 13 — 16 in. Maximum Size (without drip board) 18 in. (45.7 cm) x 18 in. (45.7 cm) . 25 _ in. 419338 3N High Proximity 1 (64 -89 cm) •. For multiple Route protection of single fryers. see detailed information on Pages 4-12 through 4-14. • UL EX. 3470 • ULC CEx74 Page 4 -29 . 10.1 -02 REV.3 .. '. • Nozzle Application Chart (Continued) Nozzle Tip Minimum Nozz in ' Nozzle Nozzle Nozzle P . g - Maximum Hazard Hazard Dimepsions Quantity. L1 iohts part No Ekw No. Fryer /Split Vat Fryer" Maximum Size (with drip board) 21 in, (53 cm) x 14 in. (36 cm) (Fry Pot must not exceed 15 in. x14in. (38 cm x 36 cm)) 1 27 - 47 in. 419339 230 Medium P P ro rox Pro xy imity 1 20 - 27 in. 419340 245 Med Maximum Size ' (with drip board) 25 3/8 in. (64.4 cm) x 19 112 in. (49.5 cm) (Fry pot side must not exceed 19 1/2 in. (49.5 cm) x 19 in. (48.2 cm) 1 21 - 34 in. 419338 3N High Proximity 1 13 -16 in. 419342 290 Low Proximity Maximum Size (with drip board) 18 in. (45.7 cm) x 27 5/8 in. (70.2 cm) 25 - 35 in. 419338 3N High Proximity 1 (64 -89 cm) • Longest Side 1 30 - 50 in. 419333 1F Range 28 in. (71 cm) (76 -127 cm) Area -336 sq. in. 40 - 48 in. (102 -122 cm) (2168 sq. cm) (With Backshelf) 419340 245 50 - in. Longest Side (High Proximity) 1 40 40 - in. cm) 28 in. (71 cm) Area - 672 sq. in. (4335 sq. cm) Longest Side _ 40 in 419341 260 (Medium Proximity) 1 32 in. (81 cm) (76 - 102 cm) 1 Area - 768 sq. in. (4955 sq. cm) 419342 290 Longest Side (Low Proximity) 2 • 15 - 20 in. (38 - 51 cm) 36 in. (91 cm) Area -1008 sq. in. (6503 sq. cm) •• For multiple nozzle protection or single fryers, see detailed information on Pages 4.7 through 4 1. SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -30 - REV.3 • 10 -1 -02 Nozzle Application Chart (Continued) • - Nozzle lip • Minimum Nozzle • Mazimum,Flazard Nozzle Nozzle Nozzle Stamping - Hazard pimensions Quantity Heights Part No. Flow No. • • • Griddle Longest Side (High Proximity) 1 . 30 - 50 in. 419341 260 - 48 in. (122 cm) (76 -127 cm) • • Area - 1440 sq. in. (perimeter (9290 sq. cm) located) . Longest Side (High Proximity) 1 30 - 50 in. 4193/2 290 30 in. (76 cm) (76 - 127 cm) Area - 720 sq. in. (center located) . (4645 sq. cm) Longest Side (High Proximity) 1 35 — 40 in. 419335/417332 1 N/1 NSS • 36 in. (91 cm) (89 -102 cm) • Area - 1080 sq. in. (perimeter located) V • . (6968 sq. cm) V • Longest Side 1 20 - 30 in. 419342 290 (Medium Proximity) ( 51 - 76 cm) 48 in. (122 cm) (perimeter Area - 1440 sq. in. located) . (9290 sq. cm) 2120 Longest Side (Low Proximity) 1 10 - 20 in. 419343 (25 - 51 cm) 48 in. (122 cm) Area -1440 sq. in. (perimeter (9290 sq. cm) located) 419336/417333 1 W/ 1 W SS Chain Broiler' Longest Side - 34 in. (86 cm) 2 10 - 26 in. - (25 - 66 cm) (Overhead Protection) Area 019 sq. in. ( Chain Broiler Length - 43 in. (109 cm) 2 1 - 3 in. 419335/417332 1 N/1 NSS (Horizontal Protection) Width - 31 in. (79 cm) (3 -8 cm) 41 8335/417332 1 Wt NSS Gas - Radiant Char - Broiler Longest Side - 36 in. (91 cm) 1 15 -40 In. 38 - 102 cm) Area - 864 sq. in. •- (5574 sq. cm) 419335/417332 1 N/1 NSS Electric Char - Broiler Longest Side - 34 in. (86 cm) 1 20 - 0 i cm) Area - 680 sq. in. (4388 sq. cm) 18 - 35 in. 419335/417332 1 W 1 NSS Lava -Rock Broiler Longest Side - 24 in. (61 cm) 1 46 - 89 cm) Area - 312 sq. in. ( (2013 sq. cm) Natural Charcoal Broiler 18 - 40 in. 419335/417332 1 N/1 NSS Longest Side - 24 in. (61 cm) 1 18 4 102 cm) Area - 288 sq. in. (1858 sq. cm) 0 in. 419338 3N - - 4 Lava -Rock or Natural Longest Side - 30 in. (76 cm) 1 14 14 4 102 cm) Charcoal Char - Broiler Area - 720 sq. in. (4645 sq. cm) • Minimum chain broiler exhaust opening —12 in. a 12 in. (31 on a 31 cm), and not less than 60% of internal broiler size • UL CA. J'1!U ULU Ucw. -.• • .-ate -- • =? . 10 -1 -02 REV.5 Nozzle Application Chart (Continued) Nozzle Tip Minimum Nozzle Stamping - Maximum Hazard Nozzle Nozzle Nozzle S tave in . n ^dons — Quan(lll LLCM Hazard 14 = 40 in. 419338 3N • Wood Fueled Char Broiler Longest - s Side � 720 in. (76 cm) 1 (36 -102 cm) (4645 sq. cm) 419334 1/2N • j Upright Broiler Length - 32.5 in. (82.5 cm) 2 - Width - 30 in. (76 cm) 419334 1/2N Salamander Length - 32.5 in. (82.5 cm) 2 - Broiler Width - 30 in. (76 cm) 260 Wok 14 in. - 30 in. (36 - 76 cm) 1 35-45 in.. 419341 (89 - 114 cm) Diameter 3.75 - 8.0 in. (9.5 - 20 cm) Deep 419335/417332 1 W 1 NSS 30 - 40 in. 11 in. - 24 in. (28 - 61 cm) (89 - 102 cm) Diameter 3.0- 6.0in. (8- 15.2 cm) Deep • SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -32 - REV. 4 10 -1 -02 FRY POT CENTERLINE N. SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL t ire IN: BI Dean Industries Gas Fryer, Model 2424 G11, 120,000 BTUIhr. 8I cm) 1 1/tl IN. (2.9 cm) Rating (2.9 cm) _,I1 ,W NOZZLE OR 1100 This specialized gas fryer can be protected with a combination of 6 (15 290 NOZZLE ---0- - 11111 a 290 nozzle (Part No. 419342) and a 1W nozzle (Part No. (I5 cm) _ ► 419336) (or 1100) for low proximity (7 3/4 - 8 in. nozzle height f only) and two (2) 230 nozzles, Part No. 419339, for high proximity AIM POINT 1 I 7 y <- 8 I ONLY I t TOP OF VAT 1 (19.7 -20.3 cm) (45 in. nozzle height only). ! L - The maximum dimension of the fry pot is 24 in. x 24 in. (61 x 61 cm). LOW PROXIMITY v yd - e IN. NOZZLE MEXG11r) 03a282 ► Nozzles must be positioned and aimed as shown in Figure 58. 2 1141N. NOTE: For low proximity protection, see Special Piping Layout in z 1/4 1N. ' 2 1/ IN 1 . , Figure 59. FRONT EDGE i OF FRY POT 230 NOZZLE i I (1 IN. c (53 cm) `( 45 IN. ONLY I (114cm) I TOP OF FRYER :. NM i. j AIM POINT , WM , L J HIGH PROXIMITY (45 IN. NOZZLE HEIGHT ONLY) Osm3 :c FIGURE 58 Dean Industries Model GTI Gas Fryer Special Piping Layout ► Section A (Tank to Hood Penetration) Piping Limitations Maximum Length: 30 Ft. (9.1 m) Section B (Hood Penetration to Nozzles) Piping Limitations Maximum Rise: 6 Ft. (1.8 m) 1. Piping configuration shall be as shown with ±1/4 in. tolerance Maximum Number of 90° Elbows: 7 on dimensions. Maximum Number of Tees: 0 2. All nozzles shall be at the same elevation. .r 3. Each pair of appliance nozzles shall be equally spaced from left -to -right centerline of fryer. 1 W (OR 1100) ► 290 TO 3 GALLON TANK 1 4010 0 / 1 W OR 1100) • 21/4 IN. 290 21 IN. (53 3 cm) Or (5 7 cm) SECTION A 2 1 /81N. 2 3/4 IN. 24 1N. (60.9 cm) - (5.4 cm) / cm) HOOD PENETRATION \ / 6. / . 1W (OR 1100) \ - ► / 21 IN. (53.3 cm) or 2 I/4 IN. f 290 IN. (60.9 cm) (5.7 cm) Y . (20 (20.9 9 c cm) 29 5/81N. t 290 (75.2 cm) 1w (OR 2 1/4 IN. 2 11/16 IN. 21 IN. (53.3 cm) or (5.7 cm) 0. (6.9 cm) 1100) l ior 24 IN. (60.9 cm) 2 1/4 IN. (5.7 cm) 0. SPECIFIC 5 9 SPECIFIC DISCHARGE PIPING FOR LOW PROXIMITY PROTECTION OF (4) FOUR DEAN INDUSTRIES MODEL Gil GAS FRYERS ma I OGV I IVI• ,• UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx741 -02 Page 3 f J SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued) l MACH 14 Far West Hospitality Products Gas Fryer, Model PAR -1 -20, Frymaster 14 KW — 208V Electric Fryer, Model 63000 BMW Rating Sei Seri specialized single vat elecVic fryer can be protected either. This specialized gas fryer can be - protected with a single, 290 with a single. 230 nozzle, Part No. 419339, located 27 in. to 47 in. Houle, Part No. 419342. (69 cm to 120 cm) above the top surface of the .fryer or with a sin - The maximum dimension 'of the fry pot is 21 in. x 21 in. (53 x gle 245 nozzle, Part No.'419340; located 20 in. to 27 in. (51. cm to 53 cm). 69 cm) above the to p surface of the fryer. • The 290 nozzle must be located on the front -to-rear centerline and Either Houle must be located anywhere along or within the • aimed at the center of the cooking surface. See Figure 60. perimeter of the cooking surface 'and aimed at the midpoint. See 412 IN. Figure 104. The maximum size of the fry pot (without drip board) (11.5 cm) is 133/4 in. x 163/4 in. (35 cm x 42.6 cm) and the maximum.size T ot__ of the cooking surface (with drip board) 13 314 in. x.20 7/8 in. (35 cm x 53 cm). The vat may be divided in half to make two split vats. 230 NOZZLE TIP OR 245 NOZZLE TIP ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN THE PERIMETER = OF THE CORKING SURFACE AND AIMED AT THE MIDPOINT. . 230 NOZZLE 14 IN. -- , i In /s 2 07/9 IN. (38 cm) 13 IN. (53 ail) MAXIMUM / L T m `` 230 NOZZLE 245 27 IN. -47 IN. BACK OF �� 1 NOZZLE 9 120 an) FRYER II / S (6 URF cm- AC OP 13 3/4 IN yJ I /,/ SURFACE (35 cm) I OF FRYER MAXIMUM I I . SIDE VIEW OF FRYER I I 1 245 NOZZLE I I 1 20 IN. -27 IN. I (51 cm -69 cm) I ABOVE TOP 290 NOZZLE I SURFACE OF SIDE TO SIDE CENTERLINE AN AIMED A CENTER OF COOKING AREA. )FROM I FRYER 1 r . Si ...•• • 16 3/4 IN. (42.6 cm) MAXIMUM 13IN FIGURE 61 14 IN. (33 cm) Opp. . 000° (36 cm) C FIGURE 60 • SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN • ULEX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -34 • REV. 5 10-1-02 • SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued) Nieco Broiler Model 940, 962 or 960 With Catalytic Converter ' Protection McDonald Fryer (Nozzle Heights of Less Than 20 In.) . • . • When the 245 nozzle is used to protect McDonald's fryers at NOTE: Nieco broilers without catalytic converters use standard chain broiler protection options. heights less than 20 in. (51 cm) above the top of.the fryer, the fol- lowing appliance and distribution piping rules shall apply: Certain models of the Nieco broiler (Models 940, 962, and 960). 1. Each McDonald's gas or electric fryer shall be protected by are equipped with a catalytic converter to comply with new clean r vat dimensions for air laws. Because of the converter, it is necessary to protect these one 245 nozzle t Part a 419340. s The fryer broilers in a special way. The guidelines for protecting these broil - one full vat or two spllit it vats ts shall not exceed 14 in. x 15 in. ers are as follows: (36 cm x 38 cm) without the dripboard and 14 in. x 21 in. (36 cm x 53 cm) with the dripboard.. - The maximum internal broiling area is 29 in. x 23.5 in. (74 cm The heat input rating of the fryer shall not exceed 122,000 x 60 cm). BTU/HR. . - An R -102 3- gallon system with a maximum of 6 flow numbers, The 245 nozzle shall be located 18 in. to 20 in. (46 cm to must be used for protection of each broiler, including plenum • 51 cm) above the top of the fryer vat, 2 in. to 2 1/4 in. (5 cm to and duct. 5.7 cm) to the right or left of the front -to -rear vat centerline, - Each individual broiler must be protected with a minimum of (2) and 0 to 31/4 in. (0 cm to 8 cm) forward of the right -to -left vat two 1 N nozzles, Part No. 419335. The nozzles must be locat- I. centerline, and aimed at the vat center point. See Figure 62. • ed as shown in Figure 63. REAR REAR — The broiler must be fitted with two 1 in. (2.5 cm) high agent bar VAT CE TO VAT CENTERLINE viers on the angled surface of the broiler. See Figure 106. I these have not been completed by the equipment supplier, they I must be added in the field. LEFT VAT • �� LEFT VAT NM CENTERLINE POINT (2) 1N NOZZLES _ PART NO. 58930 ,1. D 14,25 t 1 IN. - '; :: NOZZLE ::I � % 31/4 (38cm) LOCATION i •' 51 IN ZONES Wo ■ 2IN. 21N. 2 114 IN. 2 1/4 IN. ` ournomolommimmome =I 12 IN. TO 13 IN. LT:- - - - -- - t -1 (31 cmTO33cm) I `- FRONT < I - Cr: I L FIGURE 62 ". ` _ _ J OO7Z97 2. The distance between the start of the first branch line and the • , I °°0250 start of the last branch line shall not exceed 79 in. (201 cm). 3. The total length of all branch fines shall not exceed 162 in. • (412 cm). LOCATE NOZZLES 2 13!18 IN. (7.1 cm) ON 4. The 3 gallon agent tank shall be elevated above the connec EA SIDE OF BROILER CENTER LINE , tions between the supply and branch lines. ,`:" 5. The requirements of the following table shall not be exceeded: ' Duct Plenum Appliance 1 425 * I IN. • Supply Branch Branch Branch +mom.�— (36 ` Requirement Line Line Line Line i 0 _i Pipe Size 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. �j - Maximum Length 140 in. 67 in. 6 in. 42 in. r — � _ —' • (356 cm) (170 cm) (15 cm) (107 cm) Minimum Length 81 in. 4 in. 4 in. 17 in. - — e (206 cm) (10 cm) (10 cm) (43 cm) � ! Maximum 5 3 1 6 ` •• � ► M — . 9 90° Elbows ,� Maximum Tees 0 1 1 1 CO5774 Maximum Flow 11 2 1 2 ► FIGURE 63 Numbers Minimum Flow 5 0 0 1/2 Numbers _ U L I1UN IV U L EX. 3470 ULC CEx74 Page 4 -35 10-1-02 REV.3 IT SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued) Nieco Bro iler - M odel 9025 (Without Catalytic Converter) Nieco Broiler — Model 9025 (With Catalytic Converters) Two 2W nozzles, Part No. 419332. • Nozzle Ouantity/Type: (2) Two 2W nozzles, Part No. 419337. . Nozzle Quantity/Type : 2 ) • Nozzle Height: 12 in. (305 mm) above top of converter. See • Nozzle Height: 201/2 in. (521 mm) above top of appliance. See • Figure 64. • • Figure 65. • Nozzle Location: 3 in. (76 mm) back from front edge of con- • Nozzle Location: 6 1/2 in. (165 mm) back from front edge of _ verters, centered from right to left above each converter. See • appliance. See Figure 65. • Figure 64. • Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of each opening. See • Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of each converter. See ► Figure 65. • Figure 64. r I. 31N 1 f- 8112 IN IA r - (76 mm) ) I 0 1 1 IN ANN NNW . INII a SIDE VIEW SIDE VIEW (2) 2W NOZZLES (2) 2W NOZZLES i I CONVERTERS I 1 12 IN. I 1 ( mm) 18.20 1/2 IN I • i (457.521 mm) MM. 11.111111111111 ► 1 1 1 TER CENTER CENTER LINE LINE • O F OF CONVERTER CONVERTER CENTERLINE CENTERLINE • OF OPENING OF OPENING FRONT VIEW FRONT VIEW FIGURE 64 FIGURE 65 031.354 ...ass I . . • SECTION !V — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -36 REV. 2 10 -1 -02 �! SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued) Nieco Broiler — Model 9025 (With Engelhard Converter) • Nozzle Quantity/Type: (2) Two 2W nozzles, Part No. 419337. ►• Nozzle Height: 18 in. (457 mm) above top of appliance. See Figure 66. • Nozzle Location: 6 1/2 in. (165 mm) back from front edge of appliance. See Figure 66. • Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of each broiler opening. • See Figure 66. 61/21N (165 mm) ►s 1 SIDE VIEW I I I 181N (457 mm) FRONT VIEW FIGURE 66 • wasm r ,t'i1 !UN IV .r. --....... UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -37 10 -1 -02 REV.3 r :. • SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued) c Converter Nieco Broiler — Model 9015 (With Catalytic Converters) Nleco Broiler — Model 9015 (Without Catalytl ) • Nozzle Quantity/Type: (2) Two 2W nozzles, Part No. 419337. • Nozzle Quantity/Type: (2) Two 2W nozzles, Part No. 419337. • Nozzle Height: 131/2 in. (343 mm) above top of converter. See • Nozzle Height: 20 in. (508 mm) above top of appliance. See • • Figure 67. Figure 68. • Nozzle Location: 1 1/2 in. (38 mm) back from front edge of con- • NozzlLocation: gure 1/2 i Figure n (165 mm) back from front edge of centered from right to left above each converter. See • N Aiming Point for Large Chamber: Aimed at center of • Figure 67. • o • Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of each converter. See • opening. See Figure 68. • Figure 67. • Nozzle Aiming Point for Small Chamber: Nozzle to be locat- ed 12 in. (305 mm) over from large chamber nozzle. til 1_ , I i 1 12 IN 1 / I 1 IN mm 11111111 I I SIDE VIEW SIDE VIEW (2) 2W NOZZLES �_ . + ` (2) 2W NOZZLES CONVERTERS . . I 13 1rz IN (343 mm) ( 12 IN 305 mm) --t_ 201N I (508 mm) 1 y t CENTERLINE OF FRONT VIEW LARGE OPENING FRONT VIEW • FIGURE 67 °0°'°' FIGURE 68 • moo , 4 . SECTION W — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-38 REV. 4 10-1-02 • SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued) Marshall Alr — Model 2001 BK Multi- Chamber Broiler • Nozzle Ouantityfrype: (2) Two 1W nozzles, Part No. 419347. • Nozzle Location: Front nozzle tip must be located 14 in. direct- ly above the appliance, aligned with the front face and centerline of the catalytic converter. The aim point is 4 in. forward of the front edge of the converter on the centerline. The rear nozzle tip is a mirror image of the front. The rear noz- zle is located 14 in. vertically above the appliance, aligned with the "rear" face and centerline of the catalytic converter. The aim point is 4 in. behind the °rear" edge of the converter on the cen- terline. • System Limitation: Maximum of 5 flows for a 3.0 gallon sys- tem: Remaining flow points available may be used to protect other hazards. CENTERED ON CONVERTER CONVERTER TWO 1W NOZZLES 1 o FRONT VIEW NOZZLE ALIGNED WITH FRONT OF CONVERTER NOZZLE ALIGNED WITH NOZZLE ALIGNED WITH BACK FRONT OF CONVERTER, OF CONVERTER, AIMED AIMED 4 I . (102 mm) BACK 4 I . (102 mm) FORWARD 1W 1 W NOZZLE NILE f 4 14 IN. 14 IN. (3513 mm) IT 4 IN. (3513 mm) • (102 mm) I• 4 0 •�e� ooa,e• SIDE VIEW • FIGURE 69 • UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -39 10.1 -02 REV.3 . /r .` SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued) Grease Grabber- 80*"AlWo Stage Filtration System The Grease Grabber-80 Two Stage. Filtration System consists of two components: The primary filter (The Grease -X Tractor) and the secondary filter (The Grease Grabber -80). The protection required for this application is the same as the stan- dard plenum/filter protection: One (1) 1N Nozzle, Part No. 419335, protecting 10 (3.1 m) linear feet of plenum length by 4 ft. (1.2 m) of plenum chamber depth (width), positioned 2 -4 in. (5 -10 cm) from peak of secondary filter. See Figure 70. 4FT.(12m) _� MAXIMUM SECONDARY FILTER 1.7 "'mar' 1N NOZZLE PRIMARY `` FILTER • / ` 2dI (5-10 cm) • A NOTE: TWO NOZZLES MUST BE UTIUZED FOR V -BANK FILTER ARRANGEMENT. FIGURE 70 00652e SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN e , UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -40 - REV. 2 10 -1 -02 TANK AND CARTRIDGE REQUIREMENTS ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT GAS LINE REQUIR_ EMENTS Once the hazard analysis is completed and the total nozzle flow This section contains the guidelines for installing the actuation and numbers are established, the quantity and size of agent tanks and expellant gas lines between the regulated release mechanism reg- cartridges needed to supply the nozzles with the proper volumes ulator, each regulated actuator regulator; and each agent tank. of agent at the proper flow rates can be determined. For cartridges These limitations should be considered when selecting the corn- used in the .regulated release mechanism, flow capacities, tank ponent mounting locations. quantities and sizes, and regulated release cartridge options are Actuation Gas Line - 6 to 8• Tanks Maximum given in the table below. • 8 Tank maximum reflects the utilization of 3 tank regulated actuators Total Quantity and Regulated Release 1. Use only 1/4 in. Schedule 40 black iron, hot dipped galva Nu w Size Cartridge Options nized, chrome - plated, or stainless steel pipe and fittings. Numbers' Tank(s) Nitrogen Carbon Dioxide • 1 — 5 (1) 1.5 Gallon LT -20-R 101 -10 2. The actuation gas line piping is installed from the regulated release mechanism to each regulated actuator connected 6 — 11 (1) 3.0 Gallon LT -30-R 101-20 within the system. The total length of the actuation gas line 11 — 16 (1) 1.5 Gallon Double 101 -30 from the regulated release assembly to the regulated actuator (1) 3.0 Gallon assembly(ies) must not exceed 20 ft. (6 m) when using an • LT -20 -R, an LT-30-R nitrogen cartridge, or a 101 -10 or a 101- • 16 — 22 (2) 3.0 Gallon Double 101-30.— • 20 carbon dioxide cartridge. See Figure 71. When one or more regulated actuators are used, the following tank and cartridge combinations apply for each regulated actuator: Regulated Actuator Regulated Actuator Tank(s) Cartridge (1) 1.5 Gallon LT-20-R or 101 -10 (1) 3.0 Gallon LT-30-R or 101 -20 (1) 1.5 Gallon and LT-A- 101 -30 or 101 -30" or • (1) 3.0 Gallon double tank (2) 3.0 Gallon LT-A-101-30 or 101 -30" or . double tank - For exceptions to maximum flow numbers. see Distribution Piping Requirements for 1.5 gal. Ion and 3.0 gallon systems in this Section. • -• The 101.30 cartridge can not be used when (2) two 3 0 gallon tanks are manlidded together.) For higher total flow numbers (23 to 110), multiple cartridges and regulated actuators are required as shown in the System Selection Guide in Section IX — Appendix. x REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY EXPELLANT GAS LINES NOT INCLUDED IN ACTUATION GAS LINE LENGTH TOTALS REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY ACTUATION GAS LINE WITH AN LT -20-R. LT -30 -R. 101 -10 OR 101-20 CARTRIDGE MAXIMUM LENGTH OF 20 FT. (B m). 1 MAXIMUM NO. OF FITTINGS 9 eil&s.----- REGULATED ACTUATOR • ASSEMBLY _ '�) •ANSUL AUTOMAN' .•. v REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY lri ./ 0 FIGURE 71 5 . UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -41 10 -1 -02 REV.2 ACTUATION AND EXPELLENT GAS LINE REQUIREMENTS (Continued) 2. The actuation gas line piping is installed from the 101 remote mechanical release to each R -102 regulated actuator assem- Actuation Gas Line — 6 to 8• Tanks Maximum (Continued) bly. The total length of the actuation gas line from the remote 3. If an expellant gas line is connected to the regulated release mechanical release to the regulated actuator assemblies must assembly along with an actuation gas line, the total combined not exceed 100 ft. (30.5 m). length of the actuation and expellant gas line must not A combined total of 20 elbows and 9 tees ma be used exceed 30 ft. (9 m) when using a'double -tank' nitrogen car- 3. A these lines. Two 45° elbows equal one 90° y b e a See • • fridge or a LT-A-101-30 nitrogen cartridge or a 101 -30 carbon • Figure 73. • dioxide cartridge. See Figure 72. may be used in these lines, f• 4. Use .only a 101-10 carbon dioxide cartridge in the 101 remote 4. A combined total of nine fittings ay mechanical release. eight 90° elbows and one tee. Two 45° elbows equal one 90 elbow. 5. A safety vent relief valve (Part No. 15677) is required in the actuation gas line to relieve residual pressure after actuation. Actuation Gas Line —10 to 15• Tanks Maximum • 15 Tank maximum reflects the utilization of 3 tank regulated actuators 1. Use only 1/4 in. Schedule 40 black iron, hot - dipped galva- nized, chrome - plated, or stainless steel pipe and fittings. NOTE: Stainless steel hose and fittings can also be used. See Component Section for detailed information. ACTUATOR AND EXPELLANT GAS UNES i WITH A - DOUBLE TANK CARTRIDGE • OR A 101.30 CARTRIDGE OR ALT- A-101.30 CARTRIDGE MAXIMUM COMBINED LENGTH - 30 FT. (9 m) MAXIMUM COMBINED FITTINGS - 9 :�, � 1 1� 7 1 R EGULATED ' ACTUATOR I ASSEMBLY REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY EXPELLANT GAS LINES NOT INCLUDED IN COMBINED TOTALS ^ REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY 'ANS AUTOMA R EGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY FIGURE 72 000262 20 ELBOWS 9TEESMAXIMUM MAXIMUM SAFETY EXPELLANT 1!4 IN. ACTUATION LINE - RELIEF VALVE GAS UNE 100 FT. (30.5 m) MAXIMUM • - mpti •A .• 4 . --------.----. .• -- - l I I 1 111 I _ +I r `' I110. _ _ — 1+10( III I 0 I 0 Lt I l ill. i 1 ❑ l , ,. II ' r F- — tt e El —. 11 1 1 l t 1 I 1. ch I th 1 1 I t MAXIMUM OF FIVE REMOTE RELEASE REGULATED ACTUATOR AGENT TANK REGULATED ACTUATORS MECHANISMS WITH TANK (PART NO. 32381) 5 MAXIMUM FIGURE 73 cum • SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN ' UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -42 REV. 3 10 -1-02 ACTUATION AND EXPELLENT GAS LINE REQUIREMENTS (Continued) 2. A combined total of nine fittings may be used in these lines, Expellant Gas Line • i eight 90° elbows and one tee. Two 45° elbows equal one 90° elbow. 1. The expellant gas line piping is installed from the regulated regulated 3. If two tanks are connected to the regulated release assembly release egulated actuator double and multiple tank systems, and in a multiple tank system arrangement, the total combined from the regulated actuator assembly in multiple -tank sys- length of the actuation and expellant gas lines must not terns. The expellant gas line is the piping between the regula- exceed 30 ft. (9 m) when using a "double -tank" nitrogen car - tor and f the tank-enclosure/tank-bracket lant gas li from assembly. The total ► tridge, an LT -A- 101 -30 nitrogen cartridge; or a 101 -30 carbon Length of the expellant gas line from m the regulated releasse e ► dioxide cartridge. See Figure 72. ' mechanism or each regulated actuator assembly must not exceed 30 ft. (9 m) when using a "double -tank" cartridge, an DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS • LT-A- 101 -30 Cartridge, or a 101 -30 Cartridge. See Figures 74 • and 75. Once the nozzle placement and quantity of tanks has been deter- mined, it is then necessary to determine the piping configurations EXPELLANT GAS LINE between the tank adaptor and each discharge nozzle. This section MAXIMUM NO. OF FITTINGS TO G FT S - 9 (9 9 contains the guidelines and limitations for designing the distribu- MAXIMUM NO. tion piping so that the liquid agent will discharge from the nozzles at a proper flow rate. These limitations should also be referred to I gwhen selecting the mounting location for the regulated release mechanism and agent tank. General Piping Requirements 1. All R -102 system piping is straight line. Therefore, the need for i critical lengths and balancing is minimized. 2 Two 45° elbows count as one 90° elbow. 3. Each branch line includes the tee or elbow leading to it, and all fittings within the branch line itself. •A NSUL AUTOMAN REGULATED RELEASE 4. The minimum piping length of Schedule 40, 3/8 in. pipe from ASSEMBLY the tank outlet to any nozzle protecting a range, fryer, or wok must be 6 ft. (1.8 m). 5. Pipe lengths are measured from center of fitting to center of . FIGURE 74 I. fitting. See Figure 76. 00077" r CENTER TO CENTER EXPELLANT GAS LINE MAXIMUM LENGTH - 30 FT. (9 m), - _ -:f MAXIMUM NO OFFFI -9 (3Z ----4- 111 . FIGURE 76 0m77 6. All distribution piping must be Schedule 40 black iron, chrome- plated, or stainless steel. Do not use hot dipped galvanized pipe on the distribution piping. • 7. All threaded connections located in and above the protected I i' we area must be sealed with pipe tape. Tape should be applied to m ale threads only. Make certain tape does not extend.over the end of the thread, as this could cause possible blockage of the agent distribution. - 8. Before installing blow -off caps on nozzles, apply a small amount of Dow Corning No. 111 silicone grease across the opeing in the nozzle tip and also a small amount coating the R EGULATED ACTUATOR exterior of the blow -off cap. This will help keep cooking grease ASSEMBLY ■ from building up on the cap. FIGURE 75 ► °°0771 SECTION Iv -- •.• . •• • "•. •.•.10. 1. I UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -43 : 10 -1-02 REV.3 - DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued) .SUPPLY LINE Supply and Branch Line Identification • Line is defined as the length of pipe which runs from The R -102 distribution piping network is broken down into four The Supply specific pipe runs: the Supply Line; the Duct Branch Line, the agent tank outlet to the last branch line (whether a duct, appli- the Plenum Branch Line, and the. Appliance Branch Line. See ancepor plenum nu tees o heine). This is includes to th all supply line branch lines. . Figure 77. ► Figures 77 and 78. DUCT - BRANCH UNE toi h s SUPPLY LINE 41 ,.......... . APPUANCE PLENUM B BRANCH LINE BRANCH LINE NOTE: THIS IS A CONCEPTUAL DRAWING ONLY THIS IS NOT AN ACTUAL INSTALLATION FIGURE 77 _ END OF ODOM r t. SUPPLY LINE , � NOTE: THESE ARE E%AMPLES ONLY. OTHER CONFIGURATIONS CAN BE DESIGNED. - f + + . END OF • SUPPLY UNE END OF SUPPLY UNE • END OF ,,.•! f ' a SUPPLY LINE ' ' ; ' i V \ i SUPPLY (NOZZLES FOR PLENUM • LINE TEE PROTECTION) , ENO OF SUPPLY LINE 4/ , / /// / I , PLENUM (NOZZLES FOR SUPPLY PROTECTION) UNE TEE BRANCH [ UNEGANNO I T BRANCH $TART UNE AHEAD CANN A OT START AHEAD OF A SUPPLY LINE TEE I SUPPLY UNE TEE FIGURE 78 0007813 ■ SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx /47 Page 4-:4 REV. 3 10 -1 -02 - DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Supply and Branch Line Identification (Continued) PLENUM BRANCH LINE ' NOTICE " The Plenum Branch Line is defined as the length. of pipe which Branch lines cannot start ahea of a supply line runs from the supply line to the plenum nozzle(s). This includes all branch line fittings as well as the tee or elbow used to start the • tee. • branch line. See Figures 77 and 80. DUCT BRANCH LINE , _4 The Duct Branch Line is defined as the length of pipe which runs �, from the supply line to the duct nozzle(s). This includes all branch ••* line fittings as well as the tee or elbow used to start the branch line. . - .� ►See Figures 78 and 79. ' -- ' " ...c � 1 PLE NUM BRANCH LINE I (TEE INCLUDED) I DUCT BRANCH LINE I PLENUM BRANCH LINE I (ELBOW INCLUDED) -� (TEE INCLUDED) ' •, •, t [ •' $ DUCT BRANCH LINE (TEE INCLUDED) . / ,•� ., �� .J' "•i.•, 1 FIGURE 80 0007!7 ■ " ' v DUCT BRANCH LINE (TEES INCLUDED) APPLIANCE BRANCH LINE `-•J The Appliance Branch Line is defined as the length of pipe which runs from the supply line to the appliance nozzle(s). This includes . all branch line fittings as well as the tee or elbow used to start the [A:1 .......4 •,"•y ■ branch line. See Figures 78 and 81. -1• I " I .c iliii U I I I APPLIANCE BRANCH LINES o (TEES INCLUDED) FIGURE 79 ► 0007!1 FIGURE 81 ► ODD7N r S T'UN w ... • _••• ..wr' 1 F UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-45 10-1 -02 REV.1 • START of LAST ' DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued) BRANCH LINE Distribution Piping Requirements –1.5 Gallon System sTART, OF FI RST BRANCH UNE ' DUCT PLENUM, AND APPLIANCE PROTECTION I 1. This option allows for .duct protection, plenum protection, • appliance protection, or any combination. . SUPPLY UNE TEE \ TOTAL LENGTH • 2. When using a combination of plenum and duct protection only, • EE MUST NOT EXCEED B FT. I. only one duct nozzle, either a 1W, 1100, or a 2W, may be ( . EXCE used. 3. All distribution piping, supply and branch, must be 3/8 in. Schedule 40 black iron, chrome - plated, or stainless steel. 4. Each 1.5 gallon tank allows a maximum of five flow numbers.' START t O > 4 LAST 5. The pipe length between the start of the first branch line and BRANCH T LA the start of the last branch line must not exceed 8 ft. (2.4 m). 0 START OF FIRST • When the supply 82 split, lib • FIGURE line is s the c ombined length of both BRANCH UNE legs of the supply line (start of first branch line to start of last ► ao • branch line) must not exceed 8 ft. (2.4 m). See Figure 82. om • 6. The combined length of all branch lines must not exceed 22 ft. ,w NOZZLE • (6.7 m). See Figure 83. 7. The requirements of the following table must not be exceeded: 4— IN NOZZLE I V 0 IN NOZZLE COMBINED LENGTH MUST (BRANCH LINES IN BOLD) NOT EXCEED 22 FT. (6.7 m) FIGURE 83 ► oo>es Duct P lenum Appliance .Requirements 5.1.112121X Branch Line aranch Line Branch Line Pipe Size 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 6 ft. 4 ft. 10 ft. 40 ft. Maximum Length 1.8 m (12.2 m) ( ) (1.2 m) (3 m) 6 ft. 4 ft. 2 ft. 2 ft. Maximum Rise (1.8 m) (1.2 m) (.6 m) (.6 m) • Maximum 90° Elbow 9 4 4 6 Maximum Tees 1 1 2 3 2 3 Maximum Flow Numbers 5' 2 . ., • Emil:mone: 1. six (6) flow numbers are alowed when a duct branch line is the last branch etwork and no 1 N nooks Part No 56930, are used to protect woks or9 1 10 h line on the piping 2. Six (6) flow numbers are allowed when six (6) IN nozzles. Part No. 56930. are used and none of the nozzles are used to protect woks and griddles. NOTE: Only ( 5 ) numbers are allowed it a IN nozzle is used tar wok or griddle protection. e 3. Six (6) Now numbers are allowed when only two (2) 3N nozzles. Part No. 76782. are used. l ' " !" . , . SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL, EX. 3470 ULC CExl4! Page 4-46 REV. 3 10 -1 -02 . - DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Distribution Piping Requirements — 3.0 Gallon System • 1: The maximum length between the start of the first branch line SUPPLY --......_ and the start of the last branch line must not exceed 24 ft. TEE (7.3 m). When the supply line is split, the combined total of , both legs of the supply line (from the start of the first branch - , line to the start of the last branch line) must not exceed 24 ft. R • (7.3 m). See Figure 84. COMBINED LENGTH OF \ cones 2. The total length of all branch lines must not exceed 36 ft. BOTH LEGS OF SUPPLY MUST NOT 3 BRANCH UNES • (10.9 m). See Figure 84. EXCEED 24 FT. (7.3 m) 3. Use a 3/8 in. union to connect the tank adaptor to the 3/8 in. supply line. 4. A maximum of two nozzles are allowed per duct branch line. IN NOZZLE 2W NOZZLE --.......- 5. The requirements of the following table must not be exceeded: IN NOZZLE • Il C::13 . . 230 NOZZLE / O 245 NOZZLE 1/2N NOZZLE (BRANCH LINE IN BOLD) OM= z COMBINED LENGTH MUST • NOT EXCEED 38 FT. (10.g m) ► FIGURE 84 Duct Plenum Appliance Req Supply Line Branch Line Branch Line Branch Line Pipe Size 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. Maximum Length 40 ft. 8 ft. 4 ft. 12 ft. (12.2 m) (2.4 m) (1.2 m) (3.7 m) Maximum Rise 6 ft. 4 ft. 2 ft. 2 ft. (1.8 m) (1.2 m) (:6 m) (.6 m) Maximum 90° 9 4 4 6 Elbows Maximum Tees 1 2 2 4 Maximum Flow 11 ' 4 2 4 _ Numbers 'Exceptions: - I. Twelve (12) flow numbers are allowed in any one tank not containing two -lbw appliance nozzles, and/or, a IN nozzle for wok or griddle protection, and/or, a IF nozzle tor range protection, and/or, a 3N nozzle for fryer protection. • 2. Twelve (12) flow numbers are allowed in any one tank for hood and duct protection. 3. Twelve (12) flow numbers are allowed wIN any one tank using only two-flow appliance nozzles. 4. Twelve (12) flow numbers are allowed with any one tank using only three -flow appliance nozzles Special Instructions: I. Twelve (12) flow numbers are allowed when four (4) Dean Industries GTI Gas Fryers are protected at low proximity as shown in Figure 101 on Page 4 -52 The discharge piping must be as shown in Figure 102 on Page 4.52. 2. For certain McDonald's applications, 11.5 flow numbers are allowed when using a combination of one (1) 2W duct nozzle, one (1) 1/2N electrostatic precipitator nozzle, one (1) IN plenum nozzle, and four (4) two -flaw appliance nozzles. Contact Ansul Applications Engineering Department for additional information. r , . SECTION IV — 1 . UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx74 Page 447 10-1-02 REV. 2 • 4 t DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued) LENGTH OF PIPING MUST NOT EXCEED 24 FT. Distribution . Piping Requirements --. 6.0 Gallon Mantfolded (7.3 m) FROM START OF FIRST BRANCH LINE System . . . . • TO START OF LAST BRANCH UNE • . • . s• As an option to piping two (2) 3.0 gallon tanks separately, twO (2) • 3.0 gallon tanks can be manifolded together to share a common • • . . agent distribution line. Only (2) 3.0"gallon tanks connected to the • • ' - same regulator can be manifolded. The following requirements 4 • . must be met when manifotding: • . • 1. All piping must be 3/8 in. Schedule 40. SI im, START OF LAST n BRANCH LINE . . 4.10 CO l 2. See Figure 86 for tank connections. 3. The length of supply line piping between the start of the first branch line and the start of the last branch line must not P • • exceed 24 ft. (7.3 m). See Figure 85. When the supply line is split, the combined total of both legs of the supply line (from • • the start of the first branch line to the start of the last branch line) must not exceed 24 ft. (7.3 m). • 2W. . NOZZLES N., I N 4. The combined length of all branch Ones must not exceed 36 ft. • NOZZLE • (10.9 m). See Figure 85. • 5. A maximum of 22 flow numbers are allowed. g I N 6. The requirements of the following table must not be exceeded. NOZZLE IN . NOZZLE NOZZLE 1 41.6.. 1N 44//o "I19 0 0, 4 2 RCM/ APPUANCE NOZZLE (BRANCH LINES IN BOLD) COMBINED LENGTH MUST NOT EXCEED 36 FT (10.9 m) , FIGURE 85 CCO251 - Duct Plenum Appliance ,Fleauirements Suoplv Line Branch Li fkancia.0.-i g Branch Line .. . Pipe Size 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. Maximum Length 32 ft. aft. 4 ft. 12 ft. (9.7 m) (2.4 m) (1.2 m) (3.7 m) Maximum Rise 6 ft. 4 ft. 2 ft. 2 ft. (1.8 m) (1.2 m) (.6 m) (.6 m) Maximum 90° 8 4 . 4 6 Elbows Maximum Tees 2 2 2 4 Maximum Flow 22 4 2 4 . Numbers , - Ii;-- t. - • . • SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN a UI, EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-48 REV. 2 10 -1 -02 - DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Distribution Piping Requirements — 6.0 Gallon Manifolded When using the hose /grommet package, independent pipe runs System (Continued) ' -, can also be used with the regulated release assembly and the ► tank/enclosure assembly. See Figure 87. NOTE:.When .manifold- This configuration consists of two 3 gallon tanks. Both tanks are ing is not used, each of the two (2) 3 gallon tanks utiliie the piping connected to a common manifold tee and are pressurized from a i limitations'.• a single tank system. • single double tank (Part No. 73022) nitrogen cartridge in the regu- lated release assembly. See Figure 86. 3!B IN. BRANCH ‘;=Eii=\‘C=8‘ 3 IN. 3/B IN. SUPPLY SUPPLY SEE r. . USE HOSE/ NOTE �� HOSE/ GROMMET GROMMET PACKAGE ) 318 IN. 3/B IN BRANCH PACKAGE (PART NO hi, II SUPPLY TART NO. I. SEE q 418511) "1r� +I 418511) Y, NOTE I - -- - I A i � . � �I 3.0 3.0 I 3.0 GALLON 3.0 GALLON GALLON , GALLON TANK TANK TANK 1 TANK OR ' OR DOUBLE TANK 1.5 GALLON 15 GALLON NITROGEN TANK TANK CARTRIDGE OR LT- A- 101.3D CARTRIDGE - (REGULATED 3.0 GALLON REGULATED RELEASE ACTUATOR ONLY REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY OR DOUBLE TANK NITROGEN ASSEMBLY OR 3.0 GALLON REGULATED ■ REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY CARTRIDGE OR ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY LT -A- 101 -30 CARTRIDGE TANK/ENCLOSURE (REGULATED ACTUATOR ONLY) ASSEMBLY TANK/ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY ■ FIGURE 87 mom NOFE I: THE PIPE CONNECTION FROM TANK CENTER TO TANK CENTER CANNOT EXCEEDS- la IN. (21.5 cm). ALSO, OEM RELEASE/BRACKET ASSEMBLY CAN BE UTILIZED WHEN MANIFOLDING 3 0 GALLON TANK. NOTE 2: ONLY 3 GALLON TANKS CAN BE MANIFOLDED. D. FIGURE 86 F act.. t Pam s • - - - _._. - - -. • UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -49 10.1 -02 REV.2 . Y ' DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued) • Distribution Piping Requirements - 9.0 Gallon System \i=V=Vi=zA---\ • ► This optional configuration consists only of three 3- gallon tanks, all • pressurized from a single double -tank nitrogen cartridge with • expellant gas hoses connected as, shown in Figure 88. Tanks No. 1 and No. 2 must be connected directly to the regulator with sepa- rate expellant gas hoses and Tank No.•3 must be connected to • e. Tank No. 2 with a third expellant gas hose as shown in Figure 88. Each tank must be connected to an independent distribution pip- ► ing network as shown in Figure 88. Distribution piping require- I ments for each network must be as follows: 1. The maximum length between the start of the first branch line C S I - firm , == �° ti I and the start of the last branch line must. not exceed 24 ft. _ ' (7.3 m). When the supply line is split, the combined total of both legs of the supply line (from the start of the first branch line to the start of the last branch line) must not exceed 24 ft. • (7.3 m). See Figure 84. ❑ ❑ a 2. The total length of all branch lines must not exceed 36 ft. i 3cDON c 3 G ° ALL • (10.9 m). See Figure 84. i TANK TANK TANK 3. Use a 3/8 in. union to connect the tank adaptor to the 3/8 in. i N0.3 N0.2 NO.1 supply line. 4. A maximum of two nozzles are allowed per duct branch line. j _ __ -L- 5. When using this 9.0 gallon system configuration, no mans- TWO TANK ENCLOSURE 3 GALLON REGULATED DOUBLE TANK NITROGEN folding of distribution piping is allowed. ASSEMBLY PART NO. RELEASE ASSEMBLY. CARTRIDGE OR 6. When an ANSUL AU 419604 (INCLUDES (2) OR 3 GALLON LT -A- 101 -30 CARTRIDGE Regulated Release is utilized in HOSES AND (2) REGULATED ACTUATOR (REGULATED ACTUATOR this configuration, additional regulator actuators cannot be GROMMETS) ASSEMBLY ONLY) • used. FIGURE 88 • 7. Only 3 gallon tanks can be utilized in this configuration. I 8. The requirements of the following table must not be exceeded • for each 3 gallon tank: Appliance Duct Plenum Supply Line Branch Line Bra .ire Branch Line Requirements p y 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. Pipe Size 12 h 40 ft. 8 ft. 4 ft. Maximum Length 2 4 m (12.2 m) ( ) (1.2 m) (3.7 m) 6 ft. 4 ft. 2 ft. 2 ft. • Maximum Rise (.6 m) (1.8 m) (1.2 m) (.6 m) (• Maximum 90° 9 4 4 6 Elbows 4 Maximum Tees 1 2 2 Maximum Flow 11• 4 . 2 4 Numbers 'Exceptions: 1. Twelve (12) flow numbers are allowed in any tank not containing two-flow appliance nozzles. and/or. a t N nozzle for wok or griddle protection. and/or, a IF nozzle for range protec- tion. and/or, a 3N nozzle for fryer protection. 2. Twelve (12) How numbers are allowed with any one tank using only two-flow appliance nozzles. ar ■ 3. Twelve (12) Ilow numbers e allowed with any one tank using only three -flow appliance zzl Special Instructions: as shown in Figure 58 on Page 4 -32, the discharge piping must be as shown in Figure 59 on - s• 1. When four (4) Dean Industries GTI Gas Fryers are protected at low proximity ► Page 4.32. 2. For certain McDonald's applications, I1.5 flow numbers are dewed when using a combination of one (1) 2W duct nozzle. one (1) 1/ZN electrostatic precipitator nozzle. one (1) 1N plenum nozzle, and four (4) two-flow appliance nozzles. Contact Maul Applications Engineering Department for additional information. SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN t UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -50 REV. 2 10 -1 -02 DETECTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS - Once the fire suppression system design has been determined, a Detector Placement Requirements detection system design must be completed. This section contains EXHAU DUCTS guidelines and limitations for detection /system installation. Each exhaust duct must have at least one detector installed in the Detector identification duct entrance, located in the airstream of the cooking vapors, or. at . • a maximum of 20 ft. (6.1 m) into the duct opening. See Figure 89. The two types of detectors are distinguished from each other by their location in the detection system. • • 1. The Terminal Detector (Part No. 56838, 15375, or 417368) is ` the last in a series of detectors, or the only detector used in a I single- detector system. This detector is thus named because -.-...--_:. y _ it is at the point at which the wire rope ends, or °terminates' I I 2. A Series Detector (Part No. 56837, 15373, or 417369) is any • . detector located in -line between the regulated release mech- anism and the terminal detector.. 20 Fr. to m) MAX Detector/Pulley Elbow Quantity The quantity of detectors used in the system will vary depending on the style of detector used. 1. Conduit runs, pulley elbows, and number of detectors per sys- tem must be within the approved system guidelines. The fol- IIIIwI/'i, lowing requirements must not be exceeded: . Maximum Maximum Maximum _ _ _ _. Number of Number of Length of .1/2 Detectors Elbows in. Conduit ' FIGURE 89 per System per System per System NOTICE Clip on Style 12 18 125 ft. (38.1 m) When gas appliances are used and the flue ' =� Detector gases from the burner are exhausted into the :` =' Hinge Style 5 8 103 ft. (31.3 m) duct, the detector must be kept out of the air Detector stream of these exhaust gases. These gases • can be very hot and could actuate the system '• Scissors Style 15 20 150 ft. (45.7 m) unnecessarily. Detector Duct openings that are long and narrow or large 2. If hinge style detectors are mixed in a system with either clip- enough to require multiple duct nozzles may on.br scissor style, 4 series and 1 terminal is the maximum require additional detectors. number allowed. If clip -on style are mixed with scissor style, the maximum allowed is 11 series and 1 terminal. ELECTROSTATIC PRECIPITATOR NOTICE If an electrostatic precipitator is located at or near the base of the When using the "clip -on" style detector, the ter- exhaust duct, it is necessary to locate a detector below the pre - minal detector may use the "hinged" style cipitator, at the base of the duct, and also locate one in the duct, mounting bracket with the "clip -on" style linkage. • just above the precipitator. See Figure 90. This is only allowed with the terminal detector. When installing the detector bracket and system conduit, make No other linkages are allowed to be mixed certain they do not interfere with the operation of the precipitator. • with other brackets. When using this option, the total number of "clip -on" style detectors (11 series and 1 terminal) is still allowed. 3. If hinge style detectors are mixed in a system with either clip - on or scissor style, the maximum length of wire rope must not exceed 103 ft. (31.4 m) and the maximum number of pulley - elbows must not exceed 8.1f clip -on style are mixed with scis- II sor style, the maximum length of wire rope must not exceed 125 ft. (3.81 m) and the maximum number of pulley elbows must not exceed 18. 4. If the hazard requires more than 15 detectors, up to five 101 r___/Aill Remote Releases (Part No. 12029) can be used for system actuation. Each 101 remote release allows the use of a maxi- mum of 15 "scissor" style detectors (14 series and 1 terminal) for a total of 75 detectors if needed. FIGURE 90 r _ '.l"t1. I 1014 Iv — `•'"•`'m JI'S UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -51 10 -1 -02 REV.2 ,. 3 ` Detector Replacement Requirements (Continued) COOKING APPLIANCES • If the cooking appliance Is located under an exhaust duct where a detector has been mounted, it is normally not necessary to utilize another detector for that cooking appliance, provided the detector • is not more than 12 in. (30 cm) into the duct. See Figure•91. . willi L_I_IHNNH ___ . . 1 -----. [1:1i] . I ,_ _ APPUANCE APPLIANCE APPUANCE APPLIANCE REQUIRES COVERED BY COVERED BY REQUIRES FIGURE 92 SEPARATE DETECTOR DETECTOR SEPARATE 1:00270 DETECTOR UNDER DUCT UNDER DUCT DETECTOR • Fusible Link Selection • • FIGURE 91 When possible, temperature readings should be taken at each • ° detector location to determine correct fusible link temperature-rat - ing. Temperature can be recorded using either a maximum regis- Each cooking appliance with a continuous cooking surface not tering thermometer, Part No. 15240, temperature tape or any other exceeding 48 in. x 48 in. (122 x 122 cm) can be protected by a min- accurate thermometer. ' imam of one detector. Cooking appliances with a continuous cook- ing surface exceeding 48 in. x 48 in. can be protected by at least 0 *=2 )) 0 one detector per 48 In. x 48 In. cooking area. Detectors used for cooking appliances must be located within the perimeter of the mew.• protected appliance toward the exhaust duct side of the appliance. • The detector should be located in the air stream of the appliance - _ TEMPERATURE RATING STAMPED ON FUSIBLE to enhance system response time. `_ LINK Boar Detection Line Requiremen 0 c===1 CONDUIT • Ri conduit or 1/2 inch EMT thin -wall conduit may be used. °°°+ro S mn+ Standard steel conduit fittings (compression type are recommend- K STYLE 500 •F ML L STYLE TYL ONLY ed) must be employed to properly install the detection system. All conduit or pipe must be firmly supported. When using pipe, make FIGURE 93 certain that all ends are carefully reamed, deburred and blown ► • clear of chips and scale before assembly. Select correct UL Listed fusible link(s) for installation in detector(s) NOTICE according to the temperature condition chart below: The conduit offset can be used at the top or bot- Temperature To Be Used Where tom of the regulated release to change direction Fusible Link Rating Temperature Does of the conduit. The conduit offset cannot be Part NQ (See Figure 791 Not Exceed 415739 165 °F (74 °C) used with pulley tees. All other changes in direc- 74 °C 100 °F (38 °C) tion must be made by using Ansul approved pul- 415740 2 °F ( ° 150 °F (66 °C) ley elbows, Part Na 423254 or 415670. See 415741 280 °F (138 °C) 225 °F (107 °C) ► Figure 92. 415742 360 °F (182 °C) 290 °F (143 °C) 415743 450 °F (232 °C) 400 °F (204 °C) 56816 500 °F (260 °C) F i Q.. k . . .., . SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN '. ` UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -52 REV. 1 10 -1 -02 - • • MANUAL PULL STATION REQUIREMENTS Metal Stamped Style — Part No. 4835 or 54011 A remote manual pull station allows the R -102 system to be man- Parts that may be used for installation of a metal stamped remote ually operated at some point distant from the regulated release manual pull station are: assembly. The pull station should be in$talled at a maximum height Description Part No. of 60 in. (152 cm) and located in the path of exit. The pull station Remote Manual Pull Station Assembly* • 54011 is the only source of manual . actuation of the regulated release Remote Manual Pull Station Assembly 4835 - assembly. Pulley Elbow 423250 The total length of the cable used for each manual pull station with- Pulley Elbow • 415670 in a system must not exceed 150 ft. (46 m). Pulley Tee 427929 'Assembly Includes parts listed below: The maximum number of pulley elbows that may be used per pull 1/16" Stainless Steel Cable 50 ft. (15 m) 15821 station is 20. Oval Press -To -Crimp Sleeves 4596 One pulley tee, Part No. 427929, is allowed per system. Glass Break Rod (1) 4834 The maximum length of cable from the AUTOMAN to a pull station • is 150 ft. (45.7 m) with a maximum of 20 pulley elbows used per MECHANICAL GAS VALVE REQUIREMENTS side of the tee. As the tee is located farther from the AUTOMAN, An Ansul or Ansul approved mechanical gas shut -off valve system the 150 ft. (45.7 m) maximum must be observed but as pulley can be attached to the R -102 system. The system works both elbows are placed between the AUTOMAN and the tee, they must mechanically and pneumatically by use of an air cylinder located be deducted from the available pulley elbows (20) allowed on each inside the regulated release assembly. Upon actuation of the fire side. suppression system, a pneumatically- operated air cylinder assem- Example: If 10 pulley elbows are placed between the AUTOMAN bly will mechanically close the gas shut -off valve. and the pulley tee, the maximum available pulley elbows left for The total length of the cable for each mechanical gas valve must • use on each side of the tee is 10 per side. See Figure 94 for three not exceed 150 ft. (46 m). The maximum number of pulley elbows I different examples. (Note: Both must be gas valves or both must that may be used is 20 for each valve. . be pull stations. Mixing is not allowed.) One pulley tee (Part No. 427929) is allowed per system. TEE CLOSE TO AUTOMAN (EXAMPLE) The maximum length of cable from the AUTOMAN to a gas valve is PULLEY TEE 150 ft. (45.7 m) with a maximum of 20 pulley elbows used per side ,• of the tee. As the tee is located farther from the AUTOMAN, the 150 : (30 :1. 12 ft. (45.7 m) maximum must be observed but as pulley elbows are placed between the AUTOMAN and the tee, they must be deduct- ed from the available pulley elbows (20) allowed on each side. Example: If 10 pulley elbows are placed between the AUTOMAN AUTOMAN and the pulley tee, the maximum available pulley elbows left for GAS VALVE OR GAS VALVE OR MANUAL PULL MANUAL PULL • use on each side of the tee is 10 per side. See Figure 94 for three 149 FT (45.4 m) AND 20 PULLEY ELBOWS MAXIMUM different examples. PER EACH SIDE OF TEE Parts that may be used for installation of a Mechanical Gas Shut - TEE CLOSE TO GAS VALVES OR MANUAL. PULL (EXAMPLE) off Valve are: Description Part No. 12 IN 12 IN Gas Valve /Actuator 3/4 in. Assembly ( Ansul)" 55598 (305 mm) (305 mm) Gas Valve /Actuator 1 in. Assembly ( Ansul)' 55601 PULLEY TEE Gas Valve /Actuator 1 1/4 in. Assembly ( Ansul)" 55604 GAS VALVE OR GAS VALVE OR Gas Valve /Actuator 1 1/2 in. Assembly ( Ansul)' 55607 MANUAL PULL - MANUAL PULL. Gas Valve /Actuator 2 in. Assembly (Annul)' 55610 AUTOMAN Gas Valve /Actuator 2 1/2 in. Assembly (ASCO)" 25937 149 FT (45.4 m) AND 20 PULLEY ELBOWS BETWEEN Gas Valve /Actuator 3 in. Assembly (ASCO)" 25938 AUTOMAN AND TEE Pulley Elbow 423250 . Pulley Elbow 415670 TEE HALFWAY BETWEEN AUTOMAN AND GAS VALVES OR MANUAL PULL (EXAMPLE) Pulley Tee 427929 75 FT. (22.9 m) AND 10 PULLEY ELBOWS 1/16" Stainless Steel Cable 15821 or 50 ft. (15 m) or 500 ft. (152 m) roll 79653 - Oval Press -To -Crimp Sleeve 4596 75 FT. (22.9 m) AND 75 FT. (22.9 m) AND Stop Sleeve (2) 26317 — 10 PULLEY ELBOWS 10 PULLEY ELBOWS •Assembly includes parts lLSted below: 6 PULLEY TEE d Air Cylinder Assembly 15733 Air Cylinder 15521 AUTOMAN GAS VALVE OR GAS VALVE OR 15529 MANUAL PULL MANUAL PULL Tubing Assembly Copper Tubing, 1/8 in. 15525 15523 . FIGURE 94 Male Elbow 15522 coax Male Connector Machine Screw (2) 15421 Hex Nut (2) 15527 Lockwasher (2) 4141 Visual Inspection Seal (2) 197 • SECTION Iv — •P 1 ` 1 cm ucoiun UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -53 10 -1 -02 REV.1 . fr MECHANICAL GAS VALVE REQUIREMENTS (Continued) pescriglion Part No All valves above are UL listed and approved. They may be mount- Electric Solenoid Valve, 3/4 in. NPT' 13707 Solenoid Valve, 1 in. NPT" 13708 ed in any pion. temperat rre range of is 32 «F o 120 °Ambient 0 «C to operating 9 C). Electric Solenoid Valve, 1 1/2 in. NPT' 13709 The valves are not weatherproof and must be located indoors in Electric Solenoid Valve, 2 in. NPT' 13710 areas approved by the "authority having jurisdiction" Electric Solenoid Valve, 3 in. NPT' 17643 Manual Reset Relay (110 VAC) 14702 ELECTRICAL GAS VALVE REQUIREMENTS 'Valves are normally closed wire" de-energized. A UL Listed electrically- operated gas shut-off valve can be • ALARM INITIATING SWITCH REQUIREMENTS attached to the R -102 system to provide an electrical means of shutting off the gas line at a predetermined point. If an electric gas The Alarm Initiating Switch can be field mounted within the shut -off valve is used in the system it must be attached with both ANSUL AUTOMAN release. The switch must be used to close a an electric (snap - action) switch and a manual reset relay. For more supervised circuit to the building main fire alarm panel when the information on the types of electric (snap - action) switches, refer to ANSUL AUTOMAN release actuates. This action will signal the fire the Electrical Switch, Field Installation section. The manual reset alarm panel that there was a system actuation in the kitchen area. relay is reviewed in this section. The switch kit contains all necessary mounting components along with a mounting instruction sheet. All electrical connections should be performed by a QUAUFIED • ELECTRICIAN and in accordance with authority having The switch is rated 50 mA, 28VDC. jurisdiction. part No. rk+ccri t� ion The following is a brief explanation of how the R -102 system oper- • 428311 Alarm Initiating Switch Kit ates with an Electric Gas Shut -off Valve attached: ELECTRICAL SWITCH REQUIREMENTS With the regulated release cocked in the ready condition, the nor- mally closed contacts in the snap- action switch allow current to The electric (snap - action) switches for the R -102 system are spe- flow to the manual reset relay. With the relay coil energized, nor- cially designed to fit the regulated release assembly. The switches mally open contacts in the reset relay close, allowing the solenoid are intended for use with electric gas valves, alarms, contactors, in the gas valve to be energized. lights, contractor supplied electric power shut -off devices, and Once the R -102 system is activated, the normally closed contacts other electrical devices that are designed to shut off or turn on in the snap- action switch will open, de- energizing the reset relay. when the fire suppression system is actuated. (See Figures This will, in turn, open the contacts in the relay which will cause the 98 through 100 for reference.) . gas valve to become de- energized and close. Contractors shall supply "UL listed, enclosed industrial control The system must be re -armed and the "push to reset" button on equipment or magnetic switch having a rating matching that of the the reset relay must be operated to reopen the gas valve. cooking appliance, coil 110 VAC /60 Hz or 24 VAC /60 Hz." It is important to note that a power failure or an electrical power All electrical connections should be performed by a QUALIFIED interruption will cause the gas valve to close even though the sys- ELECTRICIAN and in accordance with authority having tern was not fired. jurisdiction. In either case, whether in a fired condition or when a power failure Electric (Snap- Action) Switches that may be field installed are: has occurred, the manual reset relay and electric gas shut -off Part No. Description valve must be reset to resume a normal operating condition. For 423878 One Switch Kit . resetting, refer to the "Recharge and Resetting Procedures" 423879 Two Switch Kit section In this manual. 423880 Three Switch Kit 423881 Four Switch Kit Approvals Each switch has a set of single -pole, double throw contacts rated Ansul gas valves listed in this section are UL listed and approved at 21 amp, 1 HP, 125, 250, 277 VAC or 2 HP, 250, 277 VAC. for 110 VAC. If more information is required, refer to the Gas and Oil Equipment List of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. under NOTE: A relay must be supplied by others if the equipment load 'Electrically Operated Valves Guide No. 440 A5" or consult Ansul exceeds the rated capacity of the switch. Incorporated, Marinette, Wisconsin 54143 -2542. Electrical wiring and equipment shall be installed in accordance If other gas valves are used, they shall be "UL listed electrically- with NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) or the requirements of the operated safety valves for natural or LP gas as required, of appro- authority having jurisdiction. priate pressure and temperature rating, 110 VAC /60 Hz" The infor- If a fire alarm system is provided, the fire extinguishing system mation on temperature and type of gas that the valves are suitable shall be connected to the alarm system in accordance with the for may be found in the Gas and Oil Equipment List of requirements of NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code, so that the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. under °Electrically Operated actuation of the extinguishing system will sound the fire alarm as Valves Guide No. 440 A5" well as provide the extinguishing function of the system. The electrically operated gas valve must be of the type that needs If supervision of the electrical detection, electrical actuation or to be energized to remain open. electrical power supply circuit is provided, it shall give prompt audi- ll be distinctive from Parts hat may be used for installation of a 110 VAC Gas Shut alarms or i dicato s operation orahazardous conditions Valve are: as specified in NFPA 17A. SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Paae 4 -54 REV. 1 .10 -1 -02 - ELECTRICAL SWITCH REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Electric (110 VAC/60 Hz) Gas Shut-off Valve INSTALLATION OVERVIEW ' . POWER SOURCE ---01 0 MANUAL RESET O ~— RELAY ELECTRIC • I ' SNAP- ACTION - SWITCH — I - INIPI = I - E GAS VALVE . • \ ... JUNCTION BOXES . A_ • (NOT SUPPLIED BY ANSUL) / �' aomn WIRING SCHEMATIC f, WIRING; SCHEMATIC — RELAY PART NO. 426151 __ BLACK ANSUL SNAP- ACTION SWITCH RED (SWITCH CONTACTS SHOWN WITH ANSUL - -- AUTOMAN IN THE COCKED POSITION) BROWN 1 - RESET POWER I D < INDICATOR I. ONDI I I • r I AC B SCREWI 5 I - 4 L2 NEUTRAL I RELAY COIL t 0 a L1 HOT 110 VACI60MZ I • I i3 3 t I . 4 p----• I • I T � �� 1 - 1 MANUAL RESET RELAY ( (PART NO. 428151) ELECTRIC RATING - - 1/3 HP, 10 Amp, 120 VAC GAS VALVE • 1/2 HP. 10 Alp, 240 VAC SEE NOTE 3 W2a82 13 Amp, 28VDC NOTE: 1 DENOTES FIELD INSTALLATION. 2. DENOTES FACTORY INSTALLATION. 1 CONTRACTORS: IJL USTED ENCLOSED INDUSTRIAL CONTROL EOUIPMENT OR MAGNETIC SWITCH HAVING A RATING MATCHING FIGURE 95 w THAT OF THE COOKING APPLIANCE COIL, 110V /60HZ 4. DO NOT USE BLACK WIRE ON SNAP - ACTION SWITCH IN NORMAL INSTALLATION. BLACK WIRE TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTRANEOUS ALARM, LIGHT CIRCUITS, ETC UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -55 10 -1 -02 REV. 1 ,. ELECTRICAL SWITCH REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Electric (110 VAC/60 Hz) Application with Customer Supplied Contactor and Heating Element Load INSTALLATION OVERVIEW POWER SOURCE — 61 MANUAL RESET o RELAY _ ' ELECTRIC SNAP- ACTION SWITCH - `�,\ _ I� X10 I motimj CONTACTOR (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED) JUNCTION BOX (NOT SUPPLIED BY ANSUL) POWER ON-OFF II SWITCH . (SI (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED) zoo I . -Alls■I tow. mom WIRING SCHEMATIC WIRING SCHEMATIC — RELAY PART NO. 426151 __ SLACK t . BROW N RED ANSUL SNAP - ACTION SWITCH (SWITCH CONTACTS SHOWN WITH ANSUL AUTOMAN IN THE COCKED POSITION) r - - - - -__— RESET POWER 1 I INDICATOR 1 i • GND 1 A l B SCREW 1 5 RELAY COIL 11111 l NEUTRAL 110 VAC/60HZ L1 HOT 6 WM I 9 3 I 4 1 7 I CONTACTOR (CUSTOMER SUPPUED) I . 1 r � 1 I `� ( I r-- , POWER ON-OFF SWITCH MANUAL RESET RELAY 1 I I I (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED) 1 1 I I I (PART NO. 426151) 11 I 1 L- _ —_ —__ — __ , ELECTRIC RATING TO HEATING Qs.-- Qs.-- • '1" ; TO POWER SUPPLY 113 HP, 10 Amp, 120 VAC ELEMENT LOAD .- 220V /440V 112 HP, 10 Amp, 240 VAC `— NOTE: 13 Amp. 26 VDC mem 1. DENOTES FIELD INSTALLATION. 2. DENOTES FACTORY INSTALLATION. 3. GAS VALVES:1A. LISTED ELECTRICALLY -OPERATED SAFETY VALVE FOR NATURAL OR LP GAS AS NEEDED OF APPROPRIATE PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE RATING, 110V/60 HZ' OR ANSUL GAS VALVES. PART NUMBERS 13707. 13708, 13709, 13710, AND 17843. FIGURE 96 EXTRANEOUS ALARM. LIGHT CC 4. DO NOT USE SLACK - AALMON SWITCH IN NORMAL INSTALLATION. BLACK WIRE TO BE USED ONLY I• SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX.•3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4 -56 Rpt.1 1u -1 -02 _ • ELECTRICAL SWITCH REQUIREM (Continued) Electric (110 VAC/60 Hz) Application with Customer Supplied Contactor and Heating Element Load, and 'Power Supply Switch - INSTALLATION OVERVIEW • 'I, POWER SOURCE ----It MANUAL RESET • 4 4-- RELAY ELECTRIC i ' r �, SNAP - ACTION ( SWITCH OR SWITCH THERMOSTAT - e • �� (CUSTOMER SUPPUED) - 1111 MS wow - JUNCTION BOX (NOT SUPPLIED BY ANSUL) • CONTACTOR • (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED) • t WIRING SCHEMATIC • WIRING SCHEMATIC — RELAY PART NO. 426151 r -- BLACK -- RED _ ANSUL SNAP-ACTION SWITCH t BROWN • -- (SWITCH CONTACTS SHOWN WITH ANSUL — AUTOMAN IN THE COCKED POSITION) I - - -_ - - - -_— - - - —I RESET POWER I - INDICATOR 1 . iti GND1 A, B Scowl 5 L2 NEUTRAL • 11111111M111 . 110 VAC/60HZ RELAY COIL ' LI HOT 6 . 9 3 4 .. 7 1 1s - - CONTACTOR I SWITCH OR THERMOSTAT (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED) - • I (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED) r '1 ( MANUAL RESET RELAY I 1 . I (PART NO.426151)' 1 ELECTRIC RATING j 1 1/3 HP, 10 Amp, 120 VAC 12 HP, 10 Amp, 240 VAC TO HEATING TO POWER SUPPLY 13 Amp, 26 VDC ELEMENT LOAD _ 220V1440V mom • NOTE: . 1 DENOTES FIELD INSTALLATION. 2 DENOTES FACTORY INSTALLATION. 3. CONTRACTORS:' UL USTED ENCLOSED INDUSTRIAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT OR MAGNETIC SWITCH HAVING A RATING MATCHING THAT OF THE COOKING APPUANCE COIL, 110V/60HV FIGURE 97 • 4. DO NOT USE BLACK WIRE ON SNAP - ACTION SWITCH IN NORMAL INSTALLATION. BLACK WIRE TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTRANEOUS ALARM, UGHT CIRCUITS. ETC. • . SECTION V — INSTALLATIVn ono 1 nuc;TIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5 -1 8 -1 -01 REV. 4 ' INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS The installation information listed in this section deals with the lira- If not already done, mount both boxes to a rigid surface itations and parameters of this pre - engineered system. Those indi- using appropriate fasteners. viduals responsible for the installation of the R -102 system must Fill tanks per instructions listed in Steps 3 and 4 on be trained and hold a current Anstil certificate in an R -102 training Page 5-3. • program. Next, route hose through grommets and wrench tighten into Before attempting any installation, the entire system design must 1/4 in. inlet of the adaptor on the tank in the tanklenclosure have been determined including: Nozzle Placement, Tank assembly. Also install hose to tank adaptor in regulated Quantity, Actuation and Expellant Gas Piping, Distribution Piping, release and wrench tighten. See Figure 74b in "Design and Detection System Requirements and an installation sketch Section' for details of hose routing. should be completed. REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY MOUNTING THE COMPONENTS rz For successful system performance, the regulated release assem- t � 16 t � ) IN bly, regulated actuator assembly(ies), and tank - enclosure(s) or tank - bracket assembly(ies) used must be located in areas where 13 (35 13/16IN. the air temperature will not fall below 32 °F (0 °C) or exceed ( cm) 13/6IN. 130 °F (54 °C). Also, the components must be arranged to con- / (3.5cm) form to the actuation and expellant gas line, and the distribution -, piping guidelines noted in "System Design." ' _ _ 1 t p \ CAUTION 23 1/2 IN Use only an ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release (59.7 cm) I . assembly or OEM Release/Bracket Assembly. The regu- 1 i 1g m 9 IN. lator in this assembly is specifically designed to allow a o 1 97/ 5 I regulated flow of expellant gas into the agent tank(s). Absence of this regulator could cause the tank(s) to nip- / `1 ture or create an improper system discharge. • Mount the regulated release assembly, OEM Release Assembly, [2::1 and each regulated actuator assembly required by completing the �' 7 1(192 . 2 IN IN following steps: See Figures 1, 2, and 3. . � � a. Select a rigid surface for mounting the enclosure. The mounting locations must allow the regulated release FIGURE 1 °°°, assembly and the regulated actuator assembly(ies) to be . within the limitation of the actuation and expellant gas line REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY lengths and must be able to support the weight of the assembly(ies). When the OEM Release Assembly is 161rz IN. • mounted inside a cabinet, clearances shall be provided for (42 Cm) unrestricted movement of the release assembly compo- ,313r161N vents within the closed cabinet. (35 cm) b. Detach cover from the enclosure. Remove agent tank from 1 316 IN. enclosure and the expellant gas line hose from the - (3 5 cm) tank/adaptor assembly. c. Secure enclosure box to selected mounting location using the four mounting holes. Use appropriate type of fasteners depending on the mounting surface. 231/2 IN d. When mounting a 6- gallon manifolded system (or a 6-gal- • (56 Ion individual piped system) it is critical that each mounting 19 7/16 IN! box is located as shown in Figure 3a. There must be a 5/16 (49.3 cm) in. space between each box. Less than 5/16 in. will cause interference with the covers, and more than a 5/16 in. will cause a gap between the two hose grommets which will / expose the hose to possible tampering or damage. Remove the 7/8 in. knockout in the left side of the ANSUL AUTOMAN release box and remove the 1 in. knockout in 7 1rz IN the right side of the tank - enclosure box. Install grommets in ' (19 an) each (use Ansul hose/grommet package, Part No. 418511). � Remove 1/4 in. plug from back side of R -102 regular and FIGURE 2 install fixed end of secondary expellant gas hose (included 002159 in hose/grommet package, Part No. 418511) in 1/4 in. reg- ulator outlet and wrench tighten. SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5 -2 REV. 3 10 -1 -02 MOUNTING THE COMPONENTS (Continued) • 3.0 GALLON TANK BRACKET 3 1/2 IN. OEM RELEASE/BRACKET ASSEMBLY (9t • 6 IN. 7 IN. (15 pm) • (18cm) • 1.0 _ 9 3/4 IN. f� (25 cm) '� / . O < '�,,,, i • .' L .- i 8 5/81N. • • i (22 cm) 5.38IN. . (13.7 cm) O . 18.51N. • • (47 cm) - . I . • 151N. � _/ (38 cm) . . •• 7131161N..` 000499 (20 cm) 10111 8211.5 cm) 9 IN. .62 (1.5 cm) • SINGLE TANK ENCLOSURE r__229Cm) 5.75 IN. 5/16 1N. (14.6 cm) (16 cm) I FIGUR 3 �` \ 1 . i MULTIPLE TANK ASSEMBLY •` 6 6 IN. ( • I 16 c 81N. m) 131311 LOCATION OF (35 cm) I 23 1/2 IN GROMMETS - - _ 158'7 rant I• `_ II �': I 19 7/161N. (4 9.4 cm) • ,T9 7/161N. 197/161N. / \ f •(49 cm) (49 cm) - a �\ 1/2 IN. • 7 1 ../....'.......'....'''' (19.1 cm) • 000210 FIGURE 4 • 101 REMOTE RELEASE 5 13/181N. (14.9 cm) 9318 IN. 28 IN. (.7 cm) ,.._—+-. -- (23 8 cm) • (8 c IN. HOLE (TYP) t (.8 cm). FIGURE 3a • / 1 \ CAUTION O II18h/2IN. • D o not install cartridge at this time or system may be actuated. o 18 cm) • IN. IN 1/2 2. Mount each tank- enclosure or tank - bracket assembly by com- ( 21 1 1/2 IN ) pleting the following steps: a. Select a rigid, vertical surface for mounting the enclosure or bracket. (Keep in mind that the 3 gallon tank is taller than the bracket. Allow sufficient space for convenient piping and • removal.) b. Remove tank from enclosure or bracket, and secure enclo- sure or bracket to the mounting location using the four • mounting holes. Use appropriate type of fasteners depend- ing on the mounting surface. FIGURE 4a • 4440, r v UL EX. 3470 ULC CEz747 Page 5-2.1 • 10 -1 -02 REV.4 , S MOUNTING THE COMPONENTS (Continued) • A LL STAINLESS STEEL TANKS 3. Fill each agent tank by completing the following steps: _l 2 114 IN:: 118 IN. (57 mm : 3 mm) FROM THE TOP OF THE COLLAR a. Remove tank adaptor/tube assembly from tank fill opening. — FOR THE 3 GALLON TANK Visually inspect tank adaptor to determine bursting disc is in F----="-----, 1 OR place and that silver side is away from tank. See Figure 5. 1 314 IN.: tre IN. (45 mm : 3 mm) FROM THE TOP OPINE COLLAR • FOR THE 1.5 GALLON TANK r. ,. 000292 RED PAINTED STEEL TANK • INO 1 I TO 1 IN. (25-29 mm) j. FROM B M THE BOTTOM OM OF THE FILL OPENING FOR BOTH 3 GALLON AND 1. GALLON TANKS FIGURE 5 °00791 b. 4:1 CAUTION ,\ Safety glasses should be worn during transfer opera- tions of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant. Avoid contact with skin or eyes. In case of contact, flush MO2920 immediately with water for 15 minutes. It irritation per- FIGURE 6 silts, contact a physician. Do not take internally. If taken • 00° internally do not induce vomiting. Dilute with water or c. Reinstall adaptor /tube assembly to tank by tightening until milk and contact a physician immediately. metal to metal contact is achieved between bottom of adap- Place plastic funnel in fill opening and fill tank with 1.5 tor and tank collar. (5.8 L) or 3.0 (11.6 L) gallons of only ANSULEX Low pH 4. Place each tank into its enclosure or bracket. • . Liquid Fire Suppressant. See Figure 6 for detailed filling tolerances. NOTE: Use a funnel with a screen to stop any foreign material from entering the tank. See Figure 6. • -_;' CAUTION • During filling, the agent temperature should be 60 °F to 80 °F (16 °C to 27 °C). DO NOT FILL WITH COLD AGENT. DO NOT OVERFILL. Overfilling may result in . agent entering gas hoses and regulator potentially causing system malfunction. SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5 -2.2 REV. 1 7 -1 -98 - NOTES: _ SE(:TIUN V - INSTALLA" wn ono I nut, $ IUF4 ► UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5 -3 7 -1 -98 REV.2 T INSTALLING THE ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT. GAS LINE NOTICE Do not allow tape to overlap the pipe open - Before installing any actuation or expellant gas line, the piping D as this could cause possible blockage of design must be determined; and the regulated release assembly, the gas pressure. - each regulated actuator assembly and each tank - bracket assem- Thread sealant or compound must not be bly should be securely mounted. used General Piping Requirements ' 4. When connecting actuation or expellant gas line piping, install 1. Use only 1/4 in. Schedule 40 black iron, hot - dipped galva- a 1/4 in. union near the tank Inlet for easy disassembly later. nized, chrome - plated, or stainless steel pipe and fittings. Actuation Gas Line 2. Before assembling the pipe and fittings, make certain all ends are carefully reamed and blown clear of chips and scale. Install actuation gas line from the regulated release mechanism Inside of pipe and fittings must be free of oil and dirt. high pressure side outlet (side opposite regulated outlet) through the appropriate knockout in the enclosure by completing the fol- 3. The piping and fitting connections must be sealed with pipe lowing steps: tape. When applying pipe tape, start at the second male • thread and wrap the tape (two turns maximum) clockwise 1. Remove the 1/8 in. plug from high pressure side outlet. Install around the threads, away from the pipe opening. the appropriate fitting for additional equipment attachment as required. A 1/4 x 1/8 in. reducing fitting is required to connect the 1/4 in. actuation line. See Figure 7. Typical Arrangements For A One Device Connection To Cartridge Receiver 114 °41.1 1147 1 14, - 1 1, - 11111115r !-- •••■ Of "A .!., offr • Sy 40111..P- ' Typical Arrangements For A Two Device Connection To Cartridge Receiver 04e ' , W .. Of ' (i) il- op Illtly liti'e 41•1110 1. opp*IrspW , w j aao:s, Typical Arrangements For A Three Device Connection To Cartridge Receiver Vikle,f 111,1ri 1,r% ,. � � i t �� ,. . 1b TO REGULATED ACTUATOR TO TANK IN (MULTIPLE TANKS ONLY) TO TANK IN BRACKET TO REGULATED BRACKET OR OR ENCLOSURE ACTUATOR • PIPE (OR HOSE WHEN ENCLOSURE (MULTIPLE TANKS ONLY) I TO ENCLOSURE ONLY) TO PRESSURE 2 IN. NIPPLE SWITCH REQUIRED -1111 il I k 11** , Al l I I ill i _,, do 1-1 _.,, /0- It t .16ralk 1111 ril l' rill 1 %illL111511 0#, 0 011 1.1 16 I • - ..... _zip, ,. 4 1 di ili corm TO TANK IN REGULATED TO TANK IN REGULATED TO TANK IN REGULATED TO ASSEMBLT ED RELEASE ASSEMBLY RELEASE ASSEMBLY RELEASE ASSEMBLY SINGLE TANK DOUBLE AND MULTIPLE TANKS PRESSURE TANK WITH DOUBLE ANO MULTIPLE SWITCH TANKS WITH PRESSURE CONNECTION SWITCH CONNECTION NOTE: ALL PIPE AND FITTINGS SHALL BE SCHEDULE 40 (STANDARD WEIGHT) BLACK IRON, NOT - TIPPED GALVANIZED. CHROME-PLATED. OR STAINLESS STEEL. FIGURE 7 • SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS a , UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-4 REV.4 10 -1 -02 . INSTALLING THE ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT GAS LINE (Continued) Actuation Gas Line (Continued) • 2. Run piping up through the regulated release assembly enclo- 4. If an expellant gas line is connected to the regulated release sure knockout to the inlet on top of each regulated actuator assembly along with an actuation gas line, the total combined assembly used within the system. : length of the actuation and expellant gas line must not 3. The total combined length of the actuation gas line from the exceed 30 ft. (9 m). See Figure 9. regulated release assembly to all regulated actuator assem- 5. A combined total of nine fittings may be used in these lines, blies must not exceed 20 ft. (6 m) when using an LT 20-R nitro- eight 90° elbows and one tee. Two 45° elbows equal one 90° . gen cartridge, an LT 30-R nitrogen cartridge, a 101 -10 CO2 elbow. • • cartridge, or a 101 -20 CO2 cartridge. See Figure 8. . ACTUATION GAS LINE WITH AN LT -20 -R. • LT -30-R. 101.20 OR 101 -30 CARTRIDGE MAXIMUM LENGTH - 20 FT. (S m), MAXIMUM NO. OF FITTINGS -9 1 ! 1 fir; ! REGULATED ACTUATOR i . 11111 ASSEMBLY EXPELLANT GAS LINES NOT INCLUDED IN ACTUATION GAS LINE LENGTH TOTALS Y REGULATED ACTUATOR >.# ASSEMBLY Ii REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY • FIGURE 8 ANSUL AUTOMAN FIGURE REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT GAS LINES WITH I A'DOUBLE -TANK' OR 101 -30 CARTRIDGE i MAXIMUM COMBINED LENGTH - 30 FT. (9 m). MAXIMUM COMBINED FITTINGS - 9 1 R EGUED ACTUATOR G SS UNES NOT EXPELLANT INCLUDED w i l GAS UNES NOT INCLUDED i IN COMBINED TOTALS - �1 V REGULATED ACTUATOR �� ASSEMBLY On ill 1 REGULATED ACTUATOR R O ASSEMBLY REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY FIGURE 9 cocas. ANSUL AUTOMAN REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5 -5 • 10 -1 -02 REV.4 , INSTALLING THE ACTUATION AND EXPELLENT GAS LINE (Continued) 4. If an actuation gas line is connected to the regulated release Expellant Gas Line From The Regulated Release Assembly assembly along with an expellant gas line, the total combined length of the gas lines must not exceed 30 ft (9 m) when Install expellant gas line from the regulated release assembly reg- , using a °double -tank" nitrogen cartridge or a 101 -30 CO2 car - ulator in the enclosure by completing the following steps: • tridge. See Figure 9. 1. The regulated release assembly is shipped with a factory- 5. A combined total of nine fittings may be used in these fines, installed regulator. The regulator has two 1/4 in. outlets, one at eight 90 elbows and one tee. Two 45° elbows equal one 90° the back and one at the bottom. The bottom outlet connects elbow the expellant gas hose to the agent tank which is mounted inside the enclosure. The back outlet is sealed with a 1/4 in. Expellant Gas Line From The Regulated Actuator Assembly plug. Install expellant gas piping from the regulated actuator assembly 2. Connect expellant gas hose to the agent tank mounted inside regulator through the appropriate knockout in the enclosure by the enclosure. If a pressure switch is required, a 1/4 in. x 1/8 completing the following steps: in. reducing fitting will be required for connection between the 1. The regulated actuator is shipped with a factory installed reg- back regulator outlet and the pressure switch. See Figure 7. ulator. The regulator has two 1/4 in. outlets 135° from each DOUBLE AND MULTIPLE TANK SYSTEMS: other. One outlet is sealed by a 1/4 in. plug and the other con- tains the expellant gas hose for the agent tank which will be If the expellant gas piping is required because an additional mounted within the enclosure. Connect expellant gas hose to tank - enclosure or tank - bracket assembly is being installed, the the agent tank that Is mounted inside the enclosure. plug installed in the back outlet must be removed. (See Figure 6 for proper connections to the regulator.) 2. Remove the 1/4 in. pipe plug from the regulator side outlet and pipe the 1/4 in. expellant gas line from the regulator through 3. Pipe the 1/4 in. expellant gas line from the regulator back out- the knockout provided in the enclosure to a tank - enclosure or let through one of the knockouts provided in the enclosure. tank - bracket assembly. A maximum of one tank - enclosure or The total length of the expellant gas line from the regulated tank - bracket assembly is allowed per regulated actuator release assembly must not exceed 30 ft. (9 m) when using a assembly. . "double -tank" nitrogen cartridge or a 101 -30 CO2 cartridge. The maximum length of the expellant gas line from the regu- See Figure 10. lated actuator to the tank - bracket assembly must not exceed 30 ft. (9 m). See Figure 11. 3. A total of nine fittings may be used In these lines, eight 90° EXPELLANT GAS LI elbows and one tee. Two 45° elbows equal one 90° elbow. MAXIMUM LENGTH - 30 FT (9 m), MAXIMUM N0. OF FITTINGS - 9 e EXPELLANT GAS LINE L MAXIMUM LENGTH - 30 (9 m), MAXIMUM NO. OF FITTINGG S - 9 _ REGULATED RELEASE _ ASSEMBLY 1111 11110' �/►/ 1 FIGURE 10 000776 REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY FIGURE 11 000777 • SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS , UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5 -6 REV. 2 10 -1 -02 INSTALLING THE ACTUATION AND EXPELLENT GAS LINE (Continued) Actuation Gas Line From 101 Remote Releases) to Regulated Actuators . Install actuation gas piping from the remote release(s) to the reg- ulated actuators by completing the following: 1. Pipe the 1/4 in. actuation gas line from the 1/4 in. outlet in the remote release receiver, through the knockout provided in the top of the release enclosure, to each regulated actuator . assembly. The maximum length of the actuation gas line from the remote release to all regulated actuators must not exceed 100 ft. • (30.5). See Figure 12. NOTE: Stainless steel hose and fittings • can be used. See Component Section for detailed information. 2. A maximum of nine tees and twenty elbows are allowed In the actuation piping. Two 45° elbows equal one 90° elbow. See Figure 12. 3. A safety relief valve (Part No. 15677) must be installed in the actuation piping. See Figure 12. . 9 TEES 20 ELBOWS SAFETY RELIEF MAXIMUM MAXIMUM VALVE L 1!4 IN ACTUATION UNE - 100 FT. (30.5 m) MAXIMUM • L EXPELLANT ,. GAS UNE et 61 .� J -` r 11 C C i ' _ e r � ! ! I � a 1 10( II O( .: - Ltirii , 1 , I L 1 1 J� REMOTE RELEASE / MECHANISMS REGULATED (5 MAXIMUM) ACTUATOR AGENT TANK AND BRACKET OR AGENT TANK IN ENCLOSURE (TNT) WITH TANK (UP) FIGURE 12 °0°701 UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5 -7 10 -1 -02 REV.3 • INSTALLING THE DISTRIBUTION PIPING Before the following procedures can be completed, the piping 2. Based on the piping sketch developed in.the ° System Design" design must already be determined; and the actuation and expel- section of this manual, install the supply line and position the lant gas lines from the regulated release, each regulated actuator, tees at points where branch lines must be installed. See and each tank- enclosure or tank- bracket assembly should already Figure 13. be installed. I - - -; T installation instructions are identical for single, double, and multiple -tank systems except for the quantity of tanks and hazard n i - i areas to be covered. [4.-cp..cloc..=—Q,==z, i i I General Piping Requirements L. ____ ______ __., 1. Use Schedule 40 black iron, chrome - plated, or stainless steel pipe and fittings. NOTICE Do not use hot - dipped galvanized iron pipe or fittings in the agent distribution piping. 2. Before assembling the pipe and fittings, make certain all ends 0 are carefully reamed and blown clear of chips and scale. FIGURE 13 Inside of pipe and fittings must be of oil and dirt. 3. The distribution piping and fitting connections, located in or 3 Run all branch lines to the hazard area and connect each noz- above the hood or the protected area, must be sealed with zle. (Make certain all fittings are tight and all piping is secure - pipe tape. When applying pipe tape, start at the second male ly bracketed.) The 1WS and 1NS nozzles can be aimed by thread and wrap the tape (two turns maximum) clockwise slipping a 3/8 in. Schedule 40 pipe over the tip, moving the tip around the threads, away from the pipe opening. to the correct aiming point, and then wrench tightening the NOTICE retaining ring. Do not allow tape to overlap the pipe opening as 4. All threaded connections located in the protected area, must the pipe and nozzles could become plugged. be sealed with pipe tape. Tape should be applied to male Thread sealant or compound must not be used threads only. Make certain tape does not extend over the end • as it could plug the nozzles. of the thread, as this could cause possible blockage of the • 4. Distribution piping may be run independently or two agent agent distribution. tanks may be manifolded together and run to the predeter- 5. Before installing blow -off caps on nozzles, apply a small mined hazard area. Only agent tanks expelled from the same amount of Dow Corning No. 111 silicone grease across the cartridge may be manifolded. opening in the nozzle tip and also a small amount coating the NOTICE • exterior of the blow -off cap. DO NOT FILL CAP WITH Closely follow the piping requirements for each • GREASE. size system, as detailed in the "System Design" NOTICE • section, when installing distribution piping. When using a metal blow -off cap, make certain the spring clip rotates freely on the metal cap. • ►Pi Hanger Recommended Guidelines • 6. When a nozzle utilizes a metal blow -off cap, the nozzle tip 1. Space hangers as follows: must be coated with Silicone 111 grease before the cap is Maximum Recommended installed. The grease must be wiped across the tip and around Pipe Size Distance Between Hangers the tip so that a rim of grease will be seen once the nozzle cap is in place. also, apply grease to the outside of the cap includ- 3/8 in. 5 ft. (12.7 cm) ing application of the grease between the cap clips and the 2. Hangers should be placed between elbows when the distance ► cap. • is greater than 2 ft. (0.6 m). • 7. Make certain a blow -off cap is in place over each nozzle tip. Piping Installation These blow -off caps are designed to keep grease from build - ing-up on the nozzle orifice and inhibiting the agent flow. See 1. Starting at the tank, pipe directly from the union located on the Figure 14. tank adaptor. A reducing fitting may be necessary to conform to the distribution piping. { 1 d ins isle In: ■ - S O - C/ e. esa0 I oaoXw 0:0334 o00305 FIGURE 14 SECTION V – INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5 -8 ,, REV. 1 7 -1 -98 INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM Before the following procedures can be completed, the detection 2. For a terminal detector located in a duct or header opening, design must already be completed. These installation instructions secure both sides of the detector bracket with conduit, as are identical for single, double, and multiple -tank systems except shown in Figure 16. for the number of hazard areas to be covered. 'V—_ NOTICE Inform customer that fusible links should not be exposed to ammonia -based chemical cleaners or steam. 1. Based on the requirements listed in the "System Design" sec tion, mount the detectors in their predetermined locations. 2. Run 1/2 in. conduit from the regulated release mechanism trip 1___. . hammer assembly knockout hole to locations selected for mounting the detectors. NOTE: Before assembling the conduit and fittings, make cer- tain all ends are carefully reamed and blown clear of chips and scale. Inside of pipe and fittings must be free of oil and dirt. _ • When changing the direction of conduit, use only Ansul pulley �i� I elbows, except, at the top of the regulated release; it is accept- ► able to use the "Conduit Offset Assembly" (Part No. 79825). Ansul offers three styles of detector bracket assemblies. Part -I--- -- No. 56837 and 56838 are the "clip -on" style series and termi- FIGURE 16 nal detector assemblies. These detector assemblies use a 000307 "clip -on" style linkage assembly and do not require the wire rope to be threaded through the linkage assembly while it is a Starting at the regulated release assembly, feed the wire rope being fed through the detection system. through the hole in the regulated release mechanism locking • Part No. 15373 and 15375 are the "hinged" style series and clamp, allowing the excess wire rope to hang down. (Do _ terminal detector assemblies. These detector assemblies use not tighten set screws in locking clamp at this time.) See .f a detector linkage assembly which requires the wire rope. to Figure 17. be threaded through each linkage assembly while the rope is being fed through the detection system. Part No. 417368 and 417369 are the "scissor" style series and me terminal detector assemblies. These detector assemblies use =- a detector linkage assembly which does not require the wire I rop0 to be threaded through the linkage assembly while it is LocwNG being fed through the detection system. 8 CLAMP Installing "Clip -On" Style Linkage __ 1. Secure the conduit to the detector bracket using the two 1/2 in. steel compression fittings on the series detector bracket or the single 1/2 in. steel compression fitting on the terminal • millriff..„ detector bracket. See Figure 15. FIGURE 17 MiI a COMPRESSION -Di ED (/ FITTING NUT ---" vt 12 IN. STEEL / - COMPRESSION FITTING FIGURE 15 Tom NOTICE Do not use zinc die cast compression connec- tors on the detection conduit lines as these will not withstand the normally high temperatures experienced in the plenum area. - SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5 -9 • ' 7 -1 -98 REV. 1 INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) Installing "Clip On" Style Linkage (Continued) 6. To give a constant tension on the wire rope during installation of the detector linkage, hang a vice grip or other weighted 4. From the regulated release assembly, run the stainless steel device on the excess stainless steel wire rope, leaving an ade- wire rope through the conduit, pulley elbows and detector quate length of spare wire rope between the locking 'clamp brackets to the terminal detector. and the weighted device. NOTICE NOTICE • If wire rope requires splicing, make certain When attaching the weighted device to the splice is at least 12 in. (30.5 cm) away from any excess wire rope, allow approximately 3 in. pulley elbow or conduit adaptor to avoid inter- (8 cm) of wire rope for each detector linkage for Terence. proper installation. 5. Feed the wire rope through the terminal detector bracket as Example: If the system has six detectors, there should be shown in Figure 18 or as shown in Figure 19 if the terminal approximately 18 in. (46 cm) of excess wire rope detector is mounted within a duct or header opening, and between the locking clamp and the weighted install the stop sleeve approximately 2 to 3 in. (5 to 8 cm) from device, which will be utilized when the linkage is the end of the wire rope. See Figure 20. Use the National put in place. Telephone Supply Company Nicopress Sleeve Tool (Stock No. 51-C-887) or equal to properly crimp the stop sleeve. 7 ' detector at nkage onto detector, a place the Figure 21. tab of the ,I\ OP 1 %. hr0 I o r: . ............ :0") JJ . . FIGURE 18 000710 FIGURE 21 C00313 8. With the tab positioned on the wire rope, press and snap the detector linkage onto the wire rope. See Figure 22. I • • _ 07 FIGURE 19 oc.., 0, 2-3 IN. �( FIGURE 22 cm) am,. FIGURE 20 aoo7t2 • SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5 -10 . REV. 1 7-1-98 INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) Installing "Clip - On" Style Linkage (Continued) 12. Position the assembled linkage onto the detector bracket. See Figure 26. (For optimum detection, make certain the solder 9. Place the tab of the other half of the detector linkage on the joint is in the down position.) opposite side of the wire rope and press the linkage until it snaps onto the rope. See Figure 23. BRACKET • LINKS i lip51 r 1 `1I ' I ; �_r � �� 1 0. FIGURE 23 FIGURE 26 00030 FIGURE NOTICE NOTICE The hook portions of the detector linkage should When positioning the linkage in the bracket, it is now face away from each other. recommended to locate the linkage slightly off 10. Next, rotate both halves of the detector linkage upside down, center, toward the terminal detector side. with the detector linkage groove over the wire rope. See 13. Install the linkage and the correct Ansul approved fusible link Figure 24. in the remainder of the detector brackets. 14. Insert cocking lever (Part No. 14995) on left side of the regu- lated release mechanism, with the movable flange resting securely against the corner of the cartridge receiver and spring housing, and with the notched lever portion engaging _" .. the cocking pin on both sides of the regulated release meth 10 0)21, ' anism. See Figure 27. D 0. •., , „it, .„ FIGURE 24 — P 11. After fitting the pivot point of the two detector linkage halves together, squeeze the two halves and place the correctly rated Ansul approved fusible link over both detector hooks. See _ COCKING PIN Figure 25. ! C OCKING L EVER lb T . � ' FIGURE 27 OOW I4 , � FIGURE 25 os 3l7 SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-11 7 -1 -98 REV. 1 INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) Installing "Clip -On" Style Linkage (Continued) 17. Make certain tension lever is in the °UP" position. See 15. With a downward motion of the cocking lever, raise cocking pin Figure 30. • until the trip lever indented surface moves underneath the pin ti S (. and locks the pin in the "UP" position. See Figure 28. • 0 'H TENSION LEVER II il IN "UV POSITION i O � • ' _ \1 ` . Its w t:� Cr FIGURE 30 322 18. Verify each detector linkage assembly, with correct fusible link, 0 is in the detector bracket, located slightly toward the terminal detector side. ILI) NOTICE Due to the close adjustment between the trip FIGURE 28 hammer and cable lever assemblies, use only . 000320 the particular fusible link(s) selected for installa- tion in each detector, including terminal detec- 16. Remove cocking lever and insert lock bar (Part No. 14985) on tor, to ensure correct adjustment when perform - left side of the cable lever, over the two shouldered projecting • ing Steps 19 and 20. stud extensions, and slide bar forward into locking position. (The regulated release mechanism cannot be actuated, nor 19. Raise trip hammer 3/8 in. to 1/2 in. (9.5 to 12.7 mm), pull all can enclosure cover be replaced until the lock bar is slack out of wire rope, and tighten set screws on locking 'removed.) See Figure 29. clamp. 14-11/ 11 4 . ,_ ,' `/ LOCK BAR PROPERLY INSTALLED dig iii FIGURE 29 SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5 -12 ' REV.3 7 -1 -96 INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) Installing "Clip -On" Style Linkage (Continued) NOTICE Do not use zinc die cast compression connec- 20. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position and inspect the base tors on the detection conduit lines as these will of the wire rope clamping device tq make certain that there is not withstand the normally high temperatures • a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) and a maximum of 3/8 in. experienced in the plenum area. I (9.5 mm) clearance between the base of the trip hammer assembly and the cable lever assembly. See Figure 31. (If 2. For a terminal detector located in a duct or header opening, ► clearance is not between 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) or 3/8 in. (9.5 mm), secure both sides of the detector bracket with conduit, as raise tension lever, loosen set screws on locking clamp and shown in Figure 33. repeat Steps 19 and 20.) ► TRIP HAMMER ASSEMBLY ill Tie � 1!4 IN. MINIMUM 3 ( 8 . M a - 11111%-P.. 9181n. MAXIMU I ........-mis):ii.I. • I • � (9.5 m oozaa TRIP HAMMER BASE — W OPt4W 3 ■ FIGURE 33 FIGURE 31 • °00'2' 3. Starting at the release assembly, feed the wire rope through the hole in the release mechanism locking clamp, allowing the C CAUTION excess wire rope to hang down. (Do not tighten set screws in locking clamp at this time.) See Figure 34. Do not install cartridge at this time as an accidental actu- ation could cause system discharge. 21. Test detection system in accordance with the "Testing and ii MI Placing in Service," Testing Detection System section of this ' manual. LOCKING 22. When testing has been completed, cut oft excess wire rope in I T i CLAMP the regulated release assembly, leaving approximately 2 in. (5.1 cm) of wire rope below the clamping device. - %1 "Scissor" Style Linkage Installation 1. Secure the conduit to the detector bracket using the two �= 1/2 in. steel compression fittings on the series detector brack- FIGURE 34 et or the single 1/2 in. steel compression fitting on the terminal detector bracket. See Figure 32. 1!' COMPRESSION ( • FITTING NUT """ 1/2 IN. STEEL / COMPRESSION FITTING FIGURE 32 000aos r SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5 -13 7 -1 -98 REV. 1 INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) "Scissor" Style Linkage Installation (Continued) NOTICE When attaching the weighted device to the 4. From the release assembly, run the stainless steel wire rope excess wire rope, allow approximately 3 in. through the conduit, pulley elbows and detector brackets to (8 cm ) of wire rope for each detector linkage for the terminal detector. proper installation. NOTICE if wire rope requires splicing, make certain Example: If the system has six detectors, there should be splice is at least 12 in. (30.5 cm) away from any approximately 18 in. (46 cm) of excess wire rope pulley elbow or conduit adaptor to avoid interfer- between the locking clamp and the weighted ence. device, which will be utilized when the linkage is 5. Feed the wire rope through the terminal detector bracket as put in place. • shown in Figure 35 or as shown in Figure 36 if the terminal detector scissor assembly as shown in Figure 38. Note detector is mounted within a duct or header opening, and that the ANSUL AUTOMAN release is located on the left side install the stop sleeve approximately 2 to 3 in. (5 to 8 cm) from of the detector bracket. Slightly crimp the two assembly "boot - the end of the wire rope. See Figure 37. Use the National hooks" over the cable with pliers so the cable is captured Telephone Supply Company Nicopress Sleeve Tool (Stock No. under each hook but the whole assembly can move from side 51-C-887) or equal to properly crimp the stop sleeve. to side. Center the assembly in the detector bracket. 1 I !! - - -- — - IP lig arit. 67 -- Ill= OMEN 11111P -ANSUL AUTOMAN' it FIGURE 35 f On* ' 000010 FIGURE 38 000703 8. Hook the fusible link on the ANSUL AUTOMAN release side of the hook assembly, then pull the fusible link to the opposite -------- + .2 side and complete the hookup as shown in Figures 39 and 40. • 1 � The top of the hook assembly must be inside the bracket stiff- eners. The hook assembly with the fusible link in place must 11 be located toward the terminal detector side of the bracket. FIGURE 36 II „In 2 -3 IN. i+ Mr crn Are liC ill 11 h' FIGURE 39 I aoosoa t FIGURE 37 000.7 6. To give a constant tension on the wire rope during installation = i� of the detector linkage, hang a vice grip or other weighted :ii- device on the excess stainless steel wire rope, leaving an ade- O quate length of spare wire rope between the locking clamp T .p I �_ S .. and the weighted device. O.. �I" I d - -w. FIGURE 40 000724 I [ . . . i." SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-14 REV 2 8 -1 - INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) "Scissor" Style Linkage Installation (Continued) is 9. Install the linkage and the correct Ansui approved fusible link . in the remainder of the• detector prackets. Make certain all detector linkages are positioned against either the front or lorli i back upper lip of the formed detector bracket. See Figure 40a. c., tom_ • 4.„,......„ • ,... m , I , ("..;.1_ rI Li FIGUR E 42 Down . i 12. Remove cocking lever and insert lock bar (Part No. 14985) on ;,\ left side of the cable lever, over the two shouldered projecting stud extensions, and slide bar forward into locking position. P. FIGURE 40a (The release mechanism cannot be actuated, nor can enclo- 034 sure cover be replaced until the lock bar is removed.) See • 10. Insert cocking lever (Part No. 14995) on left side of the release Figure 43. mechanism, with the movable flange resting securely against the corner of the cartridge receiver and spring housing, and with the notched lever portion engaging the cocking pin on both sides of the release mechanism. See Figure 41. _I v \/ r I� 1N. r...■ .4 LOCK BAR PROPERLY INSTALLED • m, FIGURE 43 I COCKING PIN ° "_��- 13. Make certain tension lever is in the "UP" position. See (� Figure 44. COCKING LEVER \ . , ► =:_" I P , FIGURE 41 00079 . TENSION LEVER 11. With a downward motion of the cocking lever, raise cocking pin d . , IN'UP' POSITION until the trip lever indented surface moves underneath the pin ; + and locks the pin in the up position. See Figure 42. r ( I `',I V% X% \ 1. FIGURE 44 SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-15 8 -1 -01 REV.2 . a INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) 12 IN. STEEL ' .. COMPASSION "Scissor" Style Linkage Installation (Continued) , ' r 14. Verify each detector linkage assembly, with correct fusible link, is in the detector bracket, located fully toward the terminal ) NA 12 IN. COMPRESSION -_4 grn detector side. ■� .// FITTING NUT NOTICE FIGURE Due to the close adjustment between the trip NOTICE hammer and cable lever assemblies, use only the particular fusible link(s) selected for installa- Do not use zinc die cast compression connec- tion in each detector, including terminal detec- tors on the detection conduit lines as zinc will tor, to ensure correct adjustment when perform- not withstand the normally high temperatures ing Steps 15 and 16. experienced in the plenum area. 15. Raise trip hammer 3/8 in. to 1/2 in. (9.5 to 12.7 mm), pull all 2. Starting at the regulated release assembly, feed wire rope up slack out of wire rope, and tighten set screws on locking through hole in regulated release mechanism locking clamp, clamp. allowing excess wire rope to hang down. (Do not tighten set screws in locking clamp at this time.) See Figure 47. 16. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position and inspect the base of the wire rope clamping device to make certain that there is • a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) and a maximum of 3/8 in. III I (9.5 mm) clearance between the base of the trip hammer r mr assembly and the cable lever assembly. See Figure 45. (If • clearance is not between 114 in. (6.4 mm) or 3/8 in. (9.5 mm), 1 raise tension lever, loosen set screws on locking clamp and LocKING repeat Steps 15 and 16.) I TRIP HAMMER ASSEMBLY . ice, l r i 1/4 IN. MINIMUM FIGURE 47 -at (6 ) 000309 3 18 • air (9 5 in- mml MAXIMUM 3. From the regulated release assembly, run the stainless steel wire rope through the conduit, pulley elbows and to the first TRIP detector. HAMMER BASE 4. Before continuing on past the detector bracket, teed the wire rope through the detector linkage assembly. See Figure 48. Il5. Continue running the wire rope through the conduit and pulley elbows and feed it through each detector linkage assembly at each additional bracket. 6. At the terminal detector, feed wire rope through the terminal detector clamping device. Allow 2 -3 in. (5 -8 cm) of wire rope to extend beyond the clamping device and wrench tighten the set FIGURE 45 screws. See Figure 48. aoosa • 2 -3 IN. ( &8 cm) - CAUTION Do not install cartridge at this time as an accidental actu- ation could cause system discharge. Ar 17. Test detection system in accordance with the Testing and Placing in Service Section, Page 7 -1 — 7 -3, of this manual. r 18. When testing has been completed, cut off excess wire rope in FIGURE 48 the regulated release assembly, leaving approximately 2 in. 00 (5.1 cm) of wire rope below the clamping device. 7. To give a constant tension on the wire rope during positioning Installing "Hinged" Style Linkage of the detector linkage(s), hang a vise grip or other weighted device on the excess stainless steel wire rope, leaving an ade- • 1. Secure the conduit to the detector bracket using 1/2 in. steel quate length of spare wire rope between the locking clamp compression fittings. Thread the compression fitting into the and the weighted device. detector bracket and then secure by using the lock nut sup- plied with the fitting. See Figure 46. • • SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5 -16 REV. 1 7-1-9G INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) Installing "Hinged" Style Linkage (Continued) 11. With a downward motion of the cocking lever, raise the cock- ing pin until trip hammer indented surface moves underneath NOTICE the pin. See Figure 51. When attaching the weighted device to the excess wire rope, allow approximately 3 in. r (8 cm) of wire rope for each detector linkage for _ proper installation. Example: If the system has six detectors there should be 8 approximately 18 in.. (46 cm) of excess wire rope 7 • between the locking clamp and the weighted • device, which will be utilized when the linkage is C` , ' _ 1 • put in place. � �( . • 8. Starting at the terminal detector, squeeze the linkage togeth- C===3 ■••• -4 20411 er and place the correctly rated Ansul approved fusible link • over both detector hooks. For optimum detection, make cer- tain LI�r the solder joint is in the down position. Locate the linkage , ;1i� , I in the center of the detector bracket. See Figure 49. - (37 s'N. . 40/3 I _ Mb CII:Dm•Ned FIGURE 49 1,1 9. Proceed to install the remainder of the Ansul approved fusible FIGURE 51 links on the detector hooks and position the linkage in the cen- ,, ter of each bracket. 12. Remove the cocking lever and insert lock bar (Part No. 14985) 10. Insert cocking lever (Part No. 14995) on left side of regulated on left side of cable lever, over the two shouldered projecting release mechanism with the movable flange resting securely stud extensions, and slide the bar forward into the locking against the corner of cartridge receiver and spring housing, position. (The regulated release mechanism cannot be actu- with the notched lever portion engaging the cocking pin on ated, nor can enclosure cover be replaced until the lock bar is - both sides of the regulated release. See Figure 50. removed.) See Figure 52. ,. Ir P �`� 7 1 LOCK BAR \,I, COCKING PIN a) PROPERLY INSTALLED ` r COCKING LEVER �1. • 111111111 t✓ Mb FIGURE 52 000si re* _ FIGURE 50 000]+9 , SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-17 7 -1 -98 • REV.1 INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) Installing "Hinged" Style Linkage (Continued) TRIP HAMMER ASSEMBLY . = 1 Make certain tension lever is in the 'UP" position. See 11.1 Figure 53. ■�� —MI ` f e 114 IN. MINIMUM • • ` . ( fi4 mm) [:] _ ` 1� . 31B In. MAXIMUM (9.5 mm) • an Vi. 11, TRIP HAMMER 4• BASE l i TENSION LEVER IN UP' POSITION I %1 ON L v ti•--_ FIGURE 53 FIGURE 54 14. Verify each detector linkage assembly, with correct fusible link, is approximately centered in the detector bracket. NOTICES CAUTION .Due to the close adjustment between the trip po not install cartridge or do not remove lock bar at this hammer and cable lever assemblies, use only time as an accidental actuation could cause system dis- the particular fusible link(s) selected for the charge. installation in each detector, including the termi- nal detector, to ensure correct adjustment when performing Steps 15 and 16. 17. Test detection system in accordance with the 'Testing and Placing in Service," Testing Detection System section of this 15. Raise trip hammer 3/8 in. to 1/2 in. (9.5 to 12.7 mm), pull all manual. slack out of wire rope, and tighten set screw on locking clamp. 18. When all testing has been completed in the `Testing and 16. Lower tension lever to 'DOWN" position and inspect the base Placing in Service" section, cut ott excess wire rope in the reg- of wire rope clamping device to make certain that there is a ulated release assembly, leaving approximately 2 in. (5.1 cm) • - minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) and a maximum of 3/8 in. of wire rope below the clamping device. (9.5mm) clearance between the base of trip hammer assem- I bly and cable lever assembly. See Figure 54. (If clearance is . not between 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) or 3/8 in. (9.5 mm), raise tension lever, loosen set screws on locking clamp and repeat Steps 15 and 16.) • • • SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS - UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5 -18 4I REVS. 4 10-1-02 INSTALLING REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION SINGLE APPUCATION PULLEY To install a remote manual pull station complete the following ( 0)1 ! I-4 • P O ELBOW steps: , °, • * - 1. Make certain that regulated release assembly enclosure cover is detached and lock bar is properly inserted within the regu- 1 ' lated release mechanism. WIRE ROPE NOTICE f / OVAL SLEEVE . Failure to follow these Instructions may lead to CABLE f `u �'a Il LEVER _ - --- ; J system actuation. RELEASE MECHANISM 2. Verify that cartridge has been removed from regulated release �) ' ? • assembly and that the regulated release assembly is in the REMOTE cocked position. _ • MANUAL PULL MI - ■ STATION BREAK ROD LOCK BAR If regulated, release assembly does not have lock bar inserted or cartridge removed, refer to the 'Semi -Annual Maintenance" igilt SIDE 11 I � I - Page 8-1, in 'Maintenance Examination" section, and complete v S Steps 2 and 3 before completing the following installation steps. "ke JUNCTION BOX (NOT RING HANDLE 3. Select a convenient location in the path of exit (or mounting SUPPUED BY ANSUL) the pull station(s) to the wall. Height and location of pull station FIGURE 55 should be determined in accordance with authority having OD 5 jurisdiction. REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION DUAL APPLICATION The total length of the wire rope used for each manual pull sta- 10l'....... . ,.a....](---5(i■ememor a■noxx: tion within a system must not exceed 150 ft. (46 m). ifs r The maximum number of pulley elbows that may be used per PULLEY TEE PULLEY each manual pull station is 20 of Part No. 423250 or 415670. f S LEEVE ' OVAL II OW A maximum of two (2) manual pull.stations can be c onnecte to each AUTOMAN Release. `i, ' RELEASE . — 0 4. If junction boxes) is used, fasten a 4 in. (10 cm) junction box MECHANISM �._ to wall or in wall where pull station is to be mounted, with 6 mounting screws positioned so that when pull station cover is C ABLE positioned in place, the printing will appear right side up and LEVER `, LOCK r.... / readable. BAR �T I ,` ' fi ALTERNATE METHOD OF CONNECTION: coms a. Thread 3/4 x 1/2 in. reducing coupling to bushing on back JUNCTION BOX (NOT REMOTE SUPPLIED BY ANSUL) MANUAL PULL STATION of each cover assembly. See Figure 54a: 1 .. b. Mount pull station cover(s) directly to wall at selected loca- • tion so that printing is right side up and readable. WALL —+ 1 IU CO MPRESSION 11111 PULLEY _�_ S er'8 1 OPTIONAL. CONNECTOR ELBOW ' �J PULLEY TEE CAN / IiI BE LOCATED IN O A( THIS POSITION r 11 lit 111 iiii I : Ill ! NM \No 1 SHORT PIECE 1 BELL OF CONDUIT REDUCING PULL COUPLING STATION RELEASE (MOUNT TO WALL) MECHANISM FIGURE 54a 2 6S 5 1 . Install and secure 1/2 in. conduit, pulley tee (if required), and pulley elbows from each pull station to regulated release assembly as necessary. See Figure 55 or 56. See Figure 56a for optional methods of installing wire rope °069" when utilizing a pulley tee, Part No. 427929. . FIGURE 56 SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5 -19 10 -1 -02 REV.4 INSTALLING REMOTE MANUAL PULL. STATION (Continued) INSTALLING MECHANICAL GAS VALVE PULLEY TEE. PART NOTICE NO. 427929 ONLY Mechanical gas valves are designed for indoor WI'- ___, installation only. 0 To install each Mechanical Gas Shut -off Valve complete the fol- ii No ELBOWS '•i lowing steps. (All gas valve installation and testing shall be made ALLOWED IN in accordance with the authority having jurisdiction.) / THIS AREA NOTE: Mechanical gas valve air cylinder(s) can be installed in reg- OVAL SLEEVE, ulated release assemblies and also regulated actuator .41e- PARr NO. as96 assemblies. Installation in either is the same. 1 1. Make certain that regulated release assembly enclosure cover is detached and lock bar is properly inserted in the regulated CONNECT TO AIR CVUNDER FOR GAS come release mechanism. VALVES AND CONNECT TO RELEASE NOTICE TRIP LEVER FOR PULL STATIONS Failure to follow these instructions may lead to CONTINUOUS WIRE ROPE system actuation. 2. Verify that cartridge has been removed from regulated release � ;�0 assembly and that the regulated release mechanism is in the 0 1 w 1.111 cocked position. MINIMUM OF 1i PART NO. SLEEVE. -I If regulated release mechanism does not have lock bar insert- 6 IN. (152 mm) a ed or cartridge removed, refer to the "Semi - Annual Mainten- • (2) OVAL SLEEVES. once" Page 8-1, in "Maintenance Examination" section, and � �� PART NO 459 complete Steps 2 and 3 before completing the following instal- NO ELBOWS ALLOWED MINIMUM OF CONNECT TO l steps. 6IN. (152 mm) WHERE TWO WIRE AIR CYLINDER ROPES ARE PRESENT FOR GAS 3. Remove plug from cartridge receiver. See Figure 57. SPLICED WIPE CONTINUOUS WIRE VALVES AND ROPE CONNECT TO CARTRIDGE RECEIVER • O . ROPE J RELEASE TRIP O- r — - P LRFOR `�� . u PULLEY TEE. PART � O PULL '1r NO. 427929 ONLY "I STATIONS NOTE. EITVHER ALVES B0TH OR MUST TH MUST BE GBE AS I lair ► ;(�� BO I / PLUG PULL STATIONS. MIXING IS I _� .� NOT ALLOWED. 004910 / , J • FIGURE 564 FIGURE 57 000339 6. Feed wire rope from each pull station through conduit and 4. Locate air cylinder and bracket assembly over the two 7/32 in. each pulley elbow to cable lever located at regulated release (.6 cm) holes on right side of the enclosure. Assemble with assembly. screws, lockwashers, and nuts. Wrench tighten. See Figure NOTICE 58. Air cylinder(s) can also be mounted in the inverted posi- Make certain that wire rope rides on top and in tion, allowing for direct exit out the knockout(s) in the bottom center of pulley sheave. If the 50 ft. (15 m) wire of the enclosure. See Figure 59. rope has been spliced to accommodate a conger FOR MOUNTING ONE MECHANICAL GAS VALVE run, do not allow the spliced ends to be within STOP SLEEVE 6 in. (152 cm) of any pulley elbow or conduit WIRE ROPE adaptor. lc 7. Fasten pull station assembly to each junction box (if junction MOUNTING BRACKET box is used). 8. Slide oval crimp sleeve onto wire rope. Loop wire rope through R NOD RCYLINDER cable lever guide holes and back through the oval crimp � _ , / sleeve. See Figure 55. � °---- i 9. Pull slack out of each wire rope and crimp sleeve. (Use the 1 o� National Telephone Supply Company Nicopress Sleeve Tool 1 CIO Stock No. 51 -C -887 or equal to properly crimp stop sleeve.) ■ See Figure 55. n �� ft I 1 - 1 ' /I >rr"' 1B IN. COPPER TUBING AND FITTINGS FIGURE 558 1 n 14 SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5 -20 ' REV.2 8 -1-01 INSTALLING MECHANICAL GAS VALVE (Continued) TOP KNOCKOUTS I D . V GACALICAL GAS VALVE AIR CYLINDER BOTTOM R•102 REGULATED KNOCKOUTS RELEASE — -____worio. I. FIGURE 59 OOOL1 •NOTE: Two alr cylinders are necessary only if the old style pulley tee, Part No. 15342, Is utilized. 0 new style pulley tee, Part No. 427929, is utilized, only one air cylinder Is required. Individual wire ropes can be run from each gas valve to a sin- gle air cylinder. See Figure 60. 5. To install second mechanical gas valve shut -off system, locate second air cylinder and bracket assembly adjacent to first assembly and over the two remaining 7/32 in.(.6 cm) holes provided on right side of the enclosure. Assemble second cylinder with screws, Iockwashers, and nuts as required. • Wrench tighten. See Figure 60. WIRE ROPE STOP „ SLEEVES lir ► (SYSTEMS U SING AIR CYLINDER I PULLEY TEE, RODS ► PART NO. 157421 " Ilk t Ijl 9MOUN TING - �;� ,. . „., . or, 1/8 IN. COPPER TUBING AND FITTINGS ► — — \ (SYSTEMS USING j S ip PULLEY TEE, PART NO. SLEEVES NOT �\ ` 1 / / � (2) ARE ALLOWED NOTE: NO ELBOWS I BETWEEN AUTOMAN AND PULLEY TEE T 9 . r tt /. ,-- II ca w FIGURE 60 SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5 -21 8 -1 -01 REV.2 . > INSTALLING MECHANICAL GAS VALVE (Continued) ANSUL MECHANICAL GAS VALVES 6. Install the necessary 1/8 in. copper tubing and fittings for each air cylinder to the accessories piping arrangement on the reg- fr. ► ulated release mechanism. See Figures 58 and 60. 1I /. NOTICE Do net kink 1/8 in: copper tubing or f a bend ∎ i too close to a fitting. Secure each. fitting without ov ' ei tightening. Over tightening could result in WO pressure leakage or line separation at actuation. 1 CORRECT WAY: r� VISE GRIP ENDS TO PIPE 7 ^ V BEING INSERTED. . PREVENTS /'i� CAUTION T EXCESS STRAIN ON VALVE BODY. To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, make jittioli, certain that the gas line is turned off before connecting the gas valve. woo Install mechanical gas valve to its selected location in gas line CORRECT WAY: f�' so that it ensures safe shut -off to all predetermined appliances WRENCH APPLIED NEl(T TO PIPE I WRONG WAY: being protected upon actuation of the system. Mechanical gas BEING INSERTED PREVE 1 / WRENCH APPLIED Valves may be mounted in any Convenient horizontal or verti- EXCESS STRAIN ON VALVE BODY AT THIS POINT • cal position. See Figure 61 . BODY STRNNSVALVE a. Use new pipe, properly reamed and cleaned of metal chips. *111111 . b. Make certain gas flow is in the same direction as arrow 11 , shown on gas valve. To avoid cracking the gas valve cast si a � \ l f. - ing, do not overtighten pipe connections. If pipe tape, paste, r spray, or similar lubricant is used, extra care should be �, [�� taken to avoid overtightening. Apply lubricant to male . threads only. c. Wrench tighten pipe to gas valve. DO NOT USE GAS 000.14' VALVE AS A LEVER WHEN INSTALLING OR VALVE I. DAMAGE MAY OCCUR. See Figure 61. ASCO MECHANICAL GAS VALVES d. If strainer is utilized, attach strainer ahead of gas valve. e. If necessary, install drip leg in gas line in accordance with ' • the authority having jurisdiction. f. The total length of wire rope allowed for each valve must not exceed 150 ft. (46 m). �'- ^ g. The maximum number of pulley elbows allowed for each gas valve is 20. � � � 1 ' CORRECT WAY: � � WRENCH APPLIED NEXT I . '-,-.'-`. 0 TO PIPE BEING INSERTED PREVENTS EXCESS �� STRAIN ON VALVE BODY. 000345 CORRECT WAY: VISE GRIP ENDS NEXT TO PIPE BEING INSERTED PREVENTS EXCESS \' STRAIN ON VALVE BODY. �� WRONG WAY: - f ill - WENCH APPLIED THIS R PO INT STRAINS VALVE BODY \ 1 ' - n� dz,„,_..„,,,ell e ,- A oaow • FIGURE 61 I SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS - UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-22 REV. 2 3 -1-01 INSTALLING MECHANICAL GAS VALVE (Continued) ASCO MECHANICAL GAS VALVE 8. Install 1/2 in. conduit, and pulley elbows) from the mechanical gas valve to regulated release assembly enclosure as neces- ` COCKING LEVER sary. - _ M�s� 9. Beginning at the regulated release assembly, thread the end of the wire rope through hole provided in air cylinder rod. See p �� ' Figure 58. 1111111 10. Feed end of wire rope through conduit and each pulley elbow. Make certain that wire rope rides on top and in center of pulley iWM sheave. If the 50 ft. (15 m) wire rope has been spliced to . accommodate a longer run, do not allow the spliced ends to be I I within 12 in. (30 cm) of any pulley elbow or conduit adaptor. 1 J�J 11. Remove side cover on gas valve and thread end of wire rope �_ aao�.t through hole in cocking lever. Slide stop sleeve (Part No. POSITION OPEN POSITION FIRED CLOSED POSON 26317) on to wire rope and crimp. (Use the National FIGURE 63 Telephone Supply Company Nicopress Sleeve Tool Stock No. • 51 -C -887 or equal to properly crimp stop sleeve.) Make cer- 14. Raise air cylinder rod °UP" to its maximum extended position. tain crimp is on top of cocking lever, with wire rope curled ► See Figure 58. • under lever. See Figure 62. • 15. Manually pull wire rope to remove excess slack. NOTICE WIRE ROPE DO NOT ACTUATE THE MECHANICAL GAS • VALVE. Each Mechanical Gas Vane System must have gas valve cocked and air cylinder rod • STOP SLEEVE _ extended "UP" to its maximum extension before • COCKING completing next step. LEVER 16. Slide stop sleeve against air cylinder rod, make certain all ii / slack is removed from wire, and crimp stop sleeve. See Figure '. 58. 17. Cut off any excess wire rope approximately 314 in. (2 cm) from end of stop sleeve. ► FIGURE 62 18. NOTE: If utilizing a pulley tee to operate a single mechanical gas valve from two (2) ANSUL AUTOMAN releases, 12. With the end of wire rope already threaded through hole in air ' see Figure 64 for installation instructions. Maximum cylindder rod, slide stop sleeve (Part No. 26317) onto wire rope length of wire rope to each ANSUL AUTOMAN and leave loose. Do not crimp stop sleeve at this time. See • release must not exceed 150 ft. (45.7 m) and maxi- ► Figure 58. ► mum number of elbows must not exceed 20. • 13. Cock mechanical gas valve as shown in Figure 63. ► TO 'ANSUL AUTOMAN all Waal RELEASE NO OMAN' ANSUL MECHANICAL GAS VALVE RELEASE NO .1 Il I 6 IN, (152 mm) MINIMUM NO PULLEY ELBOWS ill COCKING LEVER II FROM CRIMP SLEEVE -.I-- ALLOWED WHERE TWO TO PULLEY TEE WIRE ROPES ARE PRESENT 11111 1E1 • • n .� - 2 IN. (51 mm) MINIMUM USE (2) TWO 1 •7 FROM CRIMP SLEEVE OVAL SLEEVES. - \11'` TO COMPRESSION _ PART NO 4596 FITTING "i * %. ,t 4 S 44, .-- II - II /1111111 : ° 1 ' : °.' FIGURE 64 ■ 11 ma+e II III X 64 COCKED OPEN POSITION FIRED CLOSED POSITION SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS . UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-23 • 5 8 -1 -01 REV.3 • INSTALLING ELECTRICAL GAS VALVES CORRECT WAY: VISE GRIP ENDS NEXT TO PIPE NOTICE BEING INSERTED. PREVENTS - Electric gas valves are, designed for indoor EXCESS STRAIN ON VALVE BODY. illriS . installation only. �I The following instructions and schematics illustrate methods of � _► vim procedures for installing 110 VAC Electric Gas Shut -off Valves. 1. Make certain that regulated release assembly enclosure cover �� ....01 is detached and lock bar is properly inserted within the regu- ,`;► lated release mechanism.' 1331092 NOTICE . Failure to follow these in structions may lead to O� system actuation. - COR RECT WAY: �/ WRENCH APPLIED NEXT TO PIPE WRONG WAY: NI 2. Verify that cartridge has been removed from regulated release BEING INSERTED PREVENTS WRENCH APPL AT assembly and that the regulated release mechanism is in the EXCESS STRAIN ON VALVE BODY. `� vA v �� RAINS cocked position. � / If regulated release mechanism does not have lock bar insert- 'r < <t ! ed or cartridge removed, refer to the 'Semi-Annual Mainten- V� ♦ ii ' 1%; ance' Page 8-1, in "Maintenance Examination" section, and l r complete Steps 2 and 3 before completing the following instal- lation steps. 001093 3. ► FIGURE 65 j, \ CAUTION 4. Install and secure 1/2 in. conduit from each electric gas valve To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, make to manual reset relay enclosure. certain that the gas line is turned off before connecting the gas valve. 5. Tag and connect electrical wiring to each electric gas valve. • Then, feed wire through conduit to manual reset relay. Tape or • - Install each electric gas valve to its selected location in gas place a wire nut on any unused wire leads in accordance with line so that it ensures safe shut-off to all predetermined appli- authority having jurisdiction. Refer to Figures in °Design" sec - ances being protected upon actuation of the system. Refer to tion for typical wiring diagrams. ► manufacturer's instructions (if provided). See Figure 65. 6 ' ; a. Use new pipe properly reamed and clean of metal chips. LL\ CAUTION b. Install valve so that the actuator is above the horizontal pipe Before working on any electrical wiring, make certain main • line with no more than a Live degree (5 °) lean either way. power has been disconnected. Failure to disconnect main c. Make certain gas flow is in the same direction as arrow power could cause personal injury or death if contact is ' shown on gas valve. made with energized wires. d. If strainer is utilized, attach strainer ahead of gas valve. Connect electrical wiring to manual reset relay along with any e. If necessary, install drip leg in gas line in accordance with contactor, or contractor supplied devices needed. Refer to authority having jurisdiction. manufacturer's instructions and proper figure listed for assis- tance. 7. Tape or place a wire nut on any unused wire leads in accor- dance with authority having jurisdiction. 8. Install and secure 1/2 in. conduit from the regulated release assembly enclosure to manual reset relay enclosure. If snap- action switches have not been attached, go to "Electric • Switch" section and install them at this time by completing - Steps 3 through 8. 9. Tag and connect electrical wiring to each electric (snap - action) switch. Then, feed wire through conduit to manual reset relay. 10. Connect wiring from each electric (snap- action) switch to manual reset relay terminals. Refer to manufacturer's instruc- tions (if provided) and proper figure for assistance. 11. Tape or place a wire nut on any unused wire leads in accor- dance with authority having jurisdiction. 12. Properly return electrical power to the system. SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5 -24 ' REV. 3 10-1-02 INSTALLING ELECTRICAL SWITCHES The procedure for field installing an electric (snap - action) switch is b. With the ANSUL AUTOMAN in the fired position, press the as follows: lever of each switch up, there should be no audible click. When installing multiple switches, make certain all switch- CAUTION es transfer when the release operates. If they do not, read- just their position. Unused wire leads will become "hot' when the system is oper- c. If an audible click is heard in the fired position several c to adequately cover exposed wire end(s) will adjustments can be made. The trip Lever extension pin can cause e e electric shock if touuchch ed. be rotated so the peak of one of the hex points is pointed up against the switch levers. Tighten it in that position. If this 1. Make certain that regulated release assembly enclosure cover doesn't resolve the problem, loosen the screws holding the is detached with lock bar properly inserted within the regulat- switches, apply a- small counterclockwise torque on the ed release mechanism. switches and retighten the screws. If necessary, a final NOTICE adjustment can be made by removing the snap action Failure to follow these instructions may lead to switch and bending the lever slightly. system actuation. d. After adjustments repeat steps a and b. Then, recock 2. Verify that cartridge has been removed from regulated release ANSUL AUTOMAN and install lock bar. assembly and that the regulated release mechanism is in the ACTUATING ARM cocked position. If regulated release mechanism does not have lock bar inserted or cartridge removed, refer to the .....----- M "Semi Annual Maintenance," Page 8-1. in "Maintenance 4 .. Examination" section, and complete Steps 2 and 3 before completing the following installation steps. If regulated release mechanism has a factory installed sole- noid, it will also have a factory installed switch. 3. Press each wire assembly onto the 3- terminals located on the -.4, - MOUNTING HOLE FOR TRIP �" switch(s). Be sure that the connector is pressed tight against LEVER EXTENSION the switch. See Figure 66. :7 SNAP-ACTION ( 1, , BLACK SWITCH � �'� ! G r- COMMON RED '.mel� 1' 1 RED - _ 4 //1�I�111 _ BLACK 1 O N.O """ S- / :I BROWN -- -'' BROWN �1 -__- N.C. O - .. - _. TRIP LEVER PRESS CONNECTOR EXTENSION STUD TIGHTLY AGAINST SWITCH 6Cu66 NOTE: SWITCH SHOWN IN NORMAL POSmON FIGURE 67 I. RM ATING 8. The switch may now be connected to compatible components FIGURE 66 that are predetermined to shut off or turn on. Refer to manu- 001671 facturer's instructions (if provided) for proper wiring connec- 4. Install switch(s) to the mounting bracket using provided fas- tions to compatible components. teners and tighten securely. 9. Tape or place a wire nut on any unused wire leads in accor- 5. If more than one switch is being installed, it is necessary to dance with authority having jurisdiction. attach the trip lever extension stud to the trip lever. See Figure NOTICE 67. Using the provided fasteners, securely install the extension not connect power source to any relay, con - stud. tactor, or contractor supplied devices until all 6. Raise switch actuating arm squarely over the cam surface of other electrical connections are made. Refer to the trip lever. This will allow the trip lever, when actuated, to proper section or manufacturer supplied instruc- force the actuating arm "UP," thus reversing the normal condi- tions for recommended installation procedures tion of the switch. See Figure 67. br these devices. For multiple switch installations, make certain switch actuating 10. Turn off power source and connect power line to any relay, arms are positioned on trip lever extension stud. contactor, or contractor supplied devices where used. Before proceeding with Step 7, test electric (snap- action) switches: a. Remove lock bar. With the ANSUL AUTOMAN in the cocked or ready position, press the lever of each switch up. • If the switch is working properly there should be an audible click. SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5 -25 10 -1 -02 . REV. 3 WIRING 24 VDC REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY (ULC APPROVED ONLY) Refer to the following notes and wiring diagram for instruction on wiring the 24 VDC regulated release assembly. Notes: 1. To be connected to a nominal tit VDC or 24 VDC releasing cir- cuit. Input power: 450 mA at 12 VDC or 750 mA at 24 VDC. Solenoid on time: Approximately 50 milliseconds. 2. Polarization: Observe polarity when connected to a release circuit; Terminal 4 positive, Terminal 8 negative. 3. All interconnecting wiring must be 18 AWG minimum. 4. S contact rating: 15A, 1/3 HP, 125 or 250 VAC resistive; 1 /2A, 125 VDC; 1/4A, 250 VDC; 5A, 120 VAC inductive. 5. SOLI coil resistance: 28 OHMS +/- 10% at 77 °F (25 °C). 6. Install the in -line supervisory device SD across terminals No. 4 and No. 5. Refer to the releasing panel installation instruc- tions for supervisory device requirements. If an in -line super- visory device is not required, install jumper J2 across terminals No. 4 and No. 5. THESE SWITCH CONTACTS TRANSFER UPON A ACTUATION OF RELEASE / HIGH - __�J . THt / ACCESSORY • 11101 / POWER 1 SOURCE 0 Si 1 / 0 0 9. 0 NC V LOW / • ____ ( +) 0 sz / UL LISTED OR S Dx NC - - -- SUPERVISED 0 O RELEASING / CONTROL UNIT ( -) 0 J' IN-LINE / SU S UPERVISORY , DEVICE 1 TZ1 / ( -) J O I SOLI VOLTAGE ) TRANSIENT SUPPRESSOR L - _...- - - - J ' AUXILIARY ALARMING DEVICES. SEE S RATINGS " FUEL SHUT -OFF VALVE, BLOWER MOTOR, DOOR CLOSER. ETC., SEE S RATINGS. FIGURE 68 SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5 =26 REV. 3 10-1-02 • NOTES: • • • • SECTION VI — TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE . ► UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 6 -1 7 -1 -98 REV. 1 After the system has been completely installed, and BEFORE 6. Check burners for gaseous odor. IF GASEOUS ODOR INSTALLING THE CARTRIDGE, the system must be tested at the EXISTS, MANUALLY PUSH THE AIR CYUNDER ROD TO regulated release assembly. THE FULL "DOWN" POSITION IMMEDIATELY. This will cause the mechanical gas valve to shut the gas line off. TESTING MANUAL PULL STATION .Open any doora . and/or windows to clear the area of gaseous To test each remote manual pull station, complete the following fumes, then correct the gas leak before proceeding any steps: further. 1. With the expellant gas cartridge removed, remove lock bar 7. If no gaseous odor exists, pilot light may be ignited at this time. from regulated release assembly cable lever. 8. Reinstall side covers to gas valve housing. Make certain roll 2. On metal stamped pull station, remove glass break rod from pin is positioned within both sides of the valve housing slot. pull station by removing set screw on side of stud and slide Connect visual inspection seals (Part No. 197) on Ansul type glass break rod out. On molded plastic pull station, seal will be valves. See Figure 1. broken during test and must be replaced. . 3. Pull ring handle on pull station. It the regulated release assem- bly is tripped easily, the remote manual pull station is properly installed. If the regulated release assembly does not trip, remove pulley ' � 1 _ tee (if provided) and each pulley elbow cover to make certain wire rope is resting on the pulley sheave. If this does not cor- 1 I iI rect the problem, there is too much slack in the line and it must . I be retightened. t` 4. Cut off any excess wire rope 3/4 in. ( 2 cm ) above oval sleeve. V�SUALINSPECT�ON SEAL (PART NO. 197) 5. Recock regulated release assembly using cocking lever (Part No. 14995) and reinstall lock bar (Part No. 14985) J 6. On metal stamped pull station, slide glass break rod through stud and ring handle. Tighten set screw into stud. On molded . plastic pull station, replace seal. NOTICE FIGURE 1 It no other devices are being attached, proceed 002379 to Page 6-4, Step No. 1, and test the detection system. 9. Make certain the regulated release mechanism is cocked with lock bar in place. TESTING MECHANICAL GAS VALVES NOTICE To fest each mechanical gas shut - off valve complete the following If no other devices are being attached, proceed steps: to Page 6-4, Step No. 1, and test the detection system. 1• 1 ! \ CAUTION To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, before the gas line is turned on, make certain to extinguish any open flames and turn off all burners and any electrical or mechanical devices that are capable of igniting gas. Turn gas line on. 2. Manually push each air cylinder rod to full "DOWN" position. . The gas valve should close. If mechanical gas valve does not trip, remove each pulley elbow cover to make certain wire rope is resting on each pulley elbow sheave. If this does not correct the problem there may be too much slack in the line and it should be retightened. 3. Test for gas leaks by painting connections with a soap solu- tion. Bubbles indicate a gas leak. Tighten connections where • leaks appear and repeat test again to make certain no other gas leaks exist. 4. If no gas leak is found, pull air cylinder rod to full "UP" position. 5. Recock mechanical gas valve. SECTION VI — TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE • UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 6-2 REV. 1 7 -1 -98 TESTING ELECTRICAL GAS VALVES TESTING ELECTRIC SWITCH To test each Electric Gas Shut -off Valve complete the following The procedure for testing a field installed Electric (Snap - Action) steps: Switch is as follows: 1 NOTICE �. C AUTION If an electrical gas shut -off valve is attached to system, perform proper test procedure for the To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, before gas valve first, before completing the following the gas line is turned on, make certain to extinguish any steps. open flames and turn off all burners and any electrical or 1. Turn power source on and if installed, depress reset button on mechanical devices that are capable of igniting gas. manual reset relay (RED LIGHT ON). •All electrical devices should be operating at this time. • Turn gas line on. 2. Make certain electric (snap - action) switch is properly wired. 2. Remove lock bar. 3. Make certain all other devices connected to the manual reset relay are property wired. Refer to typical wiring diagrams in �! \ Figures 80, 81, and 82 in'Design " section. Do not install cartridge at this time or system may be 4. Test for gas leaks by painting connections with a soap solu- actuated. tion. Bubbles indicate a gas leak. Tighten connections where leaks appear. Repeat test again to make certain no other gas 3. Manually actuate the system by operating the remote pull sta- leaks exist. tion. It may be necessary to remove the glass break rod prior to operating pull station. (1f installed, the manual reset relay 5. If no gas leaks are found, turn power source on and depress will de- energize the electric gas valve, thus shutting off the gas the reset button on the manual reset relay (RED LIGHT ON) line.) All electrically- operated devices predetermined to shut to energize (OPEN) electric gas valve. off or turn on should do so. If this does not occur, turn power 6. Remove lock bar from regulated release mechanism. source off and make sure all wiring is properly connected and retest. Refer to Figures 84, 85, and B6 in "Design" section for A\ CAUTION typical wiring diagram. 4. If test is successful, recock regulated release mechanism Do not install cartridge at this time or system may be using cocking lever (Part No. 14995) and reinstall lock bar actuated. (Part No. 14985). If a manual reset relay is installed, depress the reset button (RED LIGHT ON). It will also be necessary to 7. Manually actuate the system by operating the remote pull sta- re -light any pilot lights on the cooking appliances. tion. (It may be necessary to remove the glass break rod prior NOTICE to operating pull station.) Manual reset relay (RED LIGHT If no other devices are being attached, proceed OUT) will de- energize (CLOSE) the electric gas valve, thus to Page 6-4, Step No. 1, and test the detection shutting off the gas line. If this does not happen, turn power system. source off. Then re- examine all wiring connections for proper hookup. Refer to Figures 80, 81, and 82 in "Design° section for typical wiring diagram. 8. If test is successful, recock regulated release mechanism using cocking lever (Part No. 14995) and reinstall lock bar (Part No. 14985). Depress reset button on manual reset relay (RED LIGHT ON). 9. Check burners for gaseous odor. IF GASEOUS ODOR EXISTS, TURN OFF POWER SOURCE IMMEDIATELY. This will cause the electric gas valve to shut the gas line off. Open any doors and/or windows to clear the area of gaseous - fumes, then correct the gas leak before proceeding any further. 10. If no gaseous odor exists, pilot light may be ignited at this time. NOTICE If no other devices are being attached, proceed • to Page 6-4, Step No. 1, and test the detection system. • • • SECTION VI - TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 6-3 10 -1 -02 REV.2 TESTING DETECTION SYSTEM 1. Test detection system by completing the following steps: 4. Upon successful actuation of the system, complete the follow- a. Raise the regulated releaserechanism tension lever to the ing steps: ' "UP" position. a. Raise tension lever to "UP" position and install a properly - rated fusible Zink in the terminal detector. • b. Remove the fusible link from the terminal detector and b. Cock regulated release mechanism using cocking lever ► install a test link (Part No. 15751). See Figure 2. (Part No. 14995) and insert lock bar (Part No. 14985). c. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position. O d. Locate detector linkage and center in each bracket. For "clip on" style linkage, locate linkage in bracket slightly toward termination end of detection run. TEST LINK For "scissor" style linkage, locate linkage in bracket all the ► FlGUR way toward termination end of detection run. c. Locate detector linkage and center in each bracket. e. Make certain the 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) minimum to 3/8 in. For "clip on" style linkage, locate linkage in bracket slightly base mm) maximum clearance was maintained between the toward termination end of detection run. base of the trip hammer assembly and the cable lever assembly. For "scissor" style linkage, locate linkage in bracket all the NOTICE way toward termination end of detection run. Reset any electrical equipment that may have d. Lower regulated release mechanism tension lever to been affected by the system actuation. "DOWN' position and remove lock bar. 1. Install appropriate cartridge into the regulated release e. Using a wire cutter, cut the test link at the terminal detector mechanism receiver and each regulated actuator receiver. to simulate automatic actuation. Hand tighten firmly. 1. 11 system actuates successfully, go to Step 4. g. Remove the lock bar. 2. If the regulated release mechanism does not actuate, check h. Install cover on regulated release assembly and each reg- .., the following components and remedy any disorder as follows: ulated actuator assembly and secure with appropriate fas- a. Check the detector linkage for correct positioning. teners or visual inspection seal. Insert seal (Part No. 197) in each upper and lower cover hole, if applicable. If system b. Check the wire rope for knotting or jamming. is install in an OEM enclosure, attach enclosure cover and c. Check pulley elbows to see that wire rope is tree and cen- • secure with appropriate hardware or procedure. tered in pulley sheaves. If any evidence of pulley elbow i. Record installation date on tag attached to unit and/or in a deformation is found, replace the pulley elbow. permanent file. • d. Make certain that lock bar is removed. "e. Make certain that regulated release mechanism is cocked. • f. Make certain that tension lever is in "DOWN° position. 3. Re -test the system by completing the following steps: a. Make certain regulated release is cocked and lock bar is inserted. b. Raise the regulated release mechanism tension lever to the "UP" position. c. Install a new test link (Part No. 15751) on the terminal detector. d. Lower the regulated release mechanism tension lever to the "DOWN" position. e. Check for 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) minimum 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) maxi- . mum clearance between the trip hammer assembly and the cable lever assembly. 1. Remove the lock bar. g. Using a wire cutter, cut the test link at the terminal detector to simulate automatic actuation. • SECTION VI — TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 6 REV. 2 10 • NOTES: • . . • ' - SECTION VII — RECHARGE AND RESETTING PROCEDURES • ► UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 7 -1 7 -1 -98 REV. 1 ►The recharge information listed in this section deals with the limi- RECHARGE tations and parameters of this pre - engineered system. Those indi- NOTICE viduals responsible for the recharge of the R -102 system must be Determine the cause of system discharge and trained and hold a current Ansul 'certificate in an R -102 training correct immediately before performing system ► program. recharge. For continued fire protection, the R -102 restaurant fire sup- 1. Remove the enclosure cover from the ANSUL AUTOMAN presslon system must be recharged Immediately after use. regulated release assembly and each regulated actuator Recharge procedures for single, double, and multiple -tank sys- assembly. terns are as follows. 2. From tank in regulated release enclosure: Disconnect the • CLEANUP PROCEDURES expellant gas hose from each tank adaptor assembly. Although there is no unusual cleanup procedure of ANSULEX or From tank in mounting bracket , or mounting enclosure: ANSULEX Low pH agents, due to the alkaline nature of these Disconnect expellant gas piping union at each tank adaptor agents, they should be cleaned from kitchen surfaces within 24 inlet line(s). hours after system discharge. The reaction from the wet chemical 3. Disconnect distribution piping union at each tank adaptor out - agent on cooking grease or oil produces a foamy bi- product that let line(s). can be wiped up with a cloth or sponge. The following procedures 4. From tank in enclosure: Remove tank. should be followed: From tank in bracket assembly: Loosen wingnut, disengage ;;, CAUTION bracket band, and remove each tank. `- -' 5. Remove each tank adaptor/tube assembly and complete the Before attempting any cleanup, make certain that all fuel following: sources to the equipment to be cleaned have been shut off. a. Remove 0 -ring and inspect for damage. Make certain that the exhaust hood and all appliance electrical controls have been de- energized to avoid any chance of elec- b. Clean and coat 0 -ring with a good grade of extreme tem- trical shock resulting from the cleaning process or from electri- perature grease and reinstall into adaptor groove. See cally conductive alkaline liquid agent and/or its residue. Figure 1. Make certain all surfaces to be cleaned have cooled down to c. Remove 1/4 in. vent plug. room temperature. d. Clean and inspect for free movement and corrosion. Do not use water to clean any appliances that contain hot Replace if necessary. grease or cooking oils. Doing so may result in violent steaming e. Reinstall vent plug into adaptor body. and/or spattering. 1. The agent is non - toxic; however, food product and cooking �_,' grease /oil that has come in contact with the agent will no longer be suitable for human consumption and should be dis- i carded. 2... Sponge up as much of the agent as possible using sponges or clean rags. Dispose of these sponges or rags in a local san- �� itary land fill site in accordance to local authorities. NOTE: o aiwc Wear rubber gloves during cleanup as sensitive skin may become irritated. If the ANSULEX agent or its residue conies in contact with skin or eyes, flush thoroughly with clean water. FIGURE 1 • 3. Using hot, soapy water and either a clean cloth or sponge, m036' wipe away all foamy residue and thoroughly scrub all surfaces 6 that have come in contact with the agent. Note: Wear rubber �,\ CAUTION gloves during cleanup as sensitive skin may become irritated. If the ANSULEX agent or its residue comes in contact with Do not flush pipe with only water or other non- approved skin or eyes, flush thoroughly with clean water. material, as this could cause internal corrosion, leading to 4. After thoroughly cleaning all affected surfaces, adequately . possible improper discharge. , rinse and allow to completely dry before re- energizing the Piping system must be flushed to remove any wet chemical equipment. residue. To prepare the system for flushing: • a. Pour the complete contents of one 32-oz. bottle of Ansul Flushing Concentrate (Part No. 79656) into an empty R -102 agent tank. One complete bottle is used for either size tank, the 1.5 gallon or the 3.0 gallon. b. Fill the tank approximately half full with warm, clean water. Agitate the tank for a few seconds and then add more warm water to bring the fill level to within approximately 1 in. (2.5 cm) from the bottom of the fill opening. SECTION VII — RECHARGE AND RESETTING PROCEDURES - UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 7 -2 ' • ' REV4 1G -1 -02 RECHARGE (Continued) c. Install adaptor /tube assembly and tighten. To prepare the plastic tubing: d. At expellant gas line inlet to adaptor /tube assembly, install a. Cut enough as many to reach tubing lengths container from each making s them et outlet. a 1/4 in. male. quick connect adaptor. - 9 e. Connect nitrogen cylinder outlet hose to the male quick b. Using a 1N nozzle tip and retainer, (Part No. 56930), slide connect adaptor using the female portion of the adaptor a length of 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) plastic tubing over the rib on the assembly. nozzle tip and secure with a 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) adjustable hose clamp. See Figure 4. This nozzle tip will be connected 7. To perform the flushing procedure, either secure heavy -duty to the nozzle body left installed in the distribution piping. plastic bags to each nozzle (See Figure 2) or remove each nozzle tip and strainer and attach plastic tubing. See Figure 3. c. In the pail cover, drill the number of holes required, large If using plastic bags, secure bags and proceed to. Step 9. enough to insert 1/2 in. NPT fittings, with one additional hole that can be used for venting. If using plastic tubing, proceed to Step 8. d. Secure 1/2 in. compression fitting/threaded adaptors to the VENT HOLES pail cover, using 1/2 in. conduit nuts. See Figure 4. ' IN NOZZLE TIP AND RETAINER RIB ON NOZZLE (PART NO. 56930) NOZZLE FITTING 1/2 IN. TUBING � t HOSE CLAMP ' HOSE CLAMP HEAVY GAUGE PLASTIC BAG ., .: 1/2 IN. COMPRESSION j FIGURE 2 TUBING FITTING/THREADED 001739 INSERT,.......... ADAPTOR . NOZZLE TIP 12 IN. ., Cf�♦� PAIL AND RETAINER CONDUIT - COVER \ tQ NOZZLE NUTS BODY FIGURE 4 C00:187 4 HIGH e. Attach the tubing ends to the compression fittings. Tubing PRESSURE PLASTIC inserts will be required. See Figure 4. TUBING f. Install nozzle /tubing ends to nozzle bodies in discharge piping. 1/2 IN. NPT COMPRESSION g. Make certain each length of tubing is fastened to the pail FITTING/THREADED ADAPTOR cover with the cover snapped securely to the pail. 9. Complete the following steps in the flushing procedure: a. Connect discharge piping to agent tank adaptor. b. Cock ANSUL AUTOMAN Release Mechanism and insert lock bar. . c. Install LT -30-R Cartridge; hand tighten. d. Remove lock bar. . • I FIGURE 3 e. If regulated actuators are included in the system, also como install LT 30-R cartridges in them. 8. If using the plastic tubing option, utilize 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) O.D. f. Actuate system via pull station. plastic tubing with wall thickness not to exceed .062 in. (1.6 mm), and make certain it can withstand the pressures of at g. Wash out all system nozzles and strainers in warm soapy least 90 PSI (620.6 kPa) expelled during the flushing and water, rinse and return all nozzles and strainers to their blowdown procedures. appropriate locations in the discharge piping. Also required is a container with some means of securing tub- h. Remove empty tank. ing to it such as a five- gallon plastic pail and cover that snaps onto the pail. SECTION VII - RECHARGE AND RESETTING PROCEDURES UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 7 -3 10 -1 -02 REV.3 RECHARGE (Continued) 10. Fill each tank with 1.5 (5.8 L) or 3.0 (11.6 L) gallons of only 26. Inspect the base of the wire rope clamping device to make ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant. NOTE: Use a certain there is a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) to a maximum funnel with a screen to stop any foreign material from entering of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) clearance between the base of the trip • the tank. See Page 5-2.1, - Figure . 6, for. detailed filling hammer assembly and the cable lever assembly. instructions:. ... 'NOTICE If clearance Is. not 1/4 in. (ti.4. minimum to - , CAUTION a maximum of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm), raise tension I lever to "UP" position, raise trip hammer 3/8- ► During filling, the agent temperature should be 60 °F to 1/2 in. (9.5 -12.7 mm), tighten set screws, and 80 °F (16 °C to 27 °C). DO NOT FILL WITH COLD repeat Steps 25.and 26. AGENT. DO NOT OVERFILL. Overfilling mall result in 27. Remove lock bar. • agent entering gas hose and regulator potentially causing system malfunction. • . 28. Manually test the' regulated release mechanism by operating the remote manual pull station. 11. Replace bursting disc, Part No. 416974, In adaptor assembly. 2g. Recock the regulated release mechanism and insert the lock Make certain silver side of disc is away from tank.' bar. 12. Replace adaptor /tube assembly and tighten into place. Return 30. Reset all devices which were affected by the system actua- and secure each tank in regulated release assembly and tion. Refer to °Resetting" section, Page 7 -3 and 7 -4. mounting bracket/enclosure. Reconnect expellant gas and dis- tribution piping as required. RESETTING 13. Raise tension lever to "UP" position. Resetting Remote Manual Pull Station 14. Cock regulated release mechanism using cocking lever (Part Metal Stamped Style No. 14995) and install lock bar (Part No. 14985). Reset each remote manual pull station by completing the following 15. Remove empty cartridge from regulated release assembly steps: . and each regulated actuator assembly as required. 1. If necessary, remove set screw that is retaining the break . glass rod. •\ C AUTION 2. If necessary, carefully remove any remaining broken glass Do not install replacement cartridge at this time or system from station. may be actuated. 3. Press and position ring handle in proper location against cover and slide the replacement glass break rod (Part No. 4834) • 16. Install properly -rated fusible links in all detectors except the through stud and handle. terminal detector. 4. Tighten set screw into stud. • NOTICE 5. It no other resetting is required, refer to "Cartridge Replace- It actuation was caused by a fire situation, all ment, Page 7 -4, and complete steps 1 through 5. fusible links must be replaced. 17. Install test link (Part No. 15751) in terminal detector. Molded Plastic Style 18. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position. 1. Position pull ring in vertical groove of pull station cover. 19. Remove the lock bar. 2. Insert break -away seal, Part No. 79029. through holes in cover 20. Using wire cutter, cut the test Zink at the terminal detector to and snap in place. • simulate automatic actuation. NOTICE If regulated release mechanism does not actu- ate, refer to Steps 2 and 3 of the 'Testing Detection System" portion of the 'Testing and Placing In Service" section, Page 6-4, of this manual. 21. After successful actuation, raise the tension lever to "UP" posi- ' tion. 22. Install properly - rated, Ansul approved, fusible link in terminal detector. 23. Cock the regulated release mechanism and install lock bar (Part No. 14985). 24. Locate detector linkage and correctly position in each bracket. 25. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position. SECTION VII — RECHARGE AND RESETTING PROCEDURES • UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 7 -4 REV.2 7-1 -90 • RESETTING (Continued) Resetting Mechanlcal.Gas Shut-Off Valve Resetting Electrical Gas Shut -Off Valve • • Reset each mechanical gas shut -off valve by completing the fol- Reset each electric gas shut -off valve by completing the following lowing steps: • steps:. A\ CAUTION /, , CAUTION �_, To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, before the To reduce the risk of expto lion due to leaking gas, betore the gas line Is turned on, make certain to•extinguish any open gas line Is 'turned on, make certain to extinguish any open flames and turn off all bumers and any electrical or mechani- flames and turn off all burners and any electrical or mechani- cal devices that are capable of igniting gas.. cal devices that are capable of igniting gas. 1. Remove side cover from gas valve housing. 1. Make certain the power source is on. 2. Depress reset button on manual reset relay (red light on). Gas 2. Extend air cylinder rod to full 'UP" position. Air cylinder is valve will resume its normal operating (open) position. • located inside the regulated release assembly enclosure. 3. Check burners for gaseous odor. IF GASEOUS ODOR i 3. engage gas by pulling valve stem up so pin in stem EXISTS, TURN OFF POWER SOURCE IMMEDIATELY. This engages in cocking lever. will cause the electric gas valve to shut the gas line off. 4. Check burners for gaseous odor. IF. GASEOUS ODOR Open any doors and/or windows to clear the area of gaseous EXISTS, MANUALLY PUSH THE AIR CYLINDER ROD TO fumes, then correct the gas leak before proceeding any THE FULL "DOWN" POSITION IMMEDIATELY. This will further. cause the mechanical gas valve to shut the gas line off. Open any doors and /or windows to clear the area of gaseous 4. If no gaseous odor exists, pilot light may be ignited at this time. fumes, then correct the gas leak before proceeding any fur- 5. If no other resetting is required, refer to "Cartridge Replace - ther. ment," Page 7 -5, and complete steps 1 through 5. 5. It no gaseous odor exists, pilot light may be ignited at this time. Resetting Pressure Switch 6. Reinstall side cover to gas valve housing. On Ansul type valve, Reset the pressure switch by completing the following: make certain roll pin is positioned within both sides of the valve housing slot and secure visual inspection seal (Part No. 1. Depress the reset button(s) on the pressure switch cover. The 197) pressure switch assembly(ies) is located on the right side of the regulated release enclosure. An audible click will be heard 7. If no other resetting is required, refer to ''Cartridge to verify the pressure switch has resumed its normal (non- Replacement," Page 7 -4, and complete steps 1 through 5. actuated) condition. Resetting Electrical Switch (Snap - Action) 2. If no other resetting is required, refer to "Cartridge Replace- Reset yte electric (snap- action) switch by completing the following ment," Page 7 -5, and complete steps 1 through 5. steps: REPLACEMENT CARTRIDGE 1. Make certain the power source is on. - To complete the recharge and resetting procedures: 2. Electric (snap - action) switch is reset automatically when the 1. Remove shipping cap and weigh replacement cartridge. regulated release mechanism is recocked. Replace if weight is 1/2 ounce (14.2 g), or more, below weight 3. If no other resetting is required, refer to "Cartridge Replace- stamped on cartridge. ment," Page 7-5, and complete steps 1 through 5. 2. Make certain regulated release mechanism is cocked and lock bar is installed. Then, install replacement cartridge into the regulated release assembly and each regulated actuator receiver and hand tighten. 3. Remove lock bar. - 4. Snap cover on regulated release and each regulated actuator assembly, insert visual seal (Part No. 197) in upper and lower cover hole and secure. . 5. Record recharge date on tag attached to unit and /or in a per- manent file. SECTION VIII — MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 8 -1 10 -1 -02 REV.6 ., h 1 r The maintenance information listed in this section deals with the 7. From tank in enclosure: Remove tan Keep in upright position limitations and parameters of this pre - engineered system. Those to avoid spilling the agent. individuals responsible for the maintenance of the R -102 system From tank in bracket assembly: Loosen.wingnut, disengage must be trained and hold a current Ansul certificate in an R -102 bracket band, and remove each tank. Keep tank in upright training program. position to avoid spilling the agent. Maintenance is required semi - annually'. At the 12 year interval, 8. Remove tank adaptor/tube assembly from each tank. See along with the normal maintenance exam, the tank(s) must be Figure 2. hydro- tested and the regulator(s) must be flow tested. SEMI - ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION 1 Semi - annual maintenance procedures for single, double, and mul- tiple -tank systems are as follows. • NOTICE All /III Under certain circumstances hood and duct cleaning operations may render the fire sup - pression system ineffective due to a coating of cleaning chemical left on the detection equip- ment or mishandling of the system by cleaning service personnel. Therefore, It Is strongly recommended that the R -102 system be completely inspected and serviced by an authorized Ansul distributor Immediately following any such cleaning operations. 1. Remove the enclosure cover from the ANSUL AUTOMAN FIGURE 2 regulated release assembly and each regulated actuator assembly. 9. Make certain that each tank is filled with 1.5 (5.8 L) or 3.0 2. Insert the lock bar (Part No. 14985) on the cocked regulated (11.6 L) gallons of only ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire release mechanism. See Figure 1. . Suppressant. See Figure 3. See Page 5 -2.1, Figure 6, for • detailed filling tolerances. 10. Examine threads on each tank adaptor and tank collar for nicks, burrs, or cross- threading. Clean and coat O -ring with a . good grade of extreme temperature grease. See Figure 3. _ ip ,4 Remove 1/4 in. vent plug and clean and inspect for free move- ment and corrosion (replace if necessary). Reinstall vent plug. • � �= ��! Make certain bursting disc is in place and silver side is away ■ from tank. Clean seating surface and return adaptor /tube LOCK BAR OD PROPERLY assembly to each tank. Tighten securely. INSTALLED SILVER SIDE OF DISC 11111111111114 (<W>) AWAY FROM TANK L J FIGURE 0003.11 3. Remove cartridge from regulated release assembly and each . regulated actuator assembly, install safety shipping cap, and set aside in a safe location. O-RING 4. Remove gasket from cartridge receiver in regulated release 4.- mechanism and each regulated actuator. Check gasket for FIGURE 3 e lasticity or cuts and replace if necessary. Clean and coat gas - • 0043°' ket lightly with a good grade of extreme temperature grease. 11. Place fully charged tanks in enclosures and/or brackets and Reinstall gasket into cartridge receiver(s). secure. ' 5. From tank in regulated release assembly: Disconnect the 12. Carefully assemble and wrench lighten all expellant gas and expellant gas hose from each tank adaptor assembly. agent distribution piping. From tank in bracket/enclosure assembly: Disconnect the 13. Remove blow -off caps from nozzles. Inspect each blow -off cap expellant gas piping union at each tank adaptor inlet line. and replace if deteriorated. On metal blow -off caps, make cer- 6. Disconnect distribution piping union at each tank adaptor out- tain spring clip rotates freely on cap. let line. NOTICE Rubber blow -off caps that have been installed in the system for one year or more must be replaced. SECTION VIII — MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION ' - UL EX: 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 8 -2 REV. 2 10 -1-02 SEMI - ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) • . 17. Raise tension lever to "UP" position. See Figure 5. 14. Check all nozzles to ensure that they are free of cooking • grease build -up and have a covering of dean silicone grease 1111111 =: tip on the orifice. Reinstall blow-off caps. i' 15. Remove the lock bar and manuallY test the regulated release assembly by operating the 'remote manual pull station. Check • I pull station cover for damage or wear. Replace cover if cable 11., 41, has worn a groove in the cover as deep as the diameter of the a cable. l ! TENSION LEVER 16. Cock the regulated release mechanism using cocking lever . IN "UP' POSmoN . (Part No. 14995). See Figure 4. . • � Before proceeding with Step 18, test electric (snap - action) p switches: ( \\; a. With the ANSUL AUTOMAN in the cocked or ready posi- tion, press the lever of each switch up. If the switch is work- % 1 ing properly, there should be an audible click. b. With the ANSUL AUTOMAN in the fired position, press the V lever of each switch up, there should be no audible click. y c. If an audible click is heard in the fired position several , FIGURE 5 adjustments can be made. The trip lever extension pin can • °0"� be rotated so the peak of one of the hex points is pointed 18. Install test link (Part No. 15751) in terminal detector. up against the switch levers. Tighten it in that position. If this doesn't resolve the problem, loosen the screws holding the • 19. Lower tension lever to 'DOWN" position. See Figure 6. switches, apply a small counterclockwise torque on the .l, switches and retighten the screws. If necessary, a final � :ANN can be made by removing the snap action switch and bending the lever slightly. 111 - d. After adjustments, repeat Steps a. and b. Then, recock - 1 ANSUL AUTOMAN and insert lock bar. ° e ::. i TENSION LEVER 1 I'-; IN - OO N POSffION i �'_ • lir-- - C _(,..., L : 1 ISA3 :::: \ al I ' 1 ■ FIGURE NS 6 20. Using wire cutter, cut test link at terminal detector to simulate (1111 automatic actuation. NOTICE 0 If regulated release mechanism does not actu- ate, refer to Steps 2 and 3 of 'Testing Detection System" in "Testing and Placing in Service" _ Section 6, Page 6-3. Ilii:ji • 21. After successful actuation, raise the tension lever to °UP" posi- • FIGURE 4 tion. axon 22. Clean and return properly - rated, Ansul approved, fusible link to terminal detector. NOTICE Fusible links installed in system for one year or more must be replaced. Ansul recommends replacement of links every six months. . SECTION VIII - MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 8 -3 10-1 -02 REV.3 SEMI ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) 29. If a mechanical gas valve is installed, begin the test procedure 23. Remove, clean, and return additional fusible links to series by removing both side covers. detector linkage(s). (Fusible links loaded with grease and 30. At the regulated release, push the air cylinder rod fully down. other extraneous material can result in excessive delays in 31. The gas valve should operate. actuation.) 32. Pull the air cylinder rod to its fully extended position. 24. Inspect wire rope at all detector locations, pulley elbows, pul- Re cock the gas valve by pulling the valve stem up until the pin ley tee and at ANSUL AUTOMAN release. If wire rope shows in the stem engages the cocking lever. signs of wear or fraying, replace entire length. 25. Lower the tension lever to °DOWN" position: • • 34. Reinstall side covers on-the gas valve . and connect the visual indication seal. 26. Recock the regulated release mechanism and insert the lock Test pressure switch by completing Steps No. 1 through No. 9 • bar. on Page 6-3 in Section 6 — 'Testing and Placing In Service" 27. Inspect the base of the wire rope clamping device to make 36. Before reinstalling cartridge, reset all additional equipment by certain that there . a m5 mm) clearance between 1/4 in. (6.4 the base e of the a max- referring to appropriate section of "Recharge and Resetting imum of 3/8 in. (9.) clarewe the as procedures" Section 7. trip hammer assembly and the cable lever assembly. See . Figure 7. 37. Remove shipping cap and weigh each cartridge. Replace if . weight is 1/2 ounce (14.2 g), or more, below weight stamped TRIP HAMMER on cartridge. ii ASSEMBLY 38. Make certain regulated release mechanism is cocked and lock I!r bar is installed, then screw replacement cartridge into regulat- ed release mechanism and each regulated actuator receiv- er(s) and hand tighten. 114 IN. (8.4 mm) I - 4 - MINIMUM 39. Remove lock bar. 3'B IN (95 mm) '� MAXIMUM 40. Snap cover on regulated release and each regulated actuator, insert visual seal (Part No. 197) through holes in cover and box, and secure. • • i b TRIP 41. Record semi - annual maintenance date on tag attached to unit HAMMER and/or in a permanent file. BASE . FIGURE 7 mom NOTICE If clearance is not between 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) or 3/8 in. (9.5 mm), raise tension lever to "UP" posi- tion, raise trip hammer 3/8 -1/2 in. (9.5- - 12.7 mm), tighten set screws, and repeat Steps 24 and 26. 28. Locate detector linkage and properly position in each bracket. For "clip on style linkage, locate linkage in bracket slightly toward termination end of detection run. For "scissor" style linkage, locate linkage in bracket all the way toward termination end of detection run. SECTION VIII — MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 8-4 , RFV 4 10 -1.02 • 12 -YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION 6. Disconnect distribution piping union at each tank adaptor out - Twelve -year maintenance procedures for single, double, and let line. multiple -tank systems are as follows. 7. From tank in enclosure: Remove tank. NOTICE , From tank in bracket assembly: Loosen wingnut, disengage Under certain ciroumstances hood and duct bracket band, and remove each tank. Keep tank in upright cleaning operations may render your fire sup - position to avoid spilling the agent. • pression system ineffective due to a coating of 8. Loosen tank adaptor/tube assembly and remove: cleaning chemical left on the detection equip- 9 ment or mishandling of the system by cleaning CAUTIOtJ service personnel. �= Therefore, it Is strongly recommended that Safety glasses should be worn durin operations the R -102 system be completely Inspected of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant. Avoid con - and serviced by an authorized Ansul distrib- tact with skin or eyes. In case of contact, flush immediate- utor immediately following any such clean- y with water for 15 minutes. If irritation persists, contact a ing operations. physician. Do not take internally. if taken Internally do not • At twelve -year intervals, the liquid agent tank(s) induce vomiting. Dilute with water or milk and .contact a must be hydrostatically tested and refilled with a physician. fresh charge of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant. The date of manufacture is Pour the liquid agent from the tank into a clean, plastic con - stamped on the bottom of the agent tank. tainer, and flush tank with clear water. 1. Remove the enclosure cover from the ANSUL AUTOMAN 10. At this point, each liquid : agent tank, including the 1/4 in regulated release assembly and each regulated actuator gas hose assembly, must be. HYDROSTATICALLY TESTED to assembly. • 330 psi (2275 kPa). Refer to °Hydrastatic Test Instructions" F -7602, for test adaptors and instructions. Verify date stamped 2. Insert the lock bar (Part No. 14985) on the cocked regulated on cartridge. The cartridge must be hydrotested at intervals • release mechanism. See Figure 8. not greater than 12 years. If cartridge date indicates the need for hydrotesting, the cartridge must be bled down through nor- mal ANSUL AUTOMAN release operation, returned to Ansul for credit, and replaced with a charged, replacement cartridge. NOTICE � Cartridge bleed down can be used to verity pneumatic accessories operation. �•' LOCK BAR PROPERLY INSTALLED r 11111 • FIGURE 8 WW2 I 3. Remove cartridge from regulated release assembly and each regulated actuator assembly, install safety shipping cap, and set aside in a safe location. CAUTION Do not reinstall cartridge at this time or system may be actuated. 4. Remove gasket from cartridge receiver in regulated release mechanism and each regulated actuator. Check gasket for elasticity or cuts and replace if necessary. Clean and coat gas- ket lightly with a good grade of extreme temperature grease. Reinstall gasket into cartridge receiver(s). 5. From tank in enclosure: Disconnect the expellant gas hose from each tank adaptor assembly. From tank in bracket assembly: Disconnect expellant gas pip- ing union at each tank adaptor inlet line. • • SECTION VIII - MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 8 -5 • 10 -1 -02 REV.3 12 - YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) For Second Tank: Disconnect expellant gas piping at union. Remove union from expellant as plping and Install pipe 11. The regulator must be flow tested at 12 year intervals. Check cap to prevent cartridge pressure from escaping during the date code stamped on thg regulator body to determine if , test. See Figure 10. the regulator(s) requires the 12 year testing (see data code table). If regulator does not require testing, proceed to step 12. f �, . \ Flow test the regulator(s) per the following:. �1 • Date Code Table Month — Code Year - Code I January A 1981 K February B 1982 L March C 1983 M '�. April D 1984 N . May E 1985 P r June F 1986 R July G 1987 S August H 1988 T September J 1989 U ` 0 I ' • October K 1990 V r November L 1991 Y � ` December M 1992 Y \ 1993 Z 1994 A FIGURE 10 1995 B ► mcno 1996 C 1997 D Pressure Switch: If pressure switch is provided, it should 1998 E remain connected as part of system maintenance test. 1999 F NOTICE • 2000 G For multiple -tank systems, one test kit (Part 2001 H No. 56972) is required tor each regulator in a. Regulated Release Mechanism the system. For First Tank: Disconnect expellant gas hose from tank. b. Regulated Actuator Connect regulator test kit (Part No. 56972) to hose. See For First Tank: Disconnect expellant gas hose from tank. ► Figure 9. Connect regulator test kit (Part No. 56972) to hose. See . Figure 11. 1 ��, to 4 y.. 1/ .. FIGURE 9 . ` Do r I ► FIGURE 11 000371 SECTION VIII — MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 8 -6 n , RE/.4 10-1-02 • 12 -YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) • For Second Tank: Disconnect expellant gas piping at union. e. Flow test each regulator by completing the following steps: Remove union from expellant gas piping and install pipe Diaphragm Style —The correct pressure should read 90 to cap to prevent cartridge pressure from escaping during 110 psi (6.2 to 7.6 bar).with•the valve on the test kit closed ► test. See Figure 12. and 80 psi (5.5 bar) with the valve on the test kit opened. Keep the valve opened to completely. empty the pressure cartridge after pressure test has been verified. • I Piston Style — Open the valve on the regulator test kit. The correct pressure should read between 95 to 125 psi (6.6 to 8.6 bar). Keep the valve open to completely empty the pres- sure cartridge. 1 1 ,i1. ?, If necessary, continue to flow test at each additional regu- .... ..„ lated actuator. Test each regulated actuator by repeating Step e. f. Cock release mechanism using cocking lever (Part No. 14995) and insert lock bar (Part No. 14985). (i g. Remove empty nitrogen cartridge(s) from release mecha- y'' 1 nism and each regulated actuator. h. Remove test kit(s) from release mechanism and each reg- ulated actuator. 1 It regulator test was not successful, replace regulator. . FIGURE 12 CO0312 j. Reconnect all expellant gas lines. NOTICE k. Reset all additional equipment that was operated by Make certain valve is closed on regulator release mechanism. test kit or pressure will escape before test can 12. Examine threads on each adaptor and tank collar for nicks, be performed. burrs, or cross-threading. Clean and coat 0-ring with a good c. Install either a nitrogen or CO2 cartridge into release grade of extreme temperature grease. Make certain bursting mechanism and each regulated actuator provided with the disc is in place and silver side is away from tank. See system. (Cartridge should be conditioned to approximately Figure 14. 70 °F (21 °C) before test.) C <» NOTICE �J' Before continuing with Step d, make certain ' — valve on test kit is closed. , OP d. Remove lock bar and operate remote manual pull station to actuate the regulated release and supply pressure to each test kit. Two styles of regulators are used with the R -102 release 0-RING ► mechanisms. The diaphragm style (see Figure 13) was used in R -102 systems up to approximately 1988. The pis- FIGURE 14 • ton style (see Figure 13) has been used since 1988. Each WOW style requires a slightly different flow test procedure. Use the appropriate flow test procedure as stated in Step e. 11;111ek . gilrite669•1. % ) .-; 9 . ON DIAPHRAGM STYLE PISTON STYLE (USED UNTIL 1988) (USED AFTER 1988) . FIGURE 13 . SECTION VIII — MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 8-7 10 -1 -02 REV.3 12 -YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) • 19. Raise the tension lever to °UP" position. See Figure 16. 13. Refill each tank with 1.5 (5.8 L) or 3.0 (11.6 L) gallons of only Iflililill•IIIII new ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant. NOTE: Use a funnel with a screen to stop any foreign material from enter- = . ,.. • ing the tank. See Page 5- 2.1,,Figure 6, for detailed filling .. • i ng the fi 14. Clean seating surface and return each adaptor /tube assembly to tank. Firmly tighten. l NOTICE ,� TENSION LEVER Do not reinstall any tank at this time. y IN 11P' POSITION 15. Remove blow -off caps from nozzles. Inspect each blow -off cap [o and replace if deteriorated. On metal blow -otf caps, make cer- L ` % \� fain spring clip rotates freely on cap. 11 NOTICE %% Rubber blow -off caps that have been V installed in the system for one year or more t• , must be replaced. 16. Check all nozzles to ensure that they are free of cooking 1' FIGURE 6 C01312 grease build -up and have a covering of clean silicone grease 20. Install test link (Part No.15751) in terminal detector. on the orifice. Reinstall blow -off caps. 17. Remove lock bar and manually test the regulated release • 21. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position. See Figure 17. assembly by operating the remote manual pull station. 1111111111111111 ; 18. Cock the regulated release mechanism using cocking lever MEIN : • (Part No. 14995). See Figure 15. 'a -. • - q 7 1 ( �: TENSION L EPER 1,:-,- l IN'DOWN'POSITION 1 j,--- icon 8 '- I I FIGURE 17 C010913 (It 22. Using wire cutter, cut test link at terminal detector to simulate automatic actuation. NOTICE 0 If regulated release mechanism does not actuate, refer to Steps 2 and 3 of "Testing Detection System" in °Testing and Placing in J Service; Section 6. . FIGURE 15 23. After successful actuation, raise the tension lever to °UP" ammo position. 24. Clean and return properly - rated, Ansul approved, fusible link , to terminal detector. NOTICE. Fusible links installed in system for one year or more must be replaced. 25. Remove, clean, and retum additional fusible links to series detector linkage(s). (Fusible links loaded with grease and other extraneous material can result in excessive delays in actuation.) • SECTION VIII — MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 8-8 II REV. 1 10 -1 -02 12 -YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) • 37. Install cover on regulated release assembly and each regulat- 26. Lower tension lever to `DOWN" position. ed actuator assembly and 'secure with appropriate fasteners or visual inspection seal. Insert seal (Part No. 197) in each 27. Recock the regulated release mechanism and insert lock bar. upper and lower cover hole, if applicable. If system is installed 28. Inspect the base of the wire rope' clamping device to make in an OEM enclosure, attach, enclosure cover and secure with certain that there is a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) and a max - appropriate hardware or procedure. imum of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) clearance between the base of the • 38. Record date of 12 year maintenance examination on tag trip hammer assembly and the cable lever assernbty. See attached to enclosure and/or in a permanent file. • Figure 18. TRIP HAMMER ASSEMBLY j • � + 1141N. (BA mm) MINIMUM 3l8 IN. (UM 9S mm) 1111111ra 1/ � MAXIM TRIP HAMMER BASE tge i •) • ► FIGURE 18 NOTICE If clearance is not between 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) or 3/8 in. (9.5 mm), raise tension lever to "UP" position, raise trip hammer 3/8 -1/2 in. (9.5- 12.7 mm), tighten set screws, and repeat Steps 26 and 28. 29. Locate detector linkage and properly position in each bracket. 30. Make certain additional devices have operated as intended. 31. Before reinstalling cartridge, reset all additional equipment by • referring to appropriate section of `Recharge and Resetting Procedures' Section 7. 32. Place each fully charged tank in enclosure and/or bracket and secure. 33. Reconnect all distribution piping and expellant gas piping unions as required. Wrench tighten. 34. Check each gas cartridge by removing shipping cap and weighing cartridge. Replace if weight is 1/2 ounce (14.2 g), or more, below weight stamped on cartridge. 35. Make certain regulated release mechanism is cocked and lock bar is installed, then screw replacement cartridge into regulat- ed release mechanism and each regulated actuator receiv- er(s) and hand tighten. 36. Remove lock bar. SECTION IX - APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9 -1 10 -1 -02 REV.5 SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDE NOTE: System options do not cover all conceivable variations. They are listed here as a general guideline to show the most common type arrangement for multiple systems, Based on certain system designs utilizing manifolding, non - manifolding, 3 -tank systems, etc., other tank/cartridge combinations can be designed. The combinations below are based on 11 flow, 3.0 gallon tanks and 5 flow, 1.5 gallon tanks. More competitive designs may be available by utilizing 12 flow and 6 flow systems when appropriate. • Total Tank Type of Carbon Dioxide Nitrogen Flow No.' Quantity System Type of Hardware Cartridge Required Cartridge Required 1 -5 1 Single 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101 -10 (423439) LT-20-R (423429) 6 -11 1 Single 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101 -20 (423441) LT 30-R (423435) 12 -16 2 Double 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101 -30 (423443) Double (423493) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank . 17 -22 2 Double 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101 -30 (423443)** Double (423493) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 23-33. 3 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101 -20 (423441) LT-30-R (423435) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443)"' LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 23 -27 3 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101 -10 (423439) LT-20-R (423429) (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443)' LTA -101 -30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 28-33 3 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release N/A Double (423493) (Optional) (2) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tanks 34 -38 4 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101.10 (423439) LT 20-R (423435) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A LT-A-101-30 (423491) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 34 -38 4 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101 -30 (423443) Double (423493) (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443) "' 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank LT 30 -R (423435) 39- 44 4 Multiple 3.0 gal. Reg. Actuator 101-20 (423441) LTA- 101 -30 (423491) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 39-44 4 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101 -30 (423443)" Double (423493) (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443)"' 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 45 -49 • 5 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101 -30 (423443) Double (423493) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 45 -49 5 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101 -10 (423439) LT 20 -R (423429) (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator • 101 -30 (423443) "• LT -A- 101 -30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank .. LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443)' 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank • Based on 5 now numbers for a 1.5 gal. system and 11 Itaw numbers for a 3,0 gal. system. •• 1I tanks are manitolded, only a 'double tank nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 423493) can be used. ••• II tanks are manifolded, either an LT-A.101-30 nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 42349t) or a double tank cartridge (Part No. 423493) can be used. 1. SECTION IX - APPENDIX _ UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9 -2 . 4 .REV. 5 1 n-1.n2 SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDE (Continued) . Total • Tank Type of Carbon Dioxide Nitrogen Flow No • Quantity System Tyne of Hardware Cartridge' Required • Cartridge Required • 50-55 5 , . Multiple Double (423493) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release • ' 101 -30 (423443) ) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank • 3.0 Reg. Actuator N/A LT-A-101,30 (423491) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 50-55 • 5 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101 -20 (423441) LT-30-R (423435) (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443) " LT -A- 101 -30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443)* LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank .. • 56 -60 6 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101 -30 (423443) Double (423493) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443)"' LTA- 101 -30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443)"' LT-A-101-30 (423491) • 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank • 61 -66 6 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101 -30 (423443)" Double (423493) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443)"' LT -A- 101 -30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443)"' LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 67 -71 7 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101 -10 (423439) LT-20-R (423429) • s (2) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A (2) LT -A- 101 -30 (423491) .,..„ . (2) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 67 -71 7 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101 -10 (423439) - - (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443) LT-A- 101 -30 (423491) 1.5 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443) "• LT -A- 101 -30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443)' LT -A- 101 -30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -20 (423441) "' LT -30 -R (423435) • 72.77 7 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-20 (423441) LT-30-R 42343 (423491) (2) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A (2) LTA (2) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box • 7P -77 7 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release . 101 -10 (423439) - - (Optional). 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443) " LT -A- 101 -30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443) "• LT -A- 101 -30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443)*** LT-A- 101 -30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -20 (423441) LT -30 -R (423435) • Based on 5 how numbers fora 1.5 gat. system and 11 flow numbers fora 3.0 gal. system. " • fl tanks are manifotded, only a'double tank" nitogen cartridge (Part No. 423493) can be used. ••• if tanks are manifolded either an LT -A- 101.30 nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 423491) or a double tank cartridge (Part No. 423493) can be used. • • SECTION IX — APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9 -5 10 -1 -02 REVS ,, t.. r SYSTEM COMPONENT INDEX Part No• pescription Ear1% Description ► 429853 Mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN 418054 OEM Regulated Electric Release Shipping Assembly (ULC Regulated Release Shipping Assembly Includes: Regulated Release Mechanism with Also) Includes: Regulated Release Mechanism in Solenoid and Switch Stainless Steel Mounting Enclosure 1/4 in. Hose and Mounting Bracket 429656 Electric ANSUL AUTOMAN 79493 OEM Regulated Mechanical Release Shipping Regulated Release Shipping Assembly Assembly Includes: Regulated Release Mechanism with Includes: Regulated Release Mechanism Solenoid and Switch in 1/4 in. Hose and Mounting Bracket Stainless Steel Mounting Enclosure • 429850 Regulated Actuator Shipping Assembly 418691 OEM Regulated Actuator Shipping Assembly Includes: Actuator and Regulator (ULC Includes: Actuator and Regulator in Hose Also) Stainless Steel Mounting Enclosure Bracket • 429870 Stainless Steel Mounting Box Shipping Assembly ► 429878 3.0 Gallon Bracket Assembly (ULC Includes: Stainless Steel Mounting Box I ► 32381 101 Remote Release Assembly (Bracket Only) Also) 429872 Two Tank Enclosure Shipping Assembly (ULC Includes: Two (2) Expellant Gas Hoses 418522 OEM Regulated Actuator Shipping Assembly Also) Two (2) Grommets Includes: Actuator and Regulator Stainless Steel Mounting Box Hose 429859 24 VDC Regulated Release Shipping Assembly (ULC) Includes: 24 VDC ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Shipping Assembly Release Mechanism in Stainless Steel Mounting Box 429864 1.5 Gallon Tank Shipping Assembly • ► 430299 3.0 Gallon Mechanical Release Shipping Assembly 56972 Regulator Test Kit including: 429853 Mechanical Regulated Release Assembly Includes: Gauge, Hose and Valve Assembly 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly 79694 1.5 Gallon (5.8 L) Container of ANSULEX Low pH 430300 1.5 Gallon Mechanical Release Shipping Assembly Liquid Fire Suppressant including 79372 3.0 Gallon (11.6 L) Container of ANSULEX Low pH 429853 Mechanical Regulated Release Assembly Liquid Fire Suppressant 429864 1.5 Gallon Tank Assembly 430.309 3.0 Gallon Regulated Actuator Shipping Assembly • 423429 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (LT -20 -R) (TC /DOT) including: 429850 Regulated Actuator Assembly 423435 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (LT 30 -R) (TC /DOT) 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly 430316 1.5 Gallon Stainless Steel Enclosure Shipping 423493 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (R -102 Double -Tank) Assembly including: (TC/DOT) 429870 Single Tank Mounting Box Assembly 429864 1.5 Gallon Tank Assembly 423491 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (LT-A-101-30) (TC /DOT) 430317 3.0 Gallon Stainless Steel Enclosure Shipping 423439 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (101 -10) (TC /DOT) Assembly including: - 429870 Single Tank Mounting Box Assembly 15850 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (101-10) (DOT) 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly 423441 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (101 -20) (TC /DOT) 430324 6.0 Gallon Stainless Steel Enclosure Shipping Assembly including: • 423443 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (101 -30) (TC /DOT) 429872 Two Tank Mounting Box Assembly 419347 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (1W) 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly (2) Includes: 25 1W Nozzles (Part No. 419336) 25 Blow -Off Caps 430332 3.0 Gallon Mounting Bracket Shipping Assembly including: 419345 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (1 /2N) 429878 3.0 Gallon Mounting Bracket Assembly Includes: 9 1 /2N Nozzles (Part No. 419334) ► 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly 9 Blow -Off Caps SECTION IX - APPENDIX _ UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9 -6 fl• ti REV. 4 10 -1 -02 SYSTEM COMPONENT INDEX (Continued) rt jgg, Description Part No• Description 419346 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (1N) 417368 Terminal Detector Package ( "Scissor") Includes: 25 1N Nozzles (Part No. 419335) Includes: Test Link 25 Blow Off Caps 415671 Pulley Elbows Shipping Assembly 430913 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (1100) (Socket End) - to 700 °F (371 °C) Includes: 25 1100 Nozzles (Part No. 430912) Includes: 50 Elbows (Part No. 415670) 25 Blow -Off Caps 423251 Pulley Elbows Shipping Assembly 419349 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (3N) (Compression End) - to 700' °F (371 °C) Includes: 9 3N Nozzles (Part No. 419338) Includes: 50 Elbows (Part No. 423250) 9 Blow Off Caps • • 427929 Pulley Tee 419348 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (2W) Includes: 25 2W Nozzles (Part No. 419337) 15821 Wire Rope (50 Feet (15 m)) 25 Blow -Off Caps • 79653 Wire Rope (500 Feet (152 m)) 419350 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (230) Includes: 25 230 Nozzles (Part No. 419339) 24919 Stop Sleeve Package 25 Blow -Off Caps Includes: 10 Stop Sleeves (Part No. 26317) 419351 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (245) 24918 Oval Sleeve Package Includes: 25 245 Nozzles (Part No. 419340) Includes: 10 Oval Sleeves (Part No. 4596) 25 Blow -Off Caps 78196 1/4 in. °Ouik -Seal" Adaptor Package • 419352 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (260) Includes: 24 "Ctuik- Seals" (Part No. 78195) Includes: 9 260 Nozzles (Part No. 419341) 9 Blow -Off Caps 77285 3/8 in. °Ouik -Seal" Adaptor Package Includes: 24 "Duik- Seals" (Part No. 77284) 418353 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (290) .r Includes: 9 290 Nozzles (Part No. 419342) 77287 1/2 in. "Duik -Seal" Adaptor Package .:_;' 9 Blow -Off Caps Includes: 24 "Cluik- Seals" (Part No. 77286) ~ • • 419354 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (2120) 77289 3/4 in. °Duik -Seal" Adaptor Package Includes: 9 2120 Nozzles (Part No. 419343) Includes: 24 °Duik- Seals" (Part No. 77288) 9 Blow -Off Caps 79149 1/4 in. "Compression -Seal" Pipe Adaptor Package 419344 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (1 F) Includes: 24 °Compression - Seals" Includes: 9 1F Nozzles (Part No. 419333) (Part No. 79148) 9 Blow -Off Caps 79151 3/8 in. "Compression -Seal" Pipe Adaptor Package 423572 Swivel Adaptor Shipping Assembly Includes: 24 "Compression - Seals" Includes: 25 Swivel Adaptors (Part No. 418569) (Part No. 79150) 77695 Blow -Off Cap Shipping Assembly (Spare) 79147 1/2 in. "Compression -Seal' Pipe Adaptor Package Includes: 50 Blow -Off Caps Includes: 24 "Compression - Seals" (Part No. 79146) 79745 Metal Blow -Off Cap Shipping Assembly • Includes: 10 Blow -Off Caps For Standard 79153 1/2 in. °Compression -Seal" EMT Conduit Adaptor Non - Swivel Nozzles Package Includes: 24 "Compression - Seals" • 415568 Metal Blow -Off Cap Shipping Assembly (Part No. 79152) Includes: 10 Blow -Off Caps for Swivel Nozzles 423253 Hood Seal Adaptor Shipping Assembly Includes: 6 Hood Seals • 551265 Nozzle Aiming Device _ 56837 Series Detector Package ("Clip On ") 13707 Gas Shut -off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz) Includes: Solenoid Valve - 3/4 in. 56838 Terminal Detector Package ( "Clip On ") 13708 Gas Shut -off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz) Includes: Test Link Includes: Solenoid Valve -1 in. 15373 Series Detector Package (°Hinged°) 13709 Gas Shut -off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz) 15375 Terminal Detector Package ( °Hinged ") Includes: Solenoid Valve -1 1/2 in. Includes: Test Link 13710 Gas Shut -off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz) 417369 Series Detector Package ( "Scissor) Includes: Fluid Power Gas Valve - 2 in. SECTION IX — APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-6.1 10 -1 -02 REV.3 • U A SYSTEM COMPONENT INDEX (Continued) PILO -% Descrlptlof moo. Description 17643 Gas Shut -off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz) 423435 Recharge Equipment Includes: Fluid Power Gas Valve — 3 in. Includes: LT-30-9 Cartridge 14702 Gas Shut -off Equipment,(Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz) 423493 Recharge Equipment Includes: Relay — Manual Reset Includes: Double System Cartridge 423878 One Electric Switch (Field Mounted) Kit Includes: Electric Switch (SPDT), 423491 Recharge Equipment Mounting Hardware Includes: LTA- 101 -30 Cartridge • 423879 Two Electric Switch (Field Mounted) Kit 423439 Recharge Equipment Includes: 2 Electric Switches (SPDT), Includes: 101 -10 Cartridge Mounting Hardware 423441 Recharge Equipment 423880 Three Electric Switch (Field Mounted) Kit Includes: 101 -20 Cartridge Includes: 3 Electric Switches (SPDT), Mounting Hardware 423443 Recharge Equipment Includes: 101 -30 Cartridge 423881 Four Electric Switch (Field Mounted) Kit Includes: 4 Electric Switches (SPDT), • 79372 Recharge Equipment Mounting Hardware Includes: 3.0 Gallon (11.4 L) Container of • ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire • 428311 Alarm Initiating Switch Kit Suppressant 55598 Gas Shut -off Equipment Mechanical (Annul) 79674 Recharge Equipment Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve — 3/4 in. Includes: 1.5 Gallon (5.7 L) Container of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire 55601 Gas Shut -off Equipment Mechanical (Ansul) Suppressant Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve — 1 in. 417911 Recharge Equipment 55604 Gas Shut -off Equipment Mechanical ( Ansul) Includes: Package of 10 Tank Adaptor Bursting Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve —1 1/4 in. Discs 55607 Gas Shut -off Equipment Mechanical ( Ansul) 77695 Recharge Equipment Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve — 1 1/2 in. Includes: 50 Blow -Off Caps 556.10 Gas Shut -off Equipment Mechanical (Ansul) 24916 Recharge Equipment Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve — 2 in. Includes: 10 Test Links (Part No. 15751) 25937 Gas Shut -off Equipment Mechanical (ASCO) 415739 Recharge Equipment Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve — 2 1/2 in. Includes: Fusible Link 165 °F (74 °C) 25938 Gas Shut -off Equipment Mechanical (ASCO) 415740 Recharge Equipment Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve — 3 in.- Includes: Fusible Link 212 °F (100 °C) 15733 Gas Shut -off Equipment 415744 Recharge Equipment Includes: Air Cylinder and Tube Assembly Includes: 25 Nol 41 Links 280 °F (138 °C) 4835 Remote Manual Pull Station — Metal Stamped Includes: Remote Manual Pull Station Assembly 415745 Recharge Equipment 50 Ft. (15 m) of Wire Rope Includes: 25 Fusible Links 360 of (182 °C) (Part No. 415742) 24915 Break Rod Package Includes: 10 Glass Break Rods (Part No. 4834) 415746 Recharge Equipment (Replacement) Includes: 25 Fusible Links 450 °F (232 °C) • (Part No. 415743) 427074 Trim Rings (Pack of 10) 31809 16 in. (41 cm) Stainless Steel Actuation Hose 73867 Recharge Equipment 32335 20 in. (51 cm) Stainless Steel Actuation Hose Includes: 25 Fusible Links 500 °F (260 °C) (Part No. 56816) 32336 24 in. (61 cm) Stainless Steel Actuation Hose .430815 42 in. (107 cm) Stainless Steel Actuation Hose 423429 Recharge Equipment Includes: LT-20-R Cartridge • SECTION IX - APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9 -6.2 ., REV. 2 10 -1-02 SYSTEM COMPONENT INDEX (Continued) • Part No Description 79651 Recharge Equipment . ' Includes: Detector Bracket — °Clip -On" 53771 Recharge Equipment Includes: Detector Linkage — °Clip -On" 79651 Recharge Equipment Includes: Detector Bracket —"Scissor • 415817 Recharge Equipment Includes: Detector Linkage — "Scissor" 15344 Recharge Equipment • • Includes: Detector Bracket — "Hinged" 15343 Recharge Equipment • Includes: Detector Bracket Linkage — "Hinged" 14985 Recharge Equipment Includes: Lock Bar 14995 Recharge Equipment Includes: Cocking Lever • 26310 Recharge Equipment Includes: Cocking Lever for ANSUL AUTOMAN It -C ., 15618 Recharge Equipment Includes: Cocking Lever and Lock Bar Assembly 15240 Recharge Equipment Includes: 500 °F (260 °C) Exhaust Duct Thermometer 197 ;: Recharge Equipment Includes: Lead and Wire Seal 418087 Recharge Equipment Includes: Installation Manual • • SECTION IX — APPENDIX . UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9 -7 10 -1-02 REV.3 "ANSUL AUTOMAN" REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY 1 -■ Ir., °o C. 14 (ORDEFIED 0 4 : 11 %....... %.%.....%%%%% .sommo■ aXr. 000 SEPARATEL`n � ...-_,..4 - • 'IN - . 5 15 13 8 P1=01111 . SA. ' 0 : ■ 7 aill IL14111 O 6 18 /1 17 t�e,.- 19,20 ' [ill] 000317 Figure Mechanical Electrical fig, Description Part No. Part No. — Regulated Release Shipping Assembly 429853 429856 1 _ Mounting Box 419293 419293 2 Basic Release w /Regulator 79140 : Basic Release w /Solenoid, Switch, and Regulator 79288 3 • Self- Tapping Screw 71342 71342 • 4 Spacer 76555 76555 5 Tension Spring • 79094 79094 6 Lever and Bracket Assembly 79300 79300 • 7 Machine Screw 14973 14973 8 Lockwasher 7310 7310 9 Hex Nut 14732 14732 10 Caution Label 57652 57652 11 Gasket 181 181 12 Expellant Gas Cartridge Assembly 423435/423441 423435/423441 • LT (Ordered Separately) . Double Tank/101 -30 (Ordered Separately) 423493/423443 423443/423443 13 Safety Shipping Cap 77251 77251 14 Tank Assembly 1.5/3.0 Gal. (Ordered Separately) 429864/429862 429864/429862 • 15 Hose Assembly 79007 79007 ►16 Enclosure Cover (Includes Label) 423744 423744 ►17 Solenoid Assembly — 423575 18 Electric Snap - Action Switch 423878 — 19 Cover Screw 15362 15362 20 Speed Nut 423479 423479 SECTION IX — APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9 -8 RE V. 3 1 0 0 1 02 . REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY 3 r 10 I 4 (ORAEAED ■ SEPARATELY) C V 'J t i i L2 s 12 -. s � e ` 411141 1%-4.41 NI 1 11 . [: :-.1 aow 74 1 13,14 Figure NO. Description Part No. — Regulated Actuator Assembly 429850 1 - Mounting Box 419293 2 '• Pneumatic Actuator Assembly Including Regulator 79340 3 Hex Jam Nut 67990 4 Hole Adaptor (2) 423277 5 Lockwasher 69521 . 6 Gasket 181 7 Expeflant Gas Cartridge Assembly 423429/423439 ► LT 20- R/101 -10 (Ordered Separately) I LT-30-R/101-20 (Ordered Separately) 423435/423441 Double Tank/101 -30 (Ordered Separately) 423493/423443 ► LTA -101- 30/101 -30 (Ordered Separately) 423491/423443 8 Safety Shipping Cap 77251 ► 9 Label 426953 10 Tank Assembly 1.5/3.0 Gal. (Ordered Separately) 429864/429862 11 Hose Assembly 79007 ►12 Enclosure Cover (Without Labels) 419294 13 Cover Screw 15362 14 Speed Nut 423479 SECTION IX — APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-9 8-1 -01 REV.3 ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY • 111111114111 111%1111°. • 4 -- 444111411111.111444%1111 %111 3 2 -► 41 ,+ 000.175 • 5 • Figure Part No. Description 429870 Enclosure Shipping Assembly 419295 1 Enclosure 419296 2 Cover 429871 3 Nameplate 15362 4 Screw 423479 5 • Speed Nut • • SECTION IX — APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-10 REV. 3 10-1-02 '" • BRACKET ASSEMBLY .-• • riplumo "mot .;_., • ,40 41110 MOM • •Figure 3.0 Gallon Description Part No. Bracket Shipping Assembly 429878 1 Bracket Assembly • 2 Grommet 14089 3 Grommet 8688 Wing Nut 12065 • • . . . . , i SECTION IX — APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEic747. Page 9 -10.1 10 -1 -02 REV. li - TANK ASSEMBLY 5 4 V�/ 3 g ' I_ _ - - -� 2 • 1 .... i . - ii,..... •-) 6--i . Coons 1.5 Gallon 3.0 Gallon Figure Part No. Part No. NI Description — Tank Assembly 429864 429862 1 • Pickup Tube Assembly 429883 417700 2 0 -Ring 56909. 56909 3 Vent Plug Assembly 74247 74247 4 Union Nut 417705 417705 5 Union Tail Piece 417706 417706 6 Shell 429861 429862 7 Nameplate N/A N/A 8 Burst Disc 418974 418974 • t` E, i. i L' . SECTION IX – APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9 -10.2 ! • •^ • REV. 1 10-1-02 ►REMOTE RELEASE 2 17 • ( O I 1 i • 1 i i p . .3 12 i 11 ( 4 til - . -"- 1 {3 I ,fw. T 10 3rC 1 6 • e lb. \ 1 .C127 19 18 . 17 . (ORDERED . • SEPARATELY) 6 9 `\ ooasze . 6 Figure part No. Ng, Description — Remote Release 32381 1 Mounting Box 15954 2 Cover 17441 3 Ring Pin Assembly 15368 4 Pop Rivet 15053 5 Spring 79094 6 Speed Nut -12042 7 Machine Screw 14973 8 Hex Nut . 14732 9 Lockwasher 7310 10 101 Release 15443 11 Spacer 14970 12 Screw 15834 13 Machine Screw 15362 14 Tension Lever and Bracket Assembly 15956 15 Bushing 14972 16 Cap Screw 79280 17 Angle Bracket 15396 18 Gasket 181 19 101 Cartridge (TC/DOT) 423439 . (DOT) 15850 SECTION IX - APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-3 10 -1 -02 REV.5 SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDE (Continued) • • Total Tank Type of Carbon Dioxide Nitrogen Flow No.' Quantity aysdefid Type oI Hardware Cartridge Required Cartridge Required 78-82 8 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101 -30 (423443) LT-30-R (4234 4234.35) 3.0 Gal. Additional. Tank . (2) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A (2) LTA- 101 -30423491 ( ) ) (2) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box . 78-82 8 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101 -10 (423439) LT-A-101-30 (423491) (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443) 1.5 Gal. Additional Tank .. LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443)' 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443) "' 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443)"' 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 83-88 8 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101 -30 (423443) LT -30 -R (423435) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank (2) LT-A-101-30 (423491) (2) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A (2) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 83-88 8 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101 -10 (423439) LT- - -A-101-30 (423491) (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443) "' 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank LT-A-101-30 (423491) • 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443) "' 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 89-99 9 Multiple Remote Mech. Release 101 -10 (423439) N/A 3 (3) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A (3) LT -A- 101 -30 (423491) (3) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 89 -93 9 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101 -10 (423439) LT-A-101-30 (423491) (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443)"' 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443)*** 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank ... LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator . 101 -30 (423443) "' 1.5 Gal. Additional Tank LT 30 R (423435) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -20 (423441) 94 -99 9 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101 -10 (423439) LT-A-101-30 (423491) (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443)"' 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank LT-A-101-30 (423491) _ 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443) "' 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank LT-A-101-30 (423491) .. 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443) "' 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443) *" 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank LT 30 R (423435) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -20 (423441) • Based on 5 Raw numbers for a 1.5 gal. system and 11 how numbers lot a 3.0 gal. system. " If tanks are manifolded, only a "double tank' nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 423493) can be used. ••• 11 tanks are manildded. either an LT-A-101-30 nitrogen cartridge (Pan No 423491) or a double tank cartridge (Part No. 423493) can be used. SECTION IX - APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9 -4 ' 7 REV. 7 10 -1 -02 - • SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDE (Continued) ►Total Tank Type of Carbon Dioxide Nitrogen • Flow No.* Quantity System Tvoe of Hardware Cartridae Reauired Cartridae Reauired 100 -110 10 Multiple Remote Mech. Release 101 -10 (423439) N/A (3) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A (3) LTA- 101 -30 (423491) (3) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -20 (423441) LT 30 -R (423435) • 100 -104 10 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101 -10 (423439) LT-A-101-30 (423491) (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443) 1.5 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) • 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443) " LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443) " LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443) " LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 100 -104 10 Multiple Remote Mech. Release 101 -10 (423439) N/A (Optional) (2) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A (2) LT-A-101-30 (423491) (2) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box (2) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator (2) 101 -30 (423443) (2) LT-A- 101 -30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 1.5 Gal. Additional Tank 105 -110 10 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101 -10 (423439) — — (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443)* " LT-A- 101 -30 (423491) : . `: -. 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443)"' LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443) " LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443) " LT -A- 101 -30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30 (423443)' LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank • Based on 5 flow numbers bra 1.5 gal. system and 11 flow numbers fora 3.0 pal. system " If tanks are manitdded. oNy a'double tank' nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 423493) can be used. "- 11 tanks are manitolded. either an LT-A-101-30 nitrogen cartr)dpe (Part No. 423491) Or a double tank cartridge (Pan No. 423493) can be used D. Options are available up to a maximum of 15 tanks. Contact Ansul Technical Services Department for detailed information. • • SECTION IX — APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9 -11 10 -1 -02 REV.5 fc • o► ,S • • Multiple Nozzle Fryer Protection Calculation Examples • Example No. 2 — Fryer With Drlpboard. This fryer has an overall fry vat, including a dripboard, that measures 24 in. (61 cm) in Example No. 1 — Donut Fryer Without Dripboard. This fryer has depth x 20 in. (51 cm) in length. The actual frypot measures 20 in. a frypot that measures 26 in. in depth x 28 in. in length (66 x 71 x 20 in. (51 cm x 51 cm). Because both the frypot and the overall cm). Because the frypot exceeds' the maximum dimensions for fry vat including the dripboard exceed the maximum dimensions one nozzle, multiple nozzles will be required. for one nozzle, multiple nozzles will be required. Procedure: Find the area of the fryer by multiplying the 26 in. Procedure: Divide the fryer cooking area from left to right or from depth x the 28 in. length (66 x 71 cm) which equals front to back into modules that not exceed single 728 sq. in. (4697 sq. cm). Using the 3N nozzle n0zzle area limitations and longest side limitations as (approved for fryers with the longest side of 25 3/8 in. described in the table for "Fryer Multiple Nozzle (64 cm) and a maximum of 370.5 sq. in. (2390 sq. Protection" located in the Design Section. cm) in area), divide the total area of 728 sq. in. (4697 sq. cm) by 370.5 sq. in. (2390 sq. cm) to find the The example fryer can either be divided from left to number of nozzles needed. 728 sq. in. (4697 sq. cm) right into two modules, each measuring 10 in. x 24 in. divided by 370.5 sq. in. (2390 sq. cm) per nozzle = (25.4 cm x 61 cm), or it can be divided from front to 2 nozzles required. Then verify the maximum longest back. See Figure 2. side dimension of 25 3/8 in. (64 cm). Doing this will If the fryer is divided from front to back, two 2 -flow require doubling the 3N nozzles to = a total of 4 nozzles may be adequate. To determine this, first nozzles, if we are to protect the 26 in. (66 cm) depth protect as much of the rear portion of the vat (the fry- and the 28 in. (71 cm) length of the fryer with this 3N pot area) that is allowed with 2 -flow appliance noz- nozzle option. See Figure 1. zles using the maximum area of 210 sq. in. (1355 sq. Using the same process, but utilizing the 3N nozzle cm) per nozzle with the maximum longest side of 21 (53 cm approved for fryer protection with the longest side of in. ( cm) for multiple nozzles. See Figure 2. 27 5/8 in. (70 cm) and the maximum of 324 sq. in. In the example, the frypot is 20 in. (51 cm) from side (2090 sq. cm) in area, the calculation will change to to side. Use the maximum area of 210 sq. in. (1355 728 sq. in. (4697 sq. cm) divided by 324 sq. in. (2090 sq. cm) allowed for one nozzle and divide it by 20 in. sq. cm) per nozzle = 3 nozzles. Because this 3N (51 cm), a total of 10 1/2 in. (27 cm) of the frypot can nozzle option will protect 27 5/8 in. (70 cm) on the be protected with one 2 -flow nozzle (210 sq. in. divid- longest side, it will protect the 26 in. (66 cm) side in ed by 20 in. = 10.5 in.). See Figure 2. this example, thus eliminating the need for extra noz- - This leaves the remainder of 91/2 in. (24 cm) of frypot • zles. Utilizing this option, in this example, will require and the entire dripboard yet to protect. One 2-flow a total of 9 flow but allows less nozzles and less appliance nozzle will protect up to 101/2 in. (27 cm) of nozzle drops'. See e Figure 1. frypot, therefore, there is no need to verify the remain - •Note: 2 -flow appliance nozzles can also be used. ing 9 1/2 in. (24 cm). There is only the overall of 9 1/2 This option requires a total of 4 nozzles (728 sq. in. in. (24 cm) remaining plus the dripboard to verify. divided by 210 sq. in. per nozzle = 4 nozzles, or 8 51 x cm ( n i in. x in 20 in. (10 measures m 4 ar dripbod . total flows). Using this option requires that the noz- The The with dripboard d overall ruresi 4 in of 20 n 10 cm x 51 area be placed over each quadrant of frypot area pro- rea w ith of o l r x ai id. r o cm x 51 cm) = 270 • tected and aimed to the center of the modules. This sq. in. size of 13 1 1 r2 2 in . x2 in. ( g the "Multiple = 27 0 option may be desirable it minimizing total system Fryer Table," a 2 -flow appliance nozzle can protect an • flows is important. area including dripboard, of 294 sq. in. (1897 sq. cm) 14 IN 9316 IN. 93/6114. 9 1/4 IN. with a longest side of 21 in. (53 cm). Because the 1 cm) 1 1(23. c m) cm) (23.6 an6 area is less than the maximum of 294 sq. in. (1897 sq. cm) and the longest side is less than the maxi- j mum of 21 in. (53 cm), a 2-flow nozzle will be sufti ( - �) e � . 1 cient. See Figure 2. 1 26 IN. 26 IN - I • Adding the protection required for the back of the fry • -- - i - - - -- (66 cm) • I (66 cm) 1 I pot to the front protection requires two 2 -flow appll- • i • e 1 ante nozzles as a minimum. See Figure 2. I I I • , 1 1 I 201N. 1�, 201N 26 IN. r (51 cm ) t' (51 cm) (71 SECOND 3N NOZZLE OPTION �{- "" �� 2 FIRST 3N NOZZLE OPTION T • i • T 1 ( 2 72 N. • 002466 FIGURE 1 I I I — 5 = (51 cm) I (61 cm) 9 12 IN. (61 cm) (24 em) • 10 114. 4 IN. (25.4 em) 4 IN. (10 cm) (10 cm) DIVIDED FRONT TO BACK DIVIDED LEFT TO RIGHT FIGURE 2 • SECTION IX — APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9 -12 r• REV. 3 10 -1 -02 • NOTES: • ANSUL INCORPORATED ', ONE STANTON STREET ,o.MARISVETTE. WI 54143-2542 715- 735 -7411 • 0 N 0 S qS� ' B